WO2001079261A1 - Tetrahydro-azepinone derivatives as thrombin inhibitors - Google Patents

Tetrahydro-azepinone derivatives as thrombin inhibitors Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2001079261A1
WO2001079261A1 PCT/US2001/012337 US0112337W WO0179261A1 WO 2001079261 A1 WO2001079261 A1 WO 2001079261A1 US 0112337 W US0112337 W US 0112337W WO 0179261 A1 WO0179261 A1 WO 0179261A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
carbon atoms
compound according
mmol
hydrogen
compound
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2001/012337
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Jonathan Zhangi Ho
Joseph Edward Semple
Original Assignee
Corvas International, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US09/550,257 external-priority patent/US6541467B1/en
Application filed by Corvas International, Inc. filed Critical Corvas International, Inc.
Priority to AU2001255408A priority Critical patent/AU2001255408A1/en
Publication of WO2001079261A1 publication Critical patent/WO2001079261A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D413/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D413/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D413/06Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A61P7/02Antithrombotic agents; Anticoagulants; Platelet aggregation inhibitors
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D487/00Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00
    • C07D487/02Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D487/06Peri-condensed systems
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/06Dipeptides
    • C07K5/06139Dipeptides with the first amino acid being heterocyclic
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00Medicinal preparations containing peptides

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to compounds which are potent inhibitors of thrombin.
  • the present invention relates to novel peptide analogs, their pharmaceutically acceptable salts, and pharmaceutically acceptable compositions thereof, which are useful as potent inhibitors of blood coagulation in vi tro and in vivo in mammals.
  • the invention relates to methods of using these inhibitors as therapeutic agents for disease states in mammals characterized by abnormal thrombosis.
  • the present invention relates to methods of using these inhibitors as in vi tro diagnostic agents .
  • BACKGROUND AND INTRODUCTION TO THE INVENTION Normal hemostasis is the result of a complex balance between the processes of clot formation (blood coagulation) and clot dissolution (fibrinolysis) .
  • the complex interactions between blood cells, specific plasma proteins and the vascular surface maintain the fluidity of blood unless injury occurs. Damage to the endothelial barrier lining the vascular wall exposes underlying tissue to these blood components. This in turn triggers a series of biochemical reactions altering the hemostatic balance in favor of blood coagulation which can either result in the desired formation of a hemostatic plug stemming the loss of blood or the undesirable formation of an occlusive intravascular thrombus resulting in reduced or complete lack of blood flow to the affected organ.
  • the blood coagulation response is the culmination of a series of amplified reactions in which several specific zymogens of serine proteases in plasma are activated by limited proteolysis. Nemerson, Y. and Nossel, H.L., Ann. Rev. Med., 33: 479 (1982). This series of reactions results in the formation of an insoluble fibrin matrix composed of fibrin and cellular components which is required for the stabilization of the primary hemostatic plug or thrombus. The initiation and propagation of the proteolytic activation reactions occurs through a series of amplified pathways which are localized to membranous surfaces at the site of vascular injury (Mann, K.G., Nesheim, M.E., Church, W.R. , Haley, P.
  • Factor Xa catalyzes the penultimate step in the blood coagulation cascade which is the formation of the serine protease thrombin. This step occurs following the assembly of the prothrombinase complex which is composed of factor Xa, the non-enzymatic co-factor Va, and the substrate prothrombin assembled on the surface of adhered, activated platelets or systemically circulating membranous microparticles .
  • Proteolytic activation of zymogen factor X to its catalytically active form, factor Xa can occur by either the intrinsic or extrinsic coagulation pathways.
  • the intrinsic pathway is referred to as "intrinsic" because everything needed for clotting is in the blood. Saito, H., "Normal Hemostatic mechanisms", Disorders of Hemostasis , pp. 27-29, Grune & Stratton, Inc. (O.D. Ratnoff , M.D. and CD. Forbes, M.D. edit. 1984) .
  • This pathway is comprised of the zymogen serine proteases, factors IX and XI, and the non-enzymatic co-factor, factor VIII.
  • the initiation of the intrinsic pathway results in the activation of factor XI to XIa.
  • Factor XIa catalyzes the activation of factor IX to factor IXa which in combination with the activated form of factor
  • extrinsic The extrinsic pathway is referred to as "extrinsic" because the tissue factor which binds to and facilitates the activation of factor VII comes from outside the blood. Saito, id .
  • the major components of this pathway are the zymogen serine protease, factor VII, and the membrane bound protein, tissue factor. The latter serves as the requisite non-enzymatic co-factor for this enzyme.
  • the initiation of this pathway is thought to be an autocatalytic event resulting from the activation of zymogen factor VII by trace levels of activated factor VII (factor Vila) , both of which are bound to newly exposed tissue factor on membrane surfaces at sites of vascular damage.
  • the factor Vila/tissue factor complex directly catalyzes the formation of the serine protease, factor Xa, from its zymogen, factor X. Exposure of blood to injured tissue initiates blood clotting by the extrinsic pathway.
  • thrombin is catalyzed by factor Xa following the assembly of the catalytic prothrombinase complex as reviewed by Mann, K.G. et al . , "Surface- Dependent Reactions of the Vitamin K-Dependent Enzyme Complexes," Blood, 76:1-16 (1990).
  • This complex is composed of factor Xa, the non-enzymatic co-factor Va and the substrate prothrombin all assembled on an appropriate phospholipid surface.
  • the requirement of a macromolecular complex for efficient catalysis results in the protection of factor Xa from natural anticoagulant mechanisms such as heparin-antithrombin III mediated inhibition. Teite, J.M.
  • thrombin is the most potent agonist of platelet activation, and it has been demonstrated to be the primary pathophysiologic-mediator of platelet-dependent arterial thrombus formation. Edit, J.F. et al . , J. Clin . Invest . , 84:18 (1989).
  • Thrombin-mediated platelet activation leads to ligand- induced inter-platelet aggregation principally due to • the bivalent interactions between adhesive ligands such as fibrinogen and fibronectin with platelet integrin receptors such as glycoprotein Ilb/lIIa which assume their active conformation following thrombin activation. Berndt, M.C. and Phillips, D.R., Platelets in Biology and Pathology, pp. 43-74, Elsevier/North Holland
  • Thrombin- activated platelets can also support further thrombin production through the assembly of new prothrombinase and tenase (factor IXa, factor Villa and factor X) catalytic complexes on the membrane surface of intact activated platelets and platelet-derived microparticles, following thrombin-mediated activation of the non- enzymatic cofactors V and VIII, respectively. Tans, G. et al . , Blood, 77_:2641 (1991). This positive feedback process results in the local generation of large concentrations of thrombin within the vicinity of the thrombus which supports further thrombus growth and extension. Mann, K.G. et al .
  • thrombin In contrast to its prothrombotic effects, thrombin has been shown to influence other aspects of hemostasis. These include its effect as an important physiological anticoagulant.
  • the anticoagulant effect of thrombin is expressed following binding of thrombin to the endothelial cell membrane glycoprotein, thrombomodulin. This is thought to result in an alteration of the substrate specificity of thrombin thereby allowing it to recognize and proteolytically activate circulating protein C to give activated protein C (aPC) .
  • aPC activated protein C
  • aPC is a serine protease which selectively inactivates the non-enzymatic co-factors Va and Villa resulting in a down-regulation of thrombin formation by the prothrombinase. and tenase catalytic complexes, respectively. Esmon, C.T., Science, 235:1348 (1987) . The activation of protein C by thrombin in the absence of thrombomodulin is poor. Thrombin has also been shown to be a potent direct mitogen for a number of cell types, including cells of mesenchymal, origin such as vascular smooth muscle cells. Chen, L.B. and Buchanan, J.M., Proc . Natl . Acad . Sci .
  • thrombin acts as a direct secretagogue inducing the release of a number of bioactive substances from vascular endothelial cells including tissue plasminogen activator. Levin, E.G. et al . , Thromb . Haemost . , 5_6:115 (1986).
  • the enzyme can indirectly elaborate potent mitogenic activity on vascular smooth muscle cells by the release of several potent growth factors (e.g. platelet-derived growth factor, PDGF, and epidermal growth factor, EGF) from platelet ⁇ -granules following thrombin-induced activation. Ross, R. , N. Engl . J. Med . , 314 :408 (1986).
  • potent growth factors e.g. platelet-derived growth factor, PDGF, and epidermal growth factor, EGF
  • abnormal hemostasis With respect to the coronary arterial vasculature, abnormal thrombus formation due to the rupture of an established atherosclerotic plaque is the major cause of acute myocardial infarction and unstable angina. Moreover, treatment of an occlusive coronary thrombus by either thrombolytic therapy or percutaneous transluminal coronary angioplasty (PTCA) is often accompanied by an acute thrombotic reclosure of the affected vessel which requires immediate resolution.
  • PTCA percutaneous transluminal coronary angioplasty
  • venous vasculature With respect to the venous vasculature, a high percentage of patients undergoing major surgery in the lower extremities or the abdominal area suffer from thrombus formation in the venous vasculature which can result in reduced blood flow to the affected extremity and a predisposition to pulmonary embolism.
  • Disseminated intravascular coagulopathy commonly occurs within both vascular systems during septic shock, certain viral infections and cancer and is characterized by the rapid consumption of coagulation factors and systemic coagulation which results in the formation of life-threatening thrombi occurring throughout the vasculature leading to widespread organ failure.
  • thrombosis in the arterial vasculature is a major clinical concern in today's medicine. It is the leading cause of acute myocardial infarction which is one of the leading causes of death in the western world. Recurrent arterial thrombosis also remains one of the leading causes of failure following enzymatic or mechanical recanalization of occluded coronary vessels using thrombolytic agents or percutaneous transluminal coronary angioplasty (PTCA), respectively.
  • Ross, A.M. Thrombosis in Cardiovascular Disorder, p. 327, W.B. Saunders Co. (Fuster, V. and Verstraete, M. edit. 1991); Califf, R.M. and Willerson, J.T., id .
  • arterial thrombosis is the result of a complex interaction between fibrin formation resulting from the blood coagulation cascade and cellular components, particularly platelets, which make up a large percentage of arterial thrombi.
  • Heparin the most widely used clinical anticoagulant administered i.v., has not been shown to be universally effective in the treatment or prevention of acute arterial thrombosis or rethrombosis . Prins, M.H. and Hirsh, J., J " . Am . Coll . Cardiol . , 67 : 3A (1991) .
  • the need for safe and effective therapeutic anticoagulants has in one aspect focused on the role of the serine protease thrombin in blood coagulation.
  • thrombin cleavage site on the Aa chain of fibrinogen which is the primary physiological substrate for thrombin, is reported to contain a glycine residue in this position while the cleavage site on the Bb chain contains a serine, as shown below: P4 P3 P2 PI PI'
  • substrate-like peptidyl derivatives such as D- phenylalanyl-prolyl-argininal (D-Phe-Pro-Arg-al) , D- phenylalanyl-prolyl-arginine-chloromethyl ketone (P- PACK) and acetyl-D-phenylalanyl-prolyl-boroarginine (Ac- (D-Phe) -Pro-boroArg) have been reported to inhibit thrombin by directly binding to the active site of the enzyme.
  • Bajusz, S., Symposia Biologica Hungarica, 25:277 (1984) Bajusz, S. et al . , J. Med. Chem.
  • Peptidyl compounds which are said to be active site inhibitors of thrombin but which differ in structure from those containing an uncharged amino acid in the P3 recognition subsite have been reported.
  • Argatroban also called 2R,4R-4- methyl-1- [N-2- (3-methyl-l, 2 , 3 , 4-tetrahydro-8- quinolinesulfonyl) -L-argininyl] -2-piperdinecarboxylic acid
  • Argatroban has been reported to be a potent antithrombotic agent in several experimental models of acute arterial thrombosis. Jang, I.K. et al . , in both Circulation, 81:219 (1990) and Circ . Res . , 67:1552 (1990) .
  • Hirudin and certain peptidyl derivatives of hirudin have been reported to inhibit both conversion of fibrinogen to fibrin and platelet activation by binding to either both the active site and exo site, or the exo site only, of thrombin. Markwardt, P., Thromb . Haemostas . , 66:141 (1991). Hirudin is reported to be a 65 amino acid polypeptide originally isolated from leech salivary gland extracts. It is said to be one of the most potent inhibitors of thrombin known. Marki , W.E.
  • Hirugen has been reported to be a peptide derived from the anionic carboxy-terminus of hirudin. It is reported to bind only to the anion binding exo-site of thrombin and thereby inhibit the formation of fibrin but not the catalytic turnover of small synthetic substrates which have access to the unblocked active site of the enzyme. Maraganore, J.M. et al . , J. Biol . Chem . ,
  • the region of hirudin represented by hirugen has been reported, as according to by x-ray crystallographic analysis, to bind directly to the exo site of thrombin. Skrzypczak-Jankun, E. et al . , Thromb . Haemostas . , 65:830 at abstract 507 (1991). Moreover, the binding of hirugen has also been reported to enhance the catalytic turnover of certain small synthetic substrates by thrombin, indicating that a conformational change in the enzyme active site may accompany occupancy of the exo-site.
  • Hirugen also is reported to block thrombin-mediated platelet aggregation. Jakubowski, J.A. and Maraganore, J.M., Blood, 75:399 (1990).
  • a group of synthetic chimeric molecules comprised of a hirugen-like sequence linked by a glycine-spacer region to the peptide, D-phenylalanyl-prolyl-arginine, which is based on a preferred substrate recognition site for thrombin, has been termed to be hirulog. Maraganore et al . , U.S. Patent No.
  • 4-amidinophenylpyruvic acid has been reported to be a thrombin inhibitor with low toxicity and favorable pharmacokinetics. However, this compound was reported to be non-selective, inhibiting trypsin, plasmin and kallikrein. Markwardt et al . , Thromb . Res . , 1:243-52 (1972).
  • Other benzamidine-derived structures which have been reported to inhibit thrombin include the cyclic amides of N ⁇ - substituted 4-amidinophenylalanine and 2 -amino-5- (4- amidinophenyl) -1-valeric acid. The inhibitory constant displayed by these compounds was reported to be in the micromolar range.
  • amidino-bearing aromatic ring structures such as ⁇ -naphthamidines have been reported to possess modest antithrombin and anticoagulant activity.
  • This class of compounds include the non-selective 6-amidino- 2-naphthyl-4-guanidinobenzoate dimethanesulfonate (FUT 175). Fuji et al . , Biochim . Biophys . Acta , 661:342-5 (1981); and Hitomi et al . , Haemostasis, 15:164-8 (1985).
  • Certain phenylguanidines have been reported to inhibit thrombin.
  • Derivatives of 4- guanidinophenylalanine with inhibitory constants in the micromolar range have been reported to inhibit thrombin.
  • This class includes the N ⁇ -tosylated and dansylated 4- guanidino phenylalanine piperidides . Claeson et al . , Thromb . Haemostas . , 5_0:53 (1983).
  • Another compound, [ethyl p- (6-guanidinohexanoyloxy) benzoate] methane sulfonate (FOY) was reported to be a non-selective competitive inhibitor of thrombin. Ohno et al . , Thromb . Res . , 19:579-588 (1980).
  • the present invention is directed to novel compounds having a lactam at P3 and which feature a bicyclic ring group at PI. These compounds have activity as inhibitors of thrombin.
  • the present invention is directed to compounds of formula (I) : wherein
  • Rx is selected from the group consisting of:
  • alkyl of 1 to about 12 carbon atoms which is optionally substituted with Y and/or Y 2 (2) alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms substituted with cycloalkyl of about 3 to about 8 carbon atoms which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the ring with Y l7 Y 2 and/or Y 3 ,
  • Y a , Y 2 and/or Y 3 (6) alkenyl of about 2 to about 6 carbon atoms which is optionally substituted with cycloalkyl of about 3 to about 8 carbon atoms, which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the ring carbons with Y 1; Y 2 and/or Y 3 , (7) aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms which is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted with Y ⁇ , Y 2 , and/or Y 3 ,
  • heteroaryl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms with the ring atoms selected from carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur, and which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted with Yi, Y 2 , and/or Y 3 , (9) aralkyl of about 7 to about 15 carbon atoms which is optionally substituted on the alkyl chain with hydroxy or halogen and mono-, di-, or tri- substituted in the aryl ring with Y lr Y 2 , and/or.
  • Y 3
  • heteroaralkyl of 5 to 14 ring atoms with the ring atoms selected from carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur, and which is optionally substituted on the alkyl chain with hydroxy or halogen and optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted on the ring with Yi, Y 2 , and/or Y 3 , (11) aralkenyl of about 8 to about 16 carbon atoms which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the aryl ring with Y 1; Y 2 , and/or Y 3 ,
  • each Y l t Y 2 , and Y 3 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, cyano, nitro, tetrazolyl optionally substituted with alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, guanidino, amidino, methylamino, methylguanidino, -CF 3 , -CF 2 CF 3 , -CH(CF 3 ) 2 , -C(OH) (CF 3 ) 2 , -0CF 3 , -OCF 2 CF 3 , -OCF 2 H, -OC(0)NH 2 , -0C(0)NHZ ⁇ , -OC(0)NZ ⁇ Z 2 , -NHC(0)Z l7 -NHC(0)NH 2 , -NHC(0)NHZ!, -NHC(0)NZ;jZ 2 , -C(0)0H, -C(0)0Z x , -C(0)NHNH
  • p is 0, 1 or 2
  • q is an integer from 0 to 5
  • Zi and Z 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl of 1 to about 12 carbon atoms, aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms, heteroaryl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms, aralkyl of about 7 to about 15 carbon atoms, and heteroaralkyl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms, or
  • Yi and Y 2 are selected together to be -0[C(Z 3 ) (Z 4 )] r 0- or -0[C(Z 3 ) (Z 4 )] r+ ⁇ -, wherein r is an integer from 1 to 4 and Z 3 and Z 4 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl or 1 to about 12 carbon atoms, aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms, heteroaryl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms, aralkyl of about 7 to about 15 carbon atoms, and heteroaralkyl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms;
  • (C) Lac is selected from the group consisting of
  • n 0, 1, 2, or 3;
  • R 2 and R 3 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl of 3 to about 8 carbon atoms, and aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms or R 2 and R 3 taken together are -CH 2 -;
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms; cycloalkyl of 3 to about 8 carbon atoms and aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms ;
  • R 5a and R 5b are independently selected from hydrogen, fluoro, chloro and alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms;
  • 7a is alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, amino, alkylamino of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms or dialkylamino of 2 to about 12 carbon atoms;
  • R 7b is hydrogen, acyl, or alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms; and
  • Q 7 , Q 8 and Q 9 are independently selected from C(R 5a ), N, S and 0, provided that
  • Qi is C(R 8 ) C(R 9 ) (R 9a ) , N, N(R 8a ) or a direct link;
  • Q 2 is C(R 8 ) C(R ⁇ o) (Rioa) N, N(R 8a ), S, or
  • Q 3 is C(R 8 ), C(R ⁇ ) (Rn a ) , N, or N(R 8a );
  • Q 4 is C(R 8 ), C(R ⁇ 2 ) (R 12a ) , N, N(R 8a ), S, or 0;
  • Q 5 is C(R ⁇ 3 ), C(R ⁇ 3 ) (Risa) or N;
  • Q 6 is C(R 14 ), C(R 14 ) (Ri4'a) or N;
  • R 8 is R ⁇ 5 Ri6 or -OR ⁇ 5 ;
  • R 8a is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms, NR ⁇ 5a R ⁇ 6a or -0R ⁇ 5a ;
  • R 9 , Rio, Rn, R ⁇ 2 , R ⁇ 3 and R i4 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms optionally substituted with alkoxy of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms; halogen and trifluoromethyl;
  • R 9a , Rioa, Riia Ri2a, i3 and R i4 are independently hydrogen or absent;
  • R x6 and R ⁇ 6a are independently hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms ;
  • R ⁇ 7 is alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms or alkoxy of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms ; with the provisos that:
  • no more than one of Qi, Q 2 , Q 3 and Q 4 can be C(R 8 ) or N(R 8a );
  • R' 8 and R' 9 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms substituted with alkoxy of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, and trifluoromethyl;
  • R'n is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms;
  • R'i 3 is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms;
  • R' i2 and R'i 3 taken together form a divalent radical of the formula
  • R" 9 is selected from hydrogen and alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms
  • R" 8 and R" 9 are taken together to give a divalent radical of the formula -(CH 2 ) W - wherein w is 3, 4 or 5 ;
  • the present invention is directed to compounds which are potent inhibitors of thrombin. According to a preferred aspect, these compounds comprise novel azepin-2-one peptidomimetics .
  • the invention is also directed to pharmaceutical compositions which comprise one of these compounds and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. These compounds and pharmaceutical compositions are potent inhibitors of blood coagulation in vitro and in vivo in mammals. These compounds and pharmaceutical compositions may be used as therapeutic agents for treating disease states in mammals which are characterized by abnormal thrombosis.
  • a further aspect of the present invention is directed to the use of these compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for treatment of disease states in mammals characterized by abnormal thrombosis.
  • An alternate aspect of the present invention is directed to methods of using these thrombin inhibitors as in vitro diagnostic agents.
  • the present invention is directed to methods of using the compounds and pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention for the prevention of thrombosis in a mammal suspected of having a condition characterized by abnormal thrombosis, comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention or pharmaceutical composition comprising such a compound.
  • PI, P2 , P3 and P4 denote the portions of the molecule indicated below:
  • alkenyl refers to unsaturated aliphatic groups having at least one double bond.
  • alkynyl refers to unsaturated aliphatic groups having at least one triple bond.
  • alkyl refers to saturated aliphatic groups including straight-chain, branched-chain and cyclic groups.
  • alkoxy and alkoxyl refer to a group having the formula, R-0-, wherein R is an alkyl group.
  • alkoxycarbonyl refers to -C(0)OR wherein R is alkyl.
  • aminoalkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with an amino (NH 2 ) group.
  • aralkenyl refers to an alkenyl group substituted with an aryl group.
  • the alkenyl group has from 2 to about 6 carbon atoms .
  • aralkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with an aryl group. Suitable aralkyl groups include benzyl, picolyl, and the like, all of which may be optionally substituted. Preferably the alkyl group has from 1 to about 5 carbon atoms.
  • aryl refers to an aromatic group which has at least one ring having a conjugated pi electron system and includes a carbocyclic aryl, heterocyclic aryl and biaryl groups, all of which may be optionally substituted.
  • aryloxy refers to a group having the formula, R-0-, wherein R is an aryl group.
  • aralkoxy refers to a group having the formula, R-0-, wherein R is an aralkyl group.
  • amino acid refers to both natural and unnatural amino acids in their D and L stereoisomers, if their structures allow such stereoisomeric forms, and their analogs. Natural amino acids include alanine
  • Unnatural amino acids include, but are not limited to, azetidinecarboxylic acid, 2-aminoadipic acid, 3-aminoadipic acid, beta-alanine, aminopropionic acid, 2 -aminobutyric acid, 4-aminobutyric acid, 6- aminocaproic acid, 2-aminoheptanoic acid, 2 - aminoisobutyric acid, 3-aminoisobutyric acid, 2- aminopimelic acid, 2,4 diaminoisobutyric acid, demosine, 2 , 2 ' -diaminopimelic acid, 2 , 3-diaminopropionic acid, N- ethylglycine, N-ethylasparagine, hydroxylysine, allo- hydroxylysine, 3-hydroxyproline, 4-hydroxyproline, isodesmosine, allo- isoleucine, N-methylglycine, N- methylisoleucine, N-methylvaline, norvaline,
  • Amino acid analogs include the natural and unnatural amino acids which are chemically blocked, reversibly or irreversibly, or modified on their N-terminal amino group or their side- chain groups, as for example, methionine sulfoxide, methionine sulfone, S- (carboxymethyl) -cysteine, S (carboxymethyl) -cysteine sulfoxide and S- (carboxymethyl) -cysteine sulfone.
  • amino acid residue refers icals having the structure: (1) -C(0)-R-NH-, w' a R typically is -CH(R')-, wherein R' is H or a carbon (CH 2 ) p
  • N containing substituent or (2) ' , wherein p is 1, 2 or 3 representing the azetidinecarboxylic acid, proline or pipecolic acid residues, respectively.
  • amino acid analog refers to an amino acid wherein either the C-terminal carboxy group, the N- terminal amino group or side-chain functional group has been chemically modified to another functional group.
  • aspartic acid- (beta-methyl ester) is an amino acid analog of aspartic acid
  • N-ethylglycine is an amino acid analog of glycerine
  • alanine carboxamide is an amino acid analog of alanine.
  • Arginine mimic side chain or “side chain of an arginine mimic” refers to a group of atoms which spatially and electronically resemble or mimic the normal arginine side chain. These groups include the cyclic R 5 groups defined in connection with formula (I) .
  • “Biaryl” refers to phenyl substituted by carbocyclic or heterocyclic aryl as defined herein, ortho, meta or para to the point of attachment of the phenyl ring .
  • Carbocyclic refers to a group having one or more rings wherein the ring atoms are all carbon atoms and includes groups having aryl, cycloalkyl, and unsaturated cycloalkyl or a combination of such rings. Such groups include cyclohexyl, cycloheptenyl , tetrahydronaphthyl , phenyl, naphthyl, and the like.
  • Carbocyclic aryl refers to aromatic groups wherein the ring atoms on the aromatic ring are carbon atoms. Carbocyclic aryl groups include monocyclic carbocyclic aryl groups and naphthyl groups, all of which may be optionally substituted. Suitable carbocyclic aryl groups include phenyl and naphthyl. Suitable substituted carbocyclic aryl groups include indene and phenyl substituted by one to two substituents such being advantageously lower alkyl, hydroxy, lower alkoxy, lower alkoxycarbonyl, halogen, trifluoromethyl, nitro, and cyano. Substituted naphthyl refers to 1- or 2 -naphthyl substituted by lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, or halogen.
  • Carboxylate mimic or “carboxylic acid mimic” refers to a group which spatially and electronically mimics a carboxylic acid and provides a net negative charge, i.e., an anion, and also has a pKa value similar to that of a corresponding carboxylic acid, preferably having a pKa of about 4 to 5.
  • Cycloalkenyl or “unsaturated cycloalkyl” refers to a cyclic alkenyl group, that is, a cycloalkyl group modified by having at least one double band. Suitable cycloalkenyl groups include, for example, cyclopentenyl and cyclohexenyl .
  • Cycloalkyl refers to a cyclic alkyl group. Suitable cycloalkyl groups include, for example, cyclohexyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, and cycloheptyl .
  • Cyclohexylmethyl refers to a cyclohexyl group attached to CH 2 .
  • fused carbocyclic refers to a group having multiple rings which are fused, including multicyclic fused carbocyclic rings having both aromatic and non- aromatic rings. Suitable fused carbocyclic rings include fluorenyl, tetralin and the like.
  • fused carbocyclic alkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with a fused carbocyclic ring moiety, preferably a multicyclic fused carbocyclic ring having both aromatic and nonaromatic rings. Suitable fused carbocyclic alkyl groups include fluorenyl methyl and the like.
  • halogen refers to fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine .
  • Heterocyclic refers to a group having 1 or more rings wherein the ring atoms are carbon atoms or heteroatoms, and includes rings that are reduced, saturated, unsaturated and aromatic and, if the group has more than one ring, includes a combination of such rings. Suitable heteroatoms include oxygen, nitrogen and S(0) ⁇ wherein i is 0, 1 or 2.
  • heterocyclic groups include groups having (i) heterocyclo rings (ii) unsaturated heterocyclo rings, (iii) heteroaryl rings or (iv) a combination of such rings.
  • Heteroaryl refers to aromatic groups having a mixture of carbon atoms and heteroatoms .
  • Preferred heteroaryl groups include those having 5 to 14 ring atoms and from 1 to 9 carbon atoms and the remainder of the ring atoms heteroatoms .
  • Heteroaryl groups include those heterocyclic systems described in "Handbook of Chemistry and Physics", 49th edition, 1968, R.C Weast, editor; The Chemical Rubber Co., Cleveland, OH. See particularly Section C, Rules for Naming Organic Compounds, B. Fundamental Heterocyclic Systems. Suitable heteroatoms include oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur.
  • Typical heteroaryl groups include furanyl, thienyl, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, pyrimidyl , pyrazinyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl and the like.
  • Heteroaralkenyl refers to an alkenyl group substituted with a heteroaryl group. Preferably the alkenyl group has from 2 to about 6 carbon atoms .
  • Heteroaralkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with a heteroaryl group. Preferably the alkyl group has from 1 to about 6 carbon atoms .
  • Heterocyclo refers to a reduced heterocyclic ring system comprised of carbon, nitrogen, oxygen and/or sulfur atoms, and includes such heterocyclic systems described in "Handbook of Chemistry and Physics", 49th edition, 1968, R.C Weast, editor; , The Chemical Rubber Co., Cleveland, OH. See particularly Section C, Rules for Naming Organic Compounds, B. Fundamental Heterocyclic Systems.
  • Unsaturated heterocyclo refers to a heterocyclo group which is modified by having at least one double bond, but which is not aromatic.
  • Heterocycloalkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with a heterocyclo group. Preferably the alkyl group has from 1 to about 6 carbon atoms.
  • hydrocarbyl denotes an organic radical composed of carbon and hydrogen which may be aliphatic (including alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl groups and groups which have a mixture of saturated and unsaturated bonds) , alicyclic (such as cycloalkyl) , aromatic (such as aryl) or combinations thereof, and may refer to straight-chained, branched-chain or to cyclic structures or to radicals having a combination thereof, as well as to radicals substituted with halogen atom(s) or heteroatoms, such as nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur and their functional groups (such as amino, alkoxy, aryloxy, lactone groups, and the like) , which are commonly found in organic compounds and radicals.
  • hydroxyalkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with a hydroxy group.
  • lower referred to herein in connection with organic radicals or compounds defines such with up to and including 6, preferably up to and including 4 and advantageously one or two carbon atoms .
  • Such groups may be straight chain or branched chain.
  • Perfluoroalkyl refers to an alkyl group which has every hydrogen replaced with fluorine.
  • Perfluoroaryl refers to an aryl group which has every hydrogen replaced with fluorine.
  • Perfluoroarylalkyl or “Perfluoroaralkyl” refers an aralkyl group in which every hydrogen on the aralkyl moiety is replaced with fluorine.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable salt” includes salts of the compounds of the present invention derived from the combination of such compounds and an organic or inorganic acid. In practice the use of the salt form amounts to use of the base form. The compounds of the present invention are useful in both free base and salt form, with both forms being considered as being within the scope of the present invention.
  • quaternary ammonium salt refers to compounds produced by reaction between a basic nitrogen in an R substituent and an alkylhalide, arylhalide, and aralkylhalide .
  • Other reactants with good leaving groups may also be used, such as alkyl trifluoromethanesulfonates, alkyl methanesulfonates, and alkyl p-toluenesulfonates .
  • a quaternary ammonium salt has a positively charged nitrogen in the R substituent.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable counterions include C1-, Br “ , I " , CF 3 C(0)0 " and CH 3 C(0)0 " . The counterion of choice can be made using ion exchange resin columns.
  • the following R groups contain basic nitrogens: 3- (R) -quinuclidine, 3- (S) -quinuclidine, 3-yl- 2 -ethyl-4 (3H) -quinazolinone, ethyl morpholine, ethyl piperidine, 2- (2 -ethyl) pyridine, and 4- (methyl) -5- hydroxy-6-methyl-3- pyridine methanol.
  • Trihydrocarbylsilyl refers to the group
  • each R is an independently selected hydrocarbyl group .
  • terminal carbon refers to the carbon atom of a straight chain alkyl which is furthest from the parent structure.
  • Boc or “BOC” refers to t-butoxycarbonyl.
  • Boc 2 0 refers to Boc anhydride or di-tert-butyl dicarbonate .
  • BOP refers to benzotriazol-1-yl-oxy-tris- (dimethylamino) -phosphonium hexafluorophosphate .
  • BnS0 2 or “BzlS0 2” refers to benzylsulfonyl .
  • t-BuOK refers to potassium tert-butoxide .
  • Cbz or CBz refers to benzyloxycarbonyl .
  • DCA dichloroacetic acid.
  • DCC refers to N,N' -dicyclohexylcarbodiimide.
  • DCE refers to 1, 2-dichloroethane .
  • DCM dichloromethane
  • DHP refers to 3 , 4-dihydro-2H-pyran.
  • DMF refers to N,N-dimethylformamide .
  • DMSO refers to dimethyl sulfoxide.
  • DMAP refers to 4-N,N-dimethylamino-pyridine .
  • DPPA diphenylphosphoryl azide.
  • Et 3 N refers to triethylamine.
  • EtOH refers to ethanol .
  • HATU refers to 0- (7-azabenzotriazol-l-yl) - 1,1,3, 3 -tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate .
  • HBTU 2- (lH-benzotriazol-1-yl) -1, 1, 3 , 3- tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate .
  • HCl refers to hydrochloric acid.
  • HOAc refers to acetic acid.
  • HOAt refers to l-hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole .
  • HBt refers to 1-hydroxybenzotriazole monohydrate.
  • HPLC refers to high pressure liquid chromatography.
  • Ketone refers to potassium acetate.
  • i-BuOCOCl refers to isobutyl chloroformate.
  • LiAlH 4 refers to lithium aluminum hydride.
  • LiAlH 2 (OEt) 2 refers to lithium diethoxy aluminum hydride .
  • Me refers to methyl .
  • NaOH refers to sodium hydroxide.
  • NBS refers to N-bromosuccinimide.
  • NMM refers to N-methylmorpholine .
  • Ph 3 P or “PPh 3” refers to triphenylphosphine.
  • 2-PrPen refers to 2-propylpentanoyl .
  • pTSA or “pTSA catalyst” refers to para- toluenesulfonic acid catalyst.
  • TBTU 2- (lH-benzotriazol-1-yl) -1, 1, 3 , 3- tetramethyluronium tetrafluoroborate .
  • TEA triethylamine .
  • TFA trifluoroacetic acid.
  • THF tetrahydrofuran.
  • TLC thin layer chromatography.
  • FIG. 1 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of intermediates used in the preparation of compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • “i” through “viii” are defined as follows: i) sulfur trioxide-DMF in 1,2- dichloroethane, 80°C (1 hour) ; ii) thionyl chloride, 70°C (3 hours) ; iii) Boc 2 0, K 2 C0 3 in THF; iv) lithium bis (trimethylsilyl) amide, THF, 35°C (1 hour); v) benzyl bromoacetate; vi) 5M HCl in EtOAc; vii) compound 2, acetonitrile, Et 3 N; and viii) 10% Pd/C, MeOH/toluene, 45 psi H 2 (24 hours) .
  • Figure 2 depicts reaction schemes for the synthesis of intermediates used in the preparation of compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • "i” through “viii” are- defined as follows: i) Et 3 N, acetonitrile; ii) 10% Pd/C, MeOH, 45 psi H 2 (15 hours) ; iii) Et 3 N, acetonitrile; iv) 10% Pd/C, MeOH, 45 psi (15 hours) ; v) Et 3 N, acetonitrile; vi) 10% Pd/C, MeOH, 45 psi H 2 (15 hours) ; vii) Et 3 N, acetonitrile; viii) 10% Pd/C, MeOH, 45 psi H 2 (15 hours) .
  • Figure 3 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of intermediates used in the preparation of compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • "i” through “xi” are defined as follows: i) CuCN, DMF, reflux (4 hours); ii) EtOAc, 10% aqueous NaCN; iii) N-bromosuccinimide, 2, 2 ' -azo-bisisobutyronitrile, CC1 4 , reflux (5 hours); iv) NaN 3 , DMF; v) triphenylphosphine, THF, water, 0°C, stirring (10 hours) ; vi) K 2 C0 3 , Boc 2 0, water, dioxane; vii) hydroxylamine HCl, NMM, MeOH; viii) 10% Pd/C, MeOH, 45 psi H 2 (10 hours) ; ix) 4M HCl in dioxane; x) CsC0 3 , iodopropan
  • Figure 4 depicts reaction schemes for the synthesis of a compound of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • "i” through “iii” are defined as follows: i) EDC, HOBt, NMM, DMF; ii) Zn powder, HOAc; and iii) EDC, HOBt, diisopropylamine, DMF.
  • Figure 5 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of intermediates which are used in the preparation of compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • i through “iv” are defined as follows: i) NaN 3 , DMF; ii) 10% Pd/C, EtOAc, 45 psi H 2 (11 hours) ; iii) hydroxylamine HCl, NMM, MeOH; and iv) 10% Pd/C, MeOH, 45 psi H 2 (48 hours) .
  • Figure 6 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of intermediates which are used in the preparation of compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • "i” through “vii” are defined as follows: i) Cu(I)CN, DMF; ii) NBS, benzoylperoxide, CC1 4 , 80°C (14 hours) ; iii) NaN 3 , DMF, stirring (20 hours) ; iv) hydroxylamine HCl, NMM, MeOH, stirring (3 days) ; v) CsC0 3 , iodopropane, DMF, 50°C (20 hours) ; vi) triphenylphosphine, THF, stirring (20 hours) ; and vii) 3M NaOH to pH14.
  • Figure 7 depicts reaction schemes for the synthesis of certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • "i” through “vii” are defined as follows: i) EDC, HOBt, NMM, DMF, stirring (8 hours) ; ii) TFA, methylene chloride, 50°C (0.5 hour); iii) BOP, NMM, DMF, stirring (13 hours) ; iv) BOP, NMM, DMF, stirring (13 hours) ; v) 10% Pd/C, 45 psi H 2 (13 hours) ; vi) EDC, HOBt, NMM, DMF, stirring (10 hours); and vii) Zn powder in HOAc .
  • Figure 8 depicts reaction schemes for the synthesis of certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • "i” through “iv” are defined as follows: i) EDC, HOBt, DIEA, DMF, stirring (13 hours); ii) EDC, HOBt, DIEA, DMF, stirring (13 hours) ; iii) EDC, HOBt, DIEA, DMF, stirring (13 hours) ; and iv) EDC, HOBt, DIEA, DMF, stirring (13 hours) .
  • Figure 9 depicts reaction schemes for the synthesis of certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • "i” through “iv” are defined as follows: i) EDC, HOBt, DIEA, DMF, stirring (18 hours) ; ii) EDC, HOBt, .DIEA, DMF, stirring (18 hours) ; iii) EDC, HOBt, DIEA, DMF, stirring (18 hours) ; and iv) EDC, HOBt, DIEA, DMF, stirring (18 hours) .
  • Figure 10 depicts reaction schemes for the synthesis of .certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • i through “iv” are defined as follows: i) EDC, HOBt, DIEA, DMF, stirring (13 hours) ; ii) 5M HCl in EtOAc (2 hours) ; iii) BOP, NMM, DMF, stirring (13 hours) ; and iv) 4M HCl in dioxane, 60°C (2 hours) .
  • Figure 1-1 depicts reaction schemes for the synthesis of certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • "i” through “x” are defined as follows: i) Boc 2 0, Na 2 C0 3 , water/dioxane, stirring (18 hours) ; ii) lithium bis (trimethylsilyl) amide, THF, 40°C (1 hour); iii) benzyl bromoacetate, stirring (10 hours) ; iv) 5M HCl in HOAc, EtOAc, 0°C (0.5 hour); v) compound 2, NMM, DMF, room temperature, 10 hours; vi) 10% Pd/C, MeOH, 45 psi H 2 (3 hours) ; vii) compound 34, EDC, HOBt, NMM, MeOH, stirring (10 hours) ; viii) hydroxylamine HCl, NMM, MeOH, stirring 10 hours; ix) 10% Pd/C, MeOH, 45 psi H 2 (2 days); and x
  • Figure 12 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • "i” through “vii” are defined as follows: i) thionyl chloride, MeOH, stirring (12 hours) ; ii) diethylamine,
  • Figure 13 depicts reaction schemes for the synthesis of certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • "i” through “vi” are defined as follows: i) acetonitrile, NMM, 0°C (1 hour) , stirring (10 hours) ; ii) 10% Pd/C, MeOH/benzene, 45 psi H 2 (12 hours) ; iii) compound 60, EDC, HOBt, NMM, DMF, stirring (12 hours) ; iv) 4M HCl in dioxane, stirring (4 hours) ; v) compound 45, EDC, HOBt, NMM, DMF, stirring (13 hours) ; and vi) EDC, HOBt, NMM, DMF, stirring (13 hours) .
  • Figure 14 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of an intermediate which may be used to prepare a compound of the present invention having a 5- (aminomethyl) indazole at PI.
  • "i” through “ix” are defined as follows: i) 10% Pd/C, H 2 (10 psi), ethanol, room temperature 1.5 hours; ii) 10% Pd/C, H 2 (30 psi), ethanol, room temperature 8 hours; iii) KOAc, Ac 2 0, CHC1 3 , reflux 3 hours; iv) cool to room temperature, isoamylnitrite, 18-crown-6, reflux 28 hours; v) room temperature, Ac 2 0, room temperature 12 hours; vi) aqueous 48% HBr, room temperature 16 hours; vii) DHP, THF, reflux 2 hours, room temperature 12 hours; viii) NaN 3 , DMF, 90°C 30 minutes and ix) LiAlH 4 , THF, 0°C one hour, NaOH.
  • Figure 15 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of an intermediate compound which may be used for the preparation of certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • “i” through “vii” are defined as follows: i) H 2 balloon, 10% Pd/C, EtOAc, room temperature 48 hours, 51% yield; ii) Ac 2 0/KOAc, CHC1 3 , reflux 2 hours, flash chromatography, 92% yield; iii) isoamylnitrite, KOAc, catalytic amount 18-crown-6, Ac 2 0, CHC1 3 , reflux 28 hours, 95% yield; iv) aqueous 48% HBr, room temperature, 46 hours, 84% yield; v) DHP, THF, reflux 2 hours, 72% yield; vi) NaN 3 , DMF, 90°C 0.5 hour, 83% yield; and vii) LiAlH, THF, 0°C 1 hour.
  • Figure 16 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of an intermediate which may be used to prepare certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • “i” through “vii” are defined as follows: 1) CuCN, DMF, reflux 6 hours, 76% yield; ii) NH 2 NH 2 , ethanol, reflux under N 2 , 17 hours, 91% yield; iii) B 2 H 6 /THF, 0°C to room temperature 15 hours; iv) 6N HCl, water and methanol, room temperature 6 hours neutralize with NaOH; v) Boc 2 0 in THF, THF/methanol , room temperature 15 hours, 60% yield; vi) 2N HCl, methanol/dioxane, room temperature 4 hours; and vii) OH " resin. These procedures are more fully described in Examples 81 to 84.
  • Figure 17 depicts reaction schemes for the synthesis of an intermediate which may be used in the preparation of certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • "i” through “viii” are defined as follows: i) CuCN, DMF, reflux 5 hours; ii) NBS, AIBN, CCl 4 , reflux 4.5 hours; iii) phthalimide, Cs 2 C0 3 , DMF, room temperature 0.5 hour; iv) hydrazine, n-butanol, reflux 5 minutes; v) Boc 2 0, DCM, room temperature 1 hour; vi) hydrazine, n-butanol, reflux 22 hours; vii) 2M HCl in dioxane, room temperature 0.5 hour; and viii) OH " resin.
  • These procedures are more fully described in Examples 85 to 90.
  • Figure 18 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of an intermediate compound which may be used to prepare certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • “i” through “vi” are defined as follows: i) NaN 3 , DMF, room temperature, 15 hours; ii) Ph 3 P, THF/H 2 0, room temperature, 15 hours; iii) Boc 2 0 in DMF, room temperature overnight; iv) t-BuOK, DMF, room temperature 30 minutes, add 118, room temperature, 15 hours, then 70°C, 24 hours; v) 2N HCl, methanol/dioxane, room temperature 0.5 hour; and vi) OH " resin.
  • These procedures are more fully described in Examples 91 to 93.
  • Figure 19 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of an intermediate which may be used in the preparation of a compound of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • “i” through “vii” are defined as follows: i) NBS, benzoyl peroxide, CC1 4 , reflux 6 hours; ii) NaN 3 , DMF, room temperature 15 hours; iii) Ph 3 P, THF/H 2 0, 0°C, 0°C to room temperature 15 hours, 0.25M HCl, neutralize with NaOH; iv) DCM, IM Boc 2 0 in THF, room temperature 15 hours; v) t-BuOK, DMF, room temperature 15 hours, add 118, room temperature 15 hours, 65°C 4 hours; vi) 2M HCl, methanol/dioxane, room temperature 4 hours; and vii) OH " resin.
  • Figure 20 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of an intermediate which may be used in the preparation of a compound of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • "i” through “vii” are defined as follows: i) NBS, benzoyl peroxide, CC1 , reflux 6 hours; ii) NaN 3 , DMF, room temperature 15 hours; iii) Ph 3 P, THF/H 2 0, 0°C, 0°C to room temperature 15 hours, 0.25M HCl, neutralize with 2M NaOH; iv) DCM, IM Boc 2 0 in THF, room temperature 15 hours; v) hydrazine, n-butanol, reflux 4 hours; vi) 2M HCl methanol/dioxane, room temperature 3 hours; and vii) OH " resin.
  • NBS benzoyl peroxide
  • CC1 room temperature 15 hours
  • Ph 3 P THF/H 2 0, 0°C, 0°C to
  • Figure 21 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of an intermediate which may be used in the preparation of a compound of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • "i” through “vii” are defined as: i) NBS, AIBN, CC1 4 , reflux 8 hours; ii) NaN 3 , DMF, room temperature 15 hours; iii) Ph 3 P, THF, 0°C, 0°C to room temperature 15 hours; iv) Boc 2 0, DCM, room temperature 2 hours; v) t-BuOK, DMF, room temperature 15 hours; vi) 2N HCl, methanol/dioxane, room temperature 5 hours; and vii) OH " resin.
  • NBS NBS
  • AIBN AIBN
  • CC1 4 reflux 8 hours
  • Ph 3 P THF, 0°C, 0°C to room temperature 15 hours
  • Boc 2 0, DCM, room temperature 2 hours
  • Figure 22 depicts a reaction scheme for the preparation of an intermediate which may be used in the preparation of a compound of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • "i” through “iii” are defined as follows: i) hydrazine, n-butanol, reflux 22 hours; ii) 2M HCl in dioxane, room temperature 3 hours; and iii) OH " resin. These procedures are more fully described in Examples 112 to 113.
  • Figure 23 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of an intermediate which may be used in the preparation of a compound of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • "i” through “iii” are defined as follows: i) Cu(I)CN, DMF, reflux 20 hours; ii) DMAP, Boc 2 0, THF, room temperature 2 hours; and iii) 10% Pd/C, IM HCl (aq) /ethanol , H 2 (50 psi), 16 hours. These procedures are more fully described in Examples 114 to 116.
  • Figure 24 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of an intermediate which may be used to prepare a compound o' present invention having thrombin in. ⁇ >ry a- ii--".
  • Figure 25 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of an intermediate which may be used to prepare a compound of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • "i” through “iii” are defined as follows: i) NaC0 3 , water, Br 2 , 65°C 1.5 hours; ii) Cu(I)CN, DMF, 185°C reflux 20 hours; and iii) 10% Pd/C, IM HCl (aq) , EtOH, THF, H 2 (20 psi), 16 hours. These procedures are more fully described in Examples 121 to 123.
  • Figure 26 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of a compound of the present invention ..g thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • Figure 27 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of a compound of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • "i” through “x” are defined as follows: i) 9-BBN, THF, 0°C one hour, 5°C 18 hours, warm to room temperature; ii) compound 160, Pd(PPh 3 ) 4 , 2M NaOH, reflux 2 hours, cool to room temperature; iii) 30% H 2 0 2 /H 2 0, room temperature about one hour; iv) ZnEt 2 in hexane/DCM, CHI 2 , compounds 167 and 168 in DCM, 0°C to room temperature 15 hours; v) saturated NH 4 C1, room temperature overnight; vi) Ph 3 P, THF, DEAD, 0°C ten minutes, room temperature; vii) 4M HCl/EtOAc, room temperature 3 hours; viii) CH 3 CN, 2,4,6- collidine, ⁇ -toluene sulf
  • Figure 28 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of a compound of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • "i” through “vi” are defined as follows: i) hydroxylamine HCl, Et 3 N, ethanol, room temperature 2 days; ii) methanol (anhydrous), acetyl chloride, reflux 2 hours; iii) HOAt, EDC, DMF, room temperature 15 hours; iv) pyridine, reflux 3 hours; v) LiOH-H 2 0 methanol/water, room temperature 10 hours; and vi) HOAt, EDC, NH 4 C1, Et 3 N, DMF, room temperature 15 hours.
  • Figure 29 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of a compound of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • "i” through “ix” are defined as follows: i) CsOAc, DMF, room temperature 16 hours; ii) hydroxylamine HCl, Et 3 N, ethanol, room temperature, one week; iii) Cs 2 C0 3 , DMF, room temperature 16 hours; iv) LiOH-H 2 0, methanol, H-f* room temperature 48 hours; v) DCM, CBr 4 , ' . ⁇ . temperature, 30 minutes; vi) Et 4 NCN, temperature, 72 hours; vii) hr am e HCl, Et 3 N, ethanol, room temperature " viii) HOAt, EDC,
  • Figure 30 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of a compound of the present invention having a P1-P2 thiazole amide bioisostere.
  • Figure 31 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of a compound of the present invention having a P1-P2 imidazole amide bioisostere.
  • Figure 32 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of a compound of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • "i” through “vii” are defined as follows: i) H 2 S0 4 , methanol, reflux, 20 hours; ii) DHP, pTSA catalyst, THF, reflux, 20 hours; iii) LiAlH 4 , THF, room temperature, 30 minutes; iv) DPPA, DBU, THF, room temperature, 18 hours; v) LiAlH 4 , THF, room temperature, 30 minutes; vi) EDC, HOAt, NMM, DMF, room temperature, 18 hours; and vii) 3N HCl, THF, 50°C, 18 hours .
  • Figures 33A to 33C depict certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • Figures 34A to 34C depict certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity.
  • the present invention is directed to compounds of the formula: wherein
  • R x is selected from the group consisting of:
  • alkyl of 1 to about 12 carbon atoms which is optionally substituted with Yi and/or Y 2 ,
  • heterocycloalkyl of 4 to about 10 ring atoms with the ring atoms selected from carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen, and S(0)i, wherein i is 0, 1 or 2, which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the ring with Y ⁇ , Y 2 and/or Y 3 , (5) heterocyclo of 4 to about 10 ring atoms with the ring atoms selected from carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen, and S(0) ⁇ , rc rc including — ⁇ - f , wherein — ⁇ ⁇ - ⁇ ? is a 5 to 7 member heterocycle of 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms, where G is
  • alkenyl of about 2 to about 6 carbon atoms which is optionally substituted with cycloalkyl of about 3 to about 8 carbon atoms, which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the ring carbons with Yi, Y 2 and/or Y 3 ,
  • aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms which is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted with
  • heteroaryl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms with the ring atoms selected from carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur, and which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted with Y l7 Y , and/or Y 3 ,
  • aralkyl of about 7 to about 15 carbon atoms which is optionally substituted on the alkyl chain with hydroxy or halogen and mono-, di-, or tri- substituted in the aryl ring with Yi, Y 2 , and/or Y 3 ,
  • heteroaralkyl of 5 to 14 ring atoms with the ring atoms selected from carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur, and which is optionally substituted on the alkyl chain with hydroxy or halogen and optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted on the ring with Y , Y 2 , and/or Y 3 ,
  • each Y l r Y 2 , and Y 3 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, cyano, nitro, tetrazolyl optionally substituted with alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, guanidino, amidino, methylamino, methylguanidino, -CF 3 , -CF 2 CF 3 , -CH(CF 3 ) 2 , -C(OH) (CF 3 ) 2 , -OCF 3 , -OCF 2 CF 3 , -OCF 2 H, -OC(0)NH 2 , -0C(0)NHZ ! , -0C(0)NZ ⁇ Z 2 , -NHC(0)Z ⁇ , -NHC(0)NH 2 ,
  • Y and Y 2 are selected together to be -0 [C (Z 3 ) (Z 4 )] r O- or -0 [C (Z 3 ) (Z 4 )] r+i -, wherein r is an integer from 1 to 4 and Z 3 and Z 4 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl or 1 to about 12 carbon atoms, aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms, heteroaryl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms, aralkyl of about 7 to about 15 carbon atoms, and heteroaralkyl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms ; (C) Lac is selected from the group consisting of
  • n 0, 1, 2, or 3;
  • R 2 and R 3 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl of 3 to about 8 carbon atoms, and aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms or R 2 and R 3 taken together are -CH 2 -;
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms ; cycloalkyl of 3 to about 8 carbon atoms and aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms ;
  • R 5a and R 5b are independently selected from hydrogen, fluoro, chloro and alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms;
  • R 7a is alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, amino, alkylamino of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, or dialkylamino of 2 to about 12 carbon atoms;
  • R 7 is hydrogen, acyl, or alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms; and
  • Q 7 , Q 8 and Q 9 are independently selected from C(R 5a ), N, S and O
  • Qi is C(R 8 ), C(R 9 ) (R 9a ), N, N(R 8a ) or a direct link;
  • Q 2 is C(R 8 ), C(R ⁇ o) (Rioa), N, N(R 8a ), S, or
  • Q 3 is C(R 8 ), C(R ⁇ ) (R lla ) , N, or (R 8a );
  • Q 4 is C(R 8 ), C(R X2 ) (R i2a ) , N, N(R 8a ), S, or
  • Q 5 is C(R ⁇ 3 ), C(R X3 ) (Risa) or N;
  • Q 6 is C(R i4 ), C(R 14 ) (R ⁇ 4a ) or N;
  • R 8 is NR ⁇ 5 R 16 or -OR ⁇ 5 ;
  • R 8a is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms, NR ⁇ 5a R ⁇ 6a or -OR ⁇ 5a ;
  • R 9 , Rio, Rn, R ⁇ 2 , R i3 and R i4 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms optionally substituted with alkoxy of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms , alkoxy of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms; halogen and trifluoromethyl;
  • R 9a , Rioa, Riia Ri2a Risa and R 14 are independently hydrogen or absent;
  • R X6 and R ⁇ 6a are independently hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms;
  • Qi, Q 2 , Q 3 and Q 4 are not all heteroatoms ;
  • R' 8 and R'g are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms substituted with alkoxy of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, and trifluoromethyl;
  • R'n is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms;
  • R'i 3 is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms;
  • R' ⁇ 2 and R' ⁇ 3 taken together form a divalent radical of the
  • R" 9 is selected from hydrogen and alkyl of l to about 4 carbon atoms
  • R" 8 and R" 9 are taken together to give a divalent radical of the formula -(CH 2 ) W - wherein w is 3, 4 or 5 ;
  • Preferred X groups include -S(0) 2 -, and a direct link. Especially preferred for X is -S(0) 2 -.
  • Preferred Ri groups include benzyl, substituted benzyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl and 2 , 3-dihydrobenzo furan-5 -yl.
  • Particularly preferred R 2 substituents include substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, and substituted or unsubstituted benzyl.
  • R x is phenyl, 2 , 3-dihydrobenzo- [b] furanyl , or benzyl .
  • Preferred compounds include those where Lac is
  • n is preferably 2.
  • R 2 and R 3 are hydrogen or methyl, more preferably R 2 and R 3 are hydrogen.
  • n is preferably 2.
  • n is preferably 2 and m is preferably 1, Preferred are compounds where J is
  • R 4 groups include hydrogen, and alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms. Especially preferred are compounds wherein R 4 is hydrogen. Preferably R 6 is hydrogen.
  • Preferred E groups include those wherein Qi is a direct link.
  • Q 2 is C(R 8 ) or C(R i0 ) (Rioa) Ch is N and Q 4 is N;
  • Q 2 is C(R 8 ) or C(R ⁇ 0 ) (R ⁇ 0a ) , Ch is C(R ⁇ ) (Rna) and Q is N;
  • Q 2 is 0, Q 3 is N and Q 4 is C(R 8 );
  • Q 2 is N, Q 3 is C(R 8 ) or C(R ⁇ ) (Rn a ) , and Q 4 is N.
  • Especially preferred E groups include those where Q 6 is C(R i4 ) or C(R ⁇ 4 ) (R ⁇ 4a ) - According to one aspect of the present invention, preferred compounds include the following E groups :
  • Especially preferred E groups include
  • Preferred compounds according to one aspect of the present invention include those wherein R ⁇ is benzyl, substituted benzyl, phenyl, and substituted phenyl.
  • Especially preferred substituted phenyl groups include 2, 3-dihydrobenzofuran-5-yl .
  • X is -S(0) 2 - or a direct link, more preferably -S(0) 2 -.
  • preferred E groups include:
  • Especially preferred E groups include
  • Preferred compounds according to this aspect include those where Lac is
  • preferred compounds of the present invention include those where Lac is
  • E is preferably selected from
  • Especially preferred compounds according to this aspect include those wherein R 2 is hydrogen, R 3 is hydrogen, and J is
  • R 4 and R 6 are hydrogen.
  • Especially preferred E groups according to this aspect include
  • preferred E groups include:
  • examples of especially preferred E groups include:
  • preferred compounds include those where R 1 is benzyl, substituted benzyl, phenyl or substituted phenyl.
  • R x is 2 , 3-dihydrobenzo- [b] furanyl
  • X is preferably -S(0) 2 - or a direct link.
  • Lac is
  • E groups according to this aspect include :
  • Preferred compounds according to this alternate aspect of the present invention include the following:
  • E is a six-membered heterocyclic ring having two ring nitrogen atoms and the remainder of the ring atoms carbon atoms which is substituted with -NR" 8 R" 9 on a carbon atom and is substituted with R" ⁇ o and R"n on different ring carbons.
  • suitable E groups include:
  • Preferred E groups include
  • Especially preferred E groups include:
  • Preferred compounds according to one aspect of the present invention include those wherein Ri is benzyl, substituted benzyl, phenyl, and substituted phenyl.
  • Especially preferred substituted phenyl groups include 2 , 3-dihydrobenzofuran-5-yl .
  • X is -S(0) 2 - or a direct link, more preferably -S(0) 2 -.
  • preferred E groups include:
  • Especially preferred E groups include
  • Preferred compounds according to this aspect include those where Lac is
  • Especially preferred compounds according to this aspect include those wherein R 2 is hydrogen, R 3 is hydrogen, and J is
  • R and R 6 are hydrogen, Es ⁇ - ⁇ ⁇ y preferred E groups according to this r iude
  • preferred compounds include those where Ri is benzyl, substituted benzyl, phenyl or substituted phenyl.
  • a particularly preferred 2 is 2 , 3-dihydrobenzo- [b] furanyl
  • X is preferably -S(0) 2 - or a direct link.
  • Lac is
  • Preferred J groups according to this aspect include
  • R 4 is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 6 is preferably hydrogen.
  • E groups according to this aspect include:
  • Preferred compounds of the present invention include those depicted in Figures 33A to 33C and 34A to 34C.
  • the compounds of present invention may have chiral centers and occur as racemates, racemic mixtues and as individual diastereomers or enantiomers with all isomeric forms being included in the present invention.
  • the compounds of the present invention may also have polymorphic crystalline forms, with all polymorphic crystalline forms being included in the present invention.
  • the bond attached to the variable is not present, for example, with the group --(R ⁇ ) n / if n is 0, then the single bond that would attach to R 6 is also not present.
  • Preferred means of chemically coupling include formation of a peptide bond by using conventional coupling reagents known in the art. See Bodanszky, N. , Peptide Chemistry, pp. 55-73, Springer-Verlag, New York (1988) and references cited therein.
  • the chemical coupling may be either by means of one-step or two-step coupling. In one-step coupling, the two coupling partners are coupled directly.
  • Preferred coupling reagents for one-step coupling of the include DCC with HOBt, EDC with HOBt, HBTU or TBTU. In two-step coupling, an activated ester or anhydride of the C-terminal carboxy group of one coupling partner is formed prior to its coupling to the other coupling partner.
  • boron tris (trifluoroacetate) B(OCOCF 3 ) 3
  • the reagent is prepared by the reaction of BBr 3 and CF 3 COOH in dichloromethane at 0°C.
  • the reagent is also commercially available.
  • the N 9 -nitro compound is treated with boron tris (trifluoroacetate) in trifluoroacetic acid at 0°C. See, e . g. , Fieser, M. and Fieser, L. F. , Reagents for Organic Synthesis, p. 46, John Wiley & Sons, New York (1974); Pless, J. , and Bauer, W. Ange . Chem. , Internat . Ed. , 12, 147 (1973) .
  • titanium trichloride is another preferred reagent for selective nitro group cleavage.
  • This reagent is commercially available.
  • the N g nitro compound is treated with titanium trichloride in aqueous methanol containing an ammonium acetate buffer followed by exposure of the reaction mixture to air or dimethyl sulfoxide.
  • the compounds of the present invention are screened for their ability to inhibit some or all of thrombin, factor Xa, plasmin, recombinant tissue plasminogen activator (rt-PA) , activated protein C (aPC) , chymotrypsin, and trypsin as set forth below. Certain of the preferred compounds are distinguished by their ability to inhibit thrombin, while not substantially inhibiting some or all of plasmin, tissue plasminogen activator (t-PA) , activated protein C (aPC) , chymotrypsin, and trypsin.
  • the term "not substantially inhibiting" means that the IC 50 (or Ki) for plasmin, t-PA, aPC, chymotrypsin, and trypsin for a given compound is greater than or equal to its IC 50 (or Ki, respectively) for thrombin.
  • the ratio of IC 50 's for plasmin, and the other enzymes, to IC 50 for thrombin will be at least about 25 or greater, more preferably about 100 or greater. It is believed that the ability to selectively inhibit thrombin will result in therapeutic benefits to patients.
  • not specifically inhibiting means the IC 50 or Ki for the target enzyme is less than or equal to the IC 50 or Ki for non-target enzymes contacted with the inhibitor.
  • the compounds of the present invention are dissolved in buffer to give solutions containing concentrations such that assay concentrations range from 0 to 100 micromolar.
  • concentrations such that assay concentrations range from 0 to 100 micromolar.
  • a chromogenic synthetic substrate is added to a solution containing test compound and the enzyme of interest and the residual catalytic activity of that enzyme is determined spectrophometrically .
  • the IC 50 of a compound of the present invention is determined from the rate of substrate turnover caused by the specific enzyme being measured.
  • IC 50 is the concentration of test compound which gives 50% inhibition of the rate of substrate turnover.
  • the Ki of a compound of the present invention is determined from the rate of substrate turnover caused by the specific enzyme being measured at various enzyme concentrations.
  • Example A provides exemplars of in vi tro assays used to select the compounds of the present invention.
  • Certain of the preferred compounds of the present invention have a Ki of about 0.001 to about 200 nM in the thrombin assay. Especially preferred compounds have a Ki of about 0.001 to about 50 nM. The more especially preferred compounds have a Ki of about 0.001 to about 10 nM.
  • Certain of the preferred compounds of the present invention have a IC 50 for plasmin, t-PA, aPC, chymotrypsin, and trypsin which is at least 10 times greater than its IC 50 for thrombin.
  • Especially preferred compounds have an IC 50 for plasmin, t-PA, aPC, chymotrypsin, and trypsin which is about 20 to about 100,000 times greater than its IC 50 for thrombin. More especially preferred compounds have an IC 50 for plasmin, t-PA, aPC, chymotrypsin, and trypsin which is about 100 to about 1,000,000 times greater than its IC 50 for thrombin.
  • a compound of the present invention has an IC50 with respect to plasmin, t-PA, aPC, chymotrypsin, or trypsin which is greater than the highest concentration of compound tested, the highest concentration of compound tested is considered to be the reported IC 50 .
  • the compounds of the present invention are dissolved in buffer to give solutions containing concentrations such that assay concentrations range from 0 to 100 micromolar.
  • concentrations such that assay concentrations range from 0 to 100 micromolar.
  • a chromogenic synthetic substrate is added to a solution containing test compound and the enzyme of interest, and the residual catalytic activity of that enzyme is determined spectrophotometrically.
  • the IC 50 of a compound of the present invention is determined from the rate of substrate turnover caused by the specific enzyme being measured.
  • IC 0 is that concentration of test compound giving 50% inhibition of the rate of substrate turnover.
  • the Ki of a compound of the present invention is determined from the rate of substrate turnover caused by the specific enzyme being measured at various enzyme concentrations.
  • Example A provides an example of the in vi tro assays used to select the preferred compounds of the present invention.
  • Example A provides a method for identifying and selecting compounds of the present invention that inhibit thrombin, plasmin, t-PA, aPC, chymotrypsin and trypsin to a greater extent than they inhibit factor Xa and, thus, have utility as inhibitors of those proteases .
  • the present invention encompasses pharmaceutical compositions prepared for storage or administration which comprise a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier .
  • the therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention will depend on the route of administration, the type of mammal being treated, and the physical characteristics of the specific mammal under consideration. These factors and their relationship to determining this amount are well known to skilled practitioners in the medical arts. This amount and the method of administration can be 'tailored to achieve optimal efficacy but will depend on such factors as weight, diet, concurrent medication and other factors which those skilled in the medical arts will recognize.
  • the therapeutically effective amount of the compound of the present invention can range broadly depending upon the desired affects and the therapeutic indication. Typically, dosages will be between about
  • compositions 0.01 mg/kg and 100 mg/kg body weight, preferably between about 0.01 and 10 mg/kg, body weight.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers for therapeutic use are well known in the pharmaceutical art, and are described, for example, in Remingto ' s Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Co. (A.R. Gennaro edit. 1985) .
  • sterile saline and phosphate-buffered saline at physiological pH may be used.
  • Preservatives, stabilizers, dyes and even flavoring agents may be provided in the pharmaceutical composition.
  • sodium benzoate, sorbic acid and esters of p-hydroxybenzoic acid may be added as preservatives. Id. at 1449.
  • antioxidants and suspending agents may be used. Id.
  • compositions of the present invention may be formulated and used as tablets, capsules or elixirs for oral administration; suppositories for rectal administration; sterile solutions and suspensions for injectable administration; and the like.
  • the dose and method of administration can be tailored to achieve optimal efficacy but will depend on such factors as weight, diet, concurrent medication and other factors which those skilled in the medical arts will recognize.
  • injectable pharmaceutical compositions can be prepared in conventional forms, either as liquid solutions or suspensions, solid forms suitable for solution ' or suspension in liquid prior to injection, or as emulsions.
  • Suitable excipients are, for example, water, saline, dextrose, mannitol, lactose, lecithin, albumin, sodium glutamate, cysteine hydrochloride, or the like.
  • the injectable pharmaceutical compositions may contain minor amounts of nontoxic auxiliary substances, such as wetting agents, pH buffering agents, and the like. If desired, absorption enhancing preparations (e.g., liposomes) may be utilized.
  • Compounds of the present invention when made and selected as disclosed are useful as potent inhibitors of thrombin in vi tro and in vivo .
  • these compounds are useful as in vi tro diagnostic reagents to prevent the clotting of blood and as in vivo pharmaceutical agents to prevent, inhibit and/or attenuate thrombosis in mammals suspected of having a condition characterized by abnormal thrombosis.
  • the compounds of the present invention are useful as in vitro diagnostic reagents for inhibiting clotting in blood drawing tubes.
  • stoppered test tubes having a vacuum therein as a means to draw blood obtained by venipuncture into the tube is well known in the medical arts. Kasten, B.L., "Specimen Collection", Laboratory Test Handbook, 2nd Edition, Lexi-Comp Inc., Cleveland pp. 16-17 (Edits. Jacobs, D.S. et al . 1990).
  • Such vacuum tubes may be free of clot-inhibiting additives, in which case, they are useful for the isolation of mammalian serum from the blood.
  • clot-inhibiting additives such as heparin salts, EDTA salts, citrate salts or oxalate salts
  • clot-inhibiting additives such as heparin salts, EDTA salts, citrate salts or oxalate salts
  • the compounds of the present invention are potent inhibitors of thrombin, and as such, can be incorporated into blood collection tubes to prevent clotting of the mammalian blood drawn into them.
  • the compounds of the present invention are used alone, in combination with other compounds of the present invention, or in combination with other known inhibitors of clotting, in the blood collection tubes.
  • the amount to be added to such tubes is that amount sufficient to inhibit the formation of a clot when mammalian blood is drawn into the tube.
  • the addition of the compounds to such tubes may be accomplished by methods well known in the art, such as by introduction of a liquid composition thereof, as a solid composition thereof, or liquid composition which is lyophilized to a solid.
  • the compounds of the present invention are added to blood collection tubes in such amounts that, when combined with 2 to 10 mL of mammalian blood, the concentration of such compounds will be sufficient to inhibit clot formation. Typically, ' the required concentration will be about 1 to 10,000 nM, with 10 to 1000 nM being preferred.
  • the compounds of the present invention are useful as a pharmaceutical agent for preventing, inhibiting and/or attenuating thrombosis in a mammal suspected of having a condition characterized by abnormal thrombosis.
  • Conditions characterized by abnormal thrombosis are well known in the medical arts and include those involving the arterial and venous vasculature of mammals.
  • abnormal thrombosis (thrombus formation) characterizes the rupture of an established atherosclerotic plaque which is the major cause of acute myocardial infarction and unstable angina, as well as also characterizing the occlusive coronary thrombus formation resulting from either thrombolytic therapy or percutaneous transluminal coronary angioplasty (PTCA) .
  • thrombosis characterizes the condition observed in patients undergoing major surgery in the lower extremities or the abdominal area who often suffer from thrombus formation in the venous vasculature resulting in reduced blood flow to the affected extremity and a predisposition to pulmonary embolism.
  • Abnormal thrombosis further characterizes disseminated intravascular coagulopathy which commonly occurs within both vascular systems during septic shock, certain viral infections and cancer, a condition wherein there is rapid consumption of coagulation factors and systemic coagulation which results in the formation of life- threatening thrombi occurring throughout the microvasculature leading to widespread organ failure.
  • the present invention includes methods for preventing a condition in a mammal suspected of having a condition characterized by abnormal thrombosis, comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a compound or a pharmaceutical composition of the present invention.
  • the compounds or pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention are administered in vivo, ordinarily in a mammal, preferably in a human.
  • the compounds or pharmaceutical compositions can be administered to a mammal in a variety of ways, including orally, parenterally, intravenously, subcutaneously, intramuscularly, colonically, rectally, nasally or intraperitoneally, employing a variety of dosage forms.
  • Administration is preferably parenteral, such as intravenous on a daily basis.
  • administration is preferably oral, such as by tablets capsules or elixirs taken on a daily basis.
  • the compounds or pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention are administered alone or in combination with one another, or in combination with other therapeutic or in vivo diagnostic agents.
  • a "therapeutically effective amount" of the compounds or pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention will vary depending upon the age, weight and mammalian species treated, the particular compounds employed, the particular mode of administration and the desired affects and the therapeutic indication. Because these factors and their relationship to determining this amount are well known in the medical arts, the determination of therapeutically effective dosage levels, the amount necessary to achieve the desired result of preventing thrombosis, will be within the ambit of one skilled in these arts. Typically, administration of the compounds or pharmaceutical composition of the present invention is commenced at lower dosage levels, with dosage levels being increased until the desired effect of preventing in vivo thrombosis is achieved which would define a therapeutically effective amount. For the compounds of the present invention, alone or as part of a pharmaceutical composition, such doses are between about 0.01 mg/kg and 100 mg/kg body weight, preferably between about 0.01 and 10 mg/kg, body weight.
  • Certain compounds of the present invention have utility as inhibitors of proteases within the trypsin/chymotrypsin class of enzymes.
  • Members of that class include, but are not limited to, elastase, chymotrypsin, and the serine proteases trypsin, thrombin, factor Xa, and factor Vila.
  • the inhibitors within the present invention directed at serine proteases acting within the coagulation cascade e . g. inhibitors of thrombin, factor Xa and factor Vila, such have in vitro and in vivo utilities as provided hereinabove for thrombin inhibitors.
  • Elastase has been implicated in a variety of conditions, including pulmonary hypertension
  • pancreatitis Elevated levels of chymotrypsin and trypsin are associated with the pathological effects resulting from pancreatitis (see US 5,534,498). Animal studies of chemically-induced pancreatitis suggest that the disorder is rooted in the inability of pancreatic acinar cells to excrete digestive proenzymes, resulting in activation of trypsinogen to trypsin by lysosomal hydrolases within the cell. The amount of trypsin produced exceeds protective levels of protease inhibitor normally available.
  • pancreatitis which is characterized by damage to the pancreas and surrounding tissues from autodigestion of the cells by the various digestive enzymes.
  • These activated digestive enzymes also cause edema, interstitial hemorrhage, vascular damage, coagulation necrosis, fat necrosis and parenchymal cell necrosis.
  • Inhibitors of the present invention directed toward either trypsin or chymotrypsin, or other members of the trypsin/chymotrypsin family that contribute to the deleterious effects of pancreatitis, are useful for the prevention and treatment of pancreatitis in mammals.
  • inhibitors of the present invention also find utility in vitro .
  • Inhibitors of enzymes within the coagulation cascade are useful inhibitors of blood coagulation in vi tro, as described hereinabove.
  • Inhibitors of other enzymes within the trypsin/chymotrypsin family, including trypsin, chymotrypsin, and elastase are useful reagents in in vi tro assays designed to measure the activity of such enzymes .
  • the activity of the enzyme in the sample is determined in the presence and absence of the specific inhibitor (which may be labeled using a radioactive or other detectable label) .
  • the specific inhibitor which may be labeled using a radioactive or other detectable label.
  • Lower activity measured in the presence of inhibitor as compared to in the absence of inhibitor demonstrates inhibition of the enzyme and, thus, its presence in the sample.
  • the level of activity of an enzyme present in a sample is determined by adding inhibitor to the sample in a range of titrating doses, and calculating activity of the enzyme at each escalating dose of inhibitor.
  • concentration of inhibitor that completely inhibits the enzyme in the assay along with knowledge of the assay parameters and characteristic of enzyme inhibition, allows one to calculate the activity of the enzyme in the sample.
  • the level of chymotrypsin measured in stool samples in vi tro is used as an indicator of pancreatitis
  • Chymotrypsin inhibitors of the present invention are useful in such assays to evaluate the level of active chymotrypsin in such a sample, according to protocols such as those outlined hereinabove.
  • an additional use of the inhibitors of the present invention is their use to quench enzymatic reactions effected by the target enzyme.
  • an inhibitor of trypsin or chymotrypsin, respectively is added in inhibit the target enzyme and, thus, control or prevent digestion by that enzyme.
  • Certain compounds of the present invention can also be useful inhibitors of elastase, and are. therefore useful pharmaceutical agents for the control of inflammation.
  • Example 3 The compound of Example 3, 1- (carbobenzoxy) methyl- 3-L- (tert-Butoxycarbonyl) aminoazepin-2 -one (compound 5, 22 g, 0.07 mol), was dissolved in 210 mL of 5M HCl in EtOAc and stirred for one hour at ambient temperature. The solution was concentrated under vacuum to afford the title compound as a colorless oil (21.5 g, 99%) which was used as such without further purification.
  • Triethylamine (Aldrich, 12.5 L, 90 mmol) was added to a solution of 3- (S) -Amino-1-benzylmethylenecarboxy- 4, 5, 6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 6, 5.0 g, 18 mmol) and 2-naphthalenesulfonyl chloride (9) (Aldrich, 5.2 g, 23 mmol) in acetonitrile (100 mL) at 0°C. After 30 minutes, the reaction mixture was warmed to ambient temperature and stirred at ambient temperature overnight (12 hours) .
  • Triethylamine (Aldrich, 12.5 mL, 90 mmol) was added to a solution of 3- (S) -Amino- 1-benzylmethylenecarboxy- 4, 5, 6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 6, 5.0 g, 18 mmol) and benzenesulfonyl chloride (12) (Aldrich, 4.1 g, 23 mmol) in acetonitrile (100 mL) at 0°C . After 30 minutes, the reaction mixture was warmed to ambient temperature and stirred at ambient temperature overnight (12 hours) .
  • Triethylamine (Aldrich, 11.1 mL, 80 mmol) was added to a solution of 3- (S) -Amino- 1-benzylmethylenecarboxy- 4, 5, 6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 6, 4.3 g, 16 mmol) and 2 , 5-dimethoxybenzenesulfonyl chloride (15) (Aldrich 4.78 g, 20 mmol) in acetonitrile (100 mL) at 0°C. After 30 minutes, the reaction mixture was warmed to ambient temperature and stirred at ambient temperature overnight (12 hours) .
  • Triethylamine (Aldrich, 9.7 mL, 70 mmol) was added to a solution of 3- (S) -Amino-1-benzylmethylenecarboxy- 4 , 5, 6 , 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 6, 4.0 g, 14 mmol) and 3 , 4-dimethoxybenzenesulfonyl chloride (18) (Aldrich 4.2 g, 18 mmol) in acetonitrile (100 mL) at 0°C. After 30 minutes, the reaction mixture was warmed to room temperature and stirred at room temperature overnight (12 hours) .
  • Triphenylphosphine (Aldrich, 5.7 g) was added to a solution of 2-cyano-5- (azidomethyl) thiophene (compound 24, 2.5 g, 10 mmol) in THF (Aldrich, 40 mL) and water .. (10 mL) at 0°C. The solution was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred at ambient temperature for 10 hours. RP-HPLC purification gave the title compound (2.3 g, 94%).
  • Method B A solution of 3-(S)-(2,3- Dihydrobenzo [Jb] furanyl-5-sulfonyl) amino-1- carbohydroxymethyl-4, 5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 8, 200 mg, 0.54 mmol), 2-amidinyl-5- (aminomethyl) thiophene (compound 28, 126 mg, 0.82 mmol), EDC (Aldrich, 57 mg, 0.82 mmol), HOBt (Aldrich, 110 mg, 0.82 mmol), and diisopropylamine (Aldrich 0.48 mL, 2.7 mmol) in DMF (2 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 13 hours.
  • Triphenylphosphine (Aldrich, 1.6 g, 6.2 mmol) was added to a solution of 3-fluoro-4- (azidomethyl) phenyl ( - N-propyloxy) amidine (compound 43, 1.03 g, 4.”' mol) in THF (15 L) .
  • the reaction mixture was st-> , at ambient temperature for 20 hours.
  • the combined organic layers were wash . me and dried (MgS0 4 ) . Removal of solvent und ⁇ acuum gave the title compound (825 mg, 77%).
  • Lithium bis (trimethylsilyl) amide (Aldrich, 1.0 M THF solution, 9 mL, 9mmol) was added to a solution of 3- (S) - (tert-butoxycarbonylamino-4, 5-dihydrobenzo [f] azepin- 2 -one (compound 67, 2.4 g, 8.7 mmol) in THF (10 mL) at 0°C. After 0.5 hour, the reaction mixture was warmed to 40°C for 1 hour. Benzylbromoacetate (Aldrich, 1.5 mL, 9.5 mmol) was introduced and the resulting solution was stirred at ambient temperature for 10 hours.
  • Fmoc-Haic The starting material, (2S, 5S) -Fmoc-5-amino- 1,2,4,5,6, 7-hexahydro-azepino [3,2, 1-hi] indole-4-one- 2-carboxylic acid (“Fmoc-Haic”) (compound 75), was purchased from Neosystem Laboratories, France, Thionyl chloride (Aldrich, 0.7 mL, 9.6 mmol) was added to a solution of Fmoc-Haic (0.5 g, 1.06 mmol) in methanol (30 mL) , and the solution was stirred at room temperature for 12 hours. The solvent was removed under vacuum, and a white solid product was obtained [0.5 g, 99%, MS (electrospray) 483 (M + 1) ] .
  • the reaction mixture was heated at its reflux temperature for 28 hours. After returning to room temperature, the mixture was further treated with acetic anhydride (10 mL) and the solution was stirred at room temperature for 12 hours.
  • the reaction mixture was diluted with methylene chloride (600 mL) and washed with saturated aqueous NaHC0 3 aqueous solution (300 mL) , water (300 mL) and brine (50 mL) . After drying (Na 2 S0 4 ) , the organic solvent was removed under vacuum to give a yellow oil which was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel (85:15 hexane-ethyl acetate) to yield the title compound (91, 6.21 g, 91%).
  • reaction mixture was diluted with methylene chloride (600 mL) and washed with saturated NaHC0 3 aqueous solution (300 mL) , water (300 mL) and brine (50 mL) . After drying (Na 2 S0 4 ) , the organic solvent was removed under vacuum to give a yellow oil which was purified by a flash chromatography on silica gel (85:15 hexane-ethyl acetate) to yield the title compound (98) (10.01 g, 95%).
  • hydroxide form basic resin AG 1-X8 Resin from Bio-Rad Laboratories
  • the reaction mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined extracts were washed with brine and then dried over Na 2 S0 4 . After filtration and evaporation, the crude product was purified on a silica gel column, eluting with hexane-ethyl acetate (4:1 and 3:1). The product 167 was obtained as colorless oil (1.05 g, 24% yield).

Abstract

The present invention provides compounds having a lactam ring at P3 and a bicyclic ring group at P1. These compounds have biological activity as active and potent inhibitors of thrombin. Their pharmaceutically acceptable salts, pharmaceutical compositions thereof and methods of using these compounds and pharmaceutical compositions comprising these compounds as therapeutic agents for treatment of disease states in mammals which are characterized by abnormal thrombosis are also described.

Description

TETRAHYDRO-AZEPINONE DERIVATIVES AS THROMBIN INHIBITORS
TECHNICAL FIELDS In one aspect, the present invention relates to compounds which are potent inhibitors of thrombin. In another aspect, the present invention relates to novel peptide analogs, their pharmaceutically acceptable salts, and pharmaceutically acceptable compositions thereof, which are useful as potent inhibitors of blood coagulation in vi tro and in vivo in mammals. In yet another aspect, the invention relates to methods of using these inhibitors as therapeutic agents for disease states in mammals characterized by abnormal thrombosis. In a further aspect, the present invention relates to methods of using these inhibitors as in vi tro diagnostic agents .
BACKGROUND AND INTRODUCTION TO THE INVENTION Normal hemostasis is the result of a complex balance between the processes of clot formation (blood coagulation) and clot dissolution (fibrinolysis) . The complex interactions between blood cells, specific plasma proteins and the vascular surface, maintain the fluidity of blood unless injury occurs. Damage to the endothelial barrier lining the vascular wall exposes underlying tissue to these blood components. This in turn triggers a series of biochemical reactions altering the hemostatic balance in favor of blood coagulation which can either result in the desired formation of a hemostatic plug stemming the loss of blood or the undesirable formation of an occlusive intravascular thrombus resulting in reduced or complete lack of blood flow to the affected organ. The blood coagulation response is the culmination of a series of amplified reactions in which several specific zymogens of serine proteases in plasma are activated by limited proteolysis. Nemerson, Y. and Nossel, H.L., Ann. Rev. Med., 33: 479 (1982). This series of reactions results in the formation of an insoluble fibrin matrix composed of fibrin and cellular components which is required for the stabilization of the primary hemostatic plug or thrombus. The initiation and propagation of the proteolytic activation reactions occurs through a series of amplified pathways which are localized to membranous surfaces at the site of vascular injury (Mann, K.G., Nesheim, M.E., Church, W.R. , Haley, P. and Krishnaswamy, S. (1990) Blood 76: 1-16. and Lawson, J.H., Kalafatis, M., Stram, S., and Mann, K.G. (1994) J. Biol. Chem. 269: 23357-23366).
These pathways are highly inter-dependent and converge in the formation of the serine protease, Factor Xa. Factor Xa catalyzes the penultimate step in the blood coagulation cascade which is the formation of the serine protease thrombin. This step occurs following the assembly of the prothrombinase complex which is composed of factor Xa, the non-enzymatic co-factor Va, and the substrate prothrombin assembled on the surface of adhered, activated platelets or systemically circulating membranous microparticles .
Proteolytic activation of zymogen factor X to its catalytically active form, factor Xa, can occur by either the intrinsic or extrinsic coagulation pathways. The intrinsic pathway is referred to as "intrinsic" because everything needed for clotting is in the blood. Saito, H., "Normal Hemostatic mechanisms", Disorders of Hemostasis , pp. 27-29, Grune & Stratton, Inc. (O.D. Ratnoff , M.D. and CD. Forbes, M.D. edit. 1984) . This pathway is comprised of the zymogen serine proteases, factors IX and XI, and the non-enzymatic co-factor, factor VIII. The initiation of the intrinsic pathway results in the activation of factor XI to XIa. Factor XIa catalyzes the activation of factor IX to factor IXa which in combination with the activated form of factor
VIII on an appropriate phospholipid surface, results in the formation of the tenase complex. This complex also catalyzes the formation of the serine protease, factor Xa, from its zymogen, factor X which subsequently results in clot formation.
The extrinsic pathway is referred to as "extrinsic" because the tissue factor which binds to and facilitates the activation of factor VII comes from outside the blood. Saito, id . The major components of this pathway are the zymogen serine protease, factor VII, and the membrane bound protein, tissue factor. The latter serves as the requisite non-enzymatic co-factor for this enzyme. The initiation of this pathway is thought to be an autocatalytic event resulting from the activation of zymogen factor VII by trace levels of activated factor VII (factor Vila) , both of which are bound to newly exposed tissue factor on membrane surfaces at sites of vascular damage. The factor Vila/tissue factor complex directly catalyzes the formation of the serine protease, factor Xa, from its zymogen, factor X. Exposure of blood to injured tissue initiates blood clotting by the extrinsic pathway.
The formation of thrombin is catalyzed by factor Xa following the assembly of the catalytic prothrombinase complex as reviewed by Mann, K.G. et al . , "Surface- Dependent Reactions of the Vitamin K-Dependent Enzyme Complexes," Blood, 76:1-16 (1990). This complex is composed of factor Xa, the non-enzymatic co-factor Va and the substrate prothrombin all assembled on an appropriate phospholipid surface. The requirement of a macromolecular complex for efficient catalysis results in the protection of factor Xa from natural anticoagulant mechanisms such as heparin-antithrombin III mediated inhibition. Teite, J.M. and Rosenberg, R.D., "Protection of Factor Xa from neutralization by the heparin-antithrombin complex", J. Clin . Invest . , 71:1383-1391 (1983) . In addition, sequestration of factor Xa in the prothrombinase complex also renders it resistant to inhibition by exogenous heparin therapy which also requires antithrombin III to elicit its anticoagulant effect. Thrombin is the primary mediator of thrombus formation. Thrombin acts directly to cause formation of insoluble fibrin from circulating fibrinogen. In addition, thrombin activates the zymogen factor XIII to the active transglutaminase factor Xllla which acts to covalently stabilize the growing thrombus by crosslinking the fibrin strands. Lorand, L. and
Konishi, K. , Arch . Biochem . Biophys . , 105 :58 (1964). Beyond its direct role in the formation and stabilization of fibrin rich clots, the enzyme has been reported to have profound bioregulatory effects on a number of cellular components within the vasculature and blood. Shuman, M.A. , Ann . NY Acad. Sci . , 405:349 (1986) .
It is believed that thrombin is the most potent agonist of platelet activation, and it has been demonstrated to be the primary pathophysiologic-mediator of platelet-dependent arterial thrombus formation. Edit, J.F. et al . , J. Clin . Invest . , 84:18 (1989). Thrombin-mediated platelet activation leads to ligand- induced inter-platelet aggregation principally due to the bivalent interactions between adhesive ligands such as fibrinogen and fibronectin with platelet integrin receptors such as glycoprotein Ilb/lIIa which assume their active conformation following thrombin activation. Berndt, M.C. and Phillips, D.R., Platelets in Biology and Pathology, pp. 43-74, Elsevier/North Holland
Biomedical Press (Gordon, J.L. edit. 1981). Thrombin- activated platelets can also support further thrombin production through the assembly of new prothrombinase and tenase (factor IXa, factor Villa and factor X) catalytic complexes on the membrane surface of intact activated platelets and platelet-derived microparticles, following thrombin-mediated activation of the non- enzymatic cofactors V and VIII, respectively. Tans, G. et al . , Blood, 77_:2641 (1991). This positive feedback process results in the local generation of large concentrations of thrombin within the vicinity of the thrombus which supports further thrombus growth and extension. Mann, K.G. et al . , Blood, 76:1 (1990). In contrast to its prothrombotic effects, thrombin has been shown to influence other aspects of hemostasis. These include its effect as an important physiological anticoagulant. The anticoagulant effect of thrombin is expressed following binding of thrombin to the endothelial cell membrane glycoprotein, thrombomodulin. This is thought to result in an alteration of the substrate specificity of thrombin thereby allowing it to recognize and proteolytically activate circulating protein C to give activated protein C (aPC) . Musci, G. et al . , Biochemistry, 27_ : 169 , (1988 ) . aPC is a serine protease which selectively inactivates the non-enzymatic co-factors Va and Villa resulting in a down-regulation of thrombin formation by the prothrombinase. and tenase catalytic complexes, respectively. Esmon, C.T., Science, 235:1348 (1987) . The activation of protein C by thrombin in the absence of thrombomodulin is poor. Thrombin has also been shown to be a potent direct mitogen for a number of cell types, including cells of mesenchymal, origin such as vascular smooth muscle cells. Chen, L.B. and Buchanan, J.M., Proc . Natl . Acad . Sci . USA, 7_2:131 (1975). The direct interaction of thrombin with vascular smooth muscle also results in vasoconstriction. Walz, D.A. et al . , Proc . Soc . Expl . Biol . Med . , 180:518 (1985). Thrombin acts as a direct secretagogue inducing the release of a number of bioactive substances from vascular endothelial cells including tissue plasminogen activator. Levin, E.G. et al . , Thromb . Haemost . , 5_6:115 (1986). In addition to these direct effects on vascular cells, the enzyme can indirectly elaborate potent mitogenic activity on vascular smooth muscle cells by the release of several potent growth factors (e.g. platelet-derived growth factor, PDGF, and epidermal growth factor, EGF) from platelet α-granules following thrombin-induced activation. Ross, R. , N. Engl . J. Med . , 314 :408 (1986).
Many significant disease states are related to abnormal hemostasis. With respect to the coronary arterial vasculature, abnormal thrombus formation due to the rupture of an established atherosclerotic plaque is the major cause of acute myocardial infarction and unstable angina. Moreover, treatment of an occlusive coronary thrombus by either thrombolytic therapy or percutaneous transluminal coronary angioplasty (PTCA) is often accompanied by an acute thrombotic reclosure of the affected vessel which requires immediate resolution. With respect to the venous vasculature, a high percentage of patients undergoing major surgery in the lower extremities or the abdominal area suffer from thrombus formation in the venous vasculature which can result in reduced blood flow to the affected extremity and a predisposition to pulmonary embolism. Disseminated intravascular coagulopathy commonly occurs within both vascular systems during septic shock, certain viral infections and cancer and is characterized by the rapid consumption of coagulation factors and systemic coagulation which results in the formation of life-threatening thrombi occurring throughout the vasculature leading to widespread organ failure.
Pathogenic thrombosis in the arterial vasculature is a major clinical concern in today's medicine. It is the leading cause of acute myocardial infarction which is one of the leading causes of death in the western world. Recurrent arterial thrombosis also remains one of the leading causes of failure following enzymatic or mechanical recanalization of occluded coronary vessels using thrombolytic agents or percutaneous transluminal coronary angioplasty (PTCA), respectively. Ross, A.M., Thrombosis in Cardiovascular Disorder, p. 327, W.B. Saunders Co. (Fuster, V. and Verstraete, M. edit. 1991); Califf, R.M. and Willerson, J.T., id . at p 389. In contrast to thrombotic events in the venous vasculature, arterial thrombosis is the result of a complex interaction between fibrin formation resulting from the blood coagulation cascade and cellular components, particularly platelets, which make up a large percentage of arterial thrombi. Heparin, the most widely used clinical anticoagulant administered i.v., has not been shown to be universally effective in the treatment or prevention of acute arterial thrombosis or rethrombosis . Prins, M.H. and Hirsh, J., J". Am . Coll . Cardiol . , 67 : 3A (1991) .
Besides the unpredictable, recurrent thrombotic reocclusion which commonly occurs following PTCA, a profound restenosis of the recanalized vessel occurs in 30 to 40% of patients 1 to 6 months following this procedure. Califf, R.M. et al . , J. Am . Coll . Cardiol . , 17_:2B (1991). These patients require further treatment with either a repeat PTCA or coronary artery bypass surgery to relieve the newly formed stenosis. Restenosis of a mechanically damaged vessel is not a thrombotic process but instead is the result of a hyperproliterative response in the surrounding smooth muscle cells which over time results in a decreased luminal diameter of the affected vessel due to increased muscle mass. Id. As for arterial thrombosis, there is currently no effective pharmacologic treatment for the prevention of vascular restenosis following mechanical recanalization.
The need for safe and effective therapeutic anticoagulants has in one aspect focused on the role of the serine protease thrombin in blood coagulation.
Most preferred natural substrates for thrombin are reported to contain an uncharged amino acid in the P3 recognition subsite. For example, the thrombin cleavage site on the Aa chain of fibrinogen, which is the primary physiological substrate for thrombin, is reported to contain a glycine residue in this position while the cleavage site on the Bb chain contains a serine, as shown below: P4 P3 P2 PI PI'
Gly-Gly-Val-Arg/Gly Fibrinogen Aa Chain
[SEQ. ID. NO. 1] Phe-Ser-Ala-Arg/Gly Fibrinogen Bb Chain [SEQ. ID. NO. 2] Peptidyl derivatives having an uncharged residue in the P3 position are said to bind to the active site of thrombin and thereby inhibit the conversion of fibrinogen to fibrin and cellular activation have been reported. These derivatives have either an aldehyde, chloromethyl ketone or boronic acid functionality associated with the PI amino acid. For example, substrate-like peptidyl derivatives such as D- phenylalanyl-prolyl-argininal (D-Phe-Pro-Arg-al) , D- phenylalanyl-prolyl-arginine-chloromethyl ketone (P- PACK) and acetyl-D-phenylalanyl-prolyl-boroarginine (Ac- (D-Phe) -Pro-boroArg) have been reported to inhibit thrombin by directly binding to the active site of the enzyme. Bajusz, S., Symposia Biologica Hungarica, 25:277 (1984); Bajusz, S. et al . , J. Med. Chem. 33:1729 (1990); Bajusz, S. et al . , Int. J. Peptide Protein Res . 12:217 (1970); Kettner, C. and Shaw, E., Methods Enzymol . , 80:826 (1987); Kettner, C. et al . , EP 293,881 (published December 7, 1988); Kettner, C. , et al . , J. Biol . Chem . , 265:18209 (1990). These molecules have been reported to be potent anticoagulants in the prevention of platelet-rich arterial thrombosis. Kelly, A.B. et al . , Thromb . Haemostas . , 6_5:736 at abstract 257 (1991) . Other peptidyl aldehydes have been proposed or reported as inhibitors of thrombin. See, e . g. , Bey, P. et al . , EP 363,284 (published April 11, 1990) and Balasubramanian, N. et al . , EP 526,877 (published February 10, 1993) .
Peptidyl compounds which are said to be active site inhibitors of thrombin but which differ in structure from those containing an uncharged amino acid in the P3 recognition subsite have been reported.
The compound, Argatroban (also called 2R,4R-4- methyl-1- [N-2- (3-methyl-l, 2 , 3 , 4-tetrahydro-8- quinolinesulfonyl) -L-argininyl] -2-piperdinecarboxylic acid) , is also reported to bind directly to the active site of thrombin and has been thought to be the most potent and selective compound in the class of non- peptidyl inhibitors of this enzyme. Okamoto, S. et al., Biochem. Biophys . Res . Commun . , 101:440 (1981). Argatroban has been reported to be a potent antithrombotic agent in several experimental models of acute arterial thrombosis. Jang, I.K. et al . , in both Circulation, 81:219 (1990) and Circ . Res . , 67:1552 (1990) .
Peptidyl compounds which are said to be inhibitors of thrombin and whose mode of action is thought to be by binding to both the active site and another site on the enzyme have been reported. Hirudin and certain peptidyl derivatives of hirudin have been reported to inhibit both conversion of fibrinogen to fibrin and platelet activation by binding to either both the active site and exo site, or the exo site only, of thrombin. Markwardt, P., Thromb . Haemostas . , 66:141 (1991). Hirudin is reported to be a 65 amino acid polypeptide originally isolated from leech salivary gland extracts. It is said to be one of the most potent inhibitors of thrombin known. Marki , W.E. and Wallis, R.B., Thromb . Haemostas . , 6_4:344 (1990). It has been reported to inhibit thrombin by binding to both its anion-binding exo-site and to its catalytic active site which are distinct and physically distant from each other. Rydel, T.J. et al . , Science, 249 :277 (1990). Hirudin has been reported to be a potent antithrombotic agent in vivo.
Markwardt, F. et al . , Phar azie, 43_:202 (1988); Kelly, A.B. et al . , Blood, 7ff : ( 1991 ) . In addition to its antithrombotic effects, hirudin has been reported to also effectively inhibit smooth muscle proliferation and the associated restenosis following mechanical damage to an atherosclerotic rabbit femoral artery. Sarembock, I.J. et al . , Circulation, 84:232 (1991).
Hirugen has been reported to be a peptide derived from the anionic carboxy-terminus of hirudin. It is reported to bind only to the anion binding exo-site of thrombin and thereby inhibit the formation of fibrin but not the catalytic turnover of small synthetic substrates which have access to the unblocked active site of the enzyme. Maraganore, J.M. et al . , J. Biol . Chem . ,
264:8692 (1989); Naski, M.C. et al . , J. Biol . Chem . , 265 : 13484 (1990). The region of hirudin represented by hirugen has been reported, as according to by x-ray crystallographic analysis, to bind directly to the exo site of thrombin. Skrzypczak-Jankun, E. et al . , Thromb . Haemostas . , 65:830 at abstract 507 (1991). Moreover, the binding of hirugen has also been reported to enhance the catalytic turnover of certain small synthetic substrates by thrombin, indicating that a conformational change in the enzyme active site may accompany occupancy of the exo-site. Liu, U.W. et al . , J. Biol . Chem . , 266 :16977 (1991) . Hirugen also is reported to block thrombin-mediated platelet aggregation. Jakubowski, J.A. and Maraganore, J.M., Blood, 75:399 (1990). A group of synthetic chimeric molecules comprised of a hirugen-like sequence linked by a glycine-spacer region to the peptide, D-phenylalanyl-prolyl-arginine, which is based on a preferred substrate recognition site for thrombin, has been termed to be hirulog. Maraganore et al . , U.S. Patent No. 5,196,404 (March 23, 1993). The hirugen-like sequence is said to be linked to this peptide through the C-terminal end of the peptide. Maraganone, J.M. et al . , Biochemistry, 29_:7095 (1990). The hirulogs have been reported to be an effective antithrombotic agents in preventing both fibrin-rich and platelet-rich thrombosis. Maraganone, J.M. et al . , Thromb . Haemostas . , 65:651 at abstract 17 (1991). Certain benzamidines have been reported to inhibit thrombin though non-selectively . 4-amidinophenylpyruvic acid (APPA) has been reported to be a thrombin inhibitor with low toxicity and favorable pharmacokinetics. However, this compound was reported to be non-selective, inhibiting trypsin, plasmin and kallikrein. Markwardt et al . , Thromb . Res . , 1:243-52 (1972). Other benzamidine-derived structures which have been reported to inhibit thrombin include the cyclic amides of Nα- substituted 4-amidinophenylalanine and 2 -amino-5- (4- amidinophenyl) -1-valeric acid. The inhibitory constant displayed by these compounds was reported to be in the micromolar range. Markwardt et al . , Thromb . Res . , 17:425-31 (1980) . Moreover, derivatives of 4- amidinophenylalanine whose α-amino group is linked to the arylsulfonyl residue via a ω-aminoalkylcarboxylic acid as spacer have also been assessed for their inhibitory effect. Among these Nα- (2- naphthylsulphonylglycyl) -4-amidino-phenylalanine piperidide (a-NAPAP) has been reported to possess an affinity for thrombin (Kι=6 x 10"9 M) . Banner et al . , J. Biol . Chem . , 266 :20085 (1991) and Sturzebecher et al . , Thromb . Res . , 29:635-42 (1983).
Certain bis-benzamidines have been reported to inhibit thrombin. The antithrombin activity of bis- benzamidines was reported to increase with the length and bulkiness of the central chain. However, these compounds were reported to be generally toxic in the micromolar range where they are also inhibitory. Geratz et al . , Thromb . Diath . Haemorrh . , 29:154-67 (1973); Geratz et al . , J". Med. Chem . , l_6:970-5 (1973); Geratz et al . , J. Med . Chem . , 19:634-9 (1976); Walsmann et al . , Acta Biol . Med. Germ . , 3_5:Kl-8 (1976); and Hauptmann et al . , Acta Biol . Med . Germ . , 35:635-44 (1976).
Certain amidino-bearing aromatic ring structures such as β-naphthamidines have been reported to possess modest antithrombin and anticoagulant activity. This class of compounds include the non-selective 6-amidino- 2-naphthyl-4-guanidinobenzoate dimethanesulfonate (FUT 175). Fuji et al . , Biochim . Biophys . Acta , 661:342-5 (1981); and Hitomi et al . , Haemostasis, 15:164-8 (1985).
Certain phenylguanidines have been reported to inhibit thrombin. Derivatives of 4- guanidinophenylalanine with inhibitory constants in the micromolar range have been reported to inhibit thrombin. This class includes the Nα-tosylated and dansylated 4- guanidino phenylalanine piperidides . Claeson et al . , Thromb . Haemostas . , 5_0:53 (1983). Another compound, [ethyl p- (6-guanidinohexanoyloxy) benzoate] methane sulfonate (FOY) was reported to be a non-selective competitive inhibitor of thrombin. Ohno et al . , Thromb . Res . , 19:579-588 (1980).
Certain compounds having inhibitory activity toward serine proteases, including thrombin, factor Xa, and trypsin, are disclosed within the following commonly assigned United States patents or published PCT applications: US 5,371,072; 5,492,895; 5,534,498; 5,597,804; 5,637,599; 5,646,165; 5,656,600; 5,656,645; WO 94/13693; WO 95/35311; WO 95/35313; WO 96/19493.
Substances which interfere in the process of blood coagulation (anticoagulants) have been demonstrated to be important therapeutic agents in the treatment and prevention of thrombotic disorders (Kessler, CM. (1991) Chest 9_9: 97S-112S and Cairns, J.A., Hirsh, J. , Lewis, H.D., Resnekov, L., and Theroux, P. (1992) Chest 102 : 456S-481S) . The currently approved clinical anticoagulants have been associated with a number of adverse effects owing to the relatively non-specific nature of their effect on the blood coagulation cascade (Levine, M.N. , Hirsh, J. , Landefeld, S., and Raskob, G . (1992) Chest 102: 352S-363S) . This has stimulated the search for more effective anticoagulant agents which can more effectively control the activity of the coagulation cascade by selectively interfering with specific reactions in this process which may have a positive effect in reducing the complications of anticoagulant therapy (Weitz, J., and Hirsh, J. (1993) J. Lab. Clin. Med. 122 : 364-373) . In another aspect, this search has focused on normal human proteins which serve as endogenous anticoagulants in controlling the activity of the blood coagulation cascade. In addition, various he atophageous organisms have been investigated because of their ability to effectively anticoagulate the blood meal during and following feeding on their hosts suggesting that they have evolved effective anticoagulant strategies which may be useful as therapeutic agents.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention is directed to novel compounds having a lactam at P3 and which feature a bicyclic ring group at PI. These compounds have activity as inhibitors of thrombin.
Thus, according to one aspect, the present invention is directed to compounds of formula (I) :
Figure imgf000019_0001
wherein
(A) X is selected from the group consisting of -S(0)2-, -N(R')-S(0)2-, -c(=0)-, -OC(=0)-, -N(R')C(=0)-, and a direct link, wherein R' is selected from hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms and aralkyl of about 6 to about 16 carbon atoms ;
(B) Rx is selected from the group consisting of:
(1) alkyl of 1 to about 12 carbon atoms which is optionally substituted with Y and/or Y2, (2) alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms substituted with cycloalkyl of about 3 to about 8 carbon atoms which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the ring with Yl7 Y2 and/or Y3,
(3) cycloalkyl of 3 to about 15 carbon atoms, which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the ring with Yl t Y2 and/or Y3, (4) heterocycloalkyl of 4 to about 10 ring atoms with the ring atoms selected from carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen, and S(0)ι, wherein i is 0, 1 or 2 , which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the ring with Yi7 Y2 and/or Y3, (5) heterocyclo of 4 to about 10 ring atoms with the ring atoms selected from carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen, and S(0)i, x f , x f including ^-^ , wherein ^-^ is a 5 to 7 member heterocycle of 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms, where G is
-CH2-, -0-, -S(=0)-, -S(0)2- or -S-, which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the ring carbons with
Ya, Y2 and/or Y3, (6) alkenyl of about 2 to about 6 carbon atoms which is optionally substituted with cycloalkyl of about 3 to about 8 carbon atoms, which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the ring carbons with Y1; Y2 and/or Y3, (7) aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms which is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted with Yα, Y2, and/or Y3,
(8) heteroaryl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms with the ring atoms selected from carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur, and which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted with Yi, Y2, and/or Y3, (9) aralkyl of about 7 to about 15 carbon atoms which is optionally substituted on the alkyl chain with hydroxy or halogen and mono-, di-, or tri- substituted in the aryl ring with Ylr Y2, and/or. Y3,
(10) heteroaralkyl of 5 to 14 ring atoms with the ring atoms selected from carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur, and which is optionally substituted on the alkyl chain with hydroxy or halogen and optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted on the ring with Yi, Y2, and/or Y3, (11) aralkenyl of about 8 to about 16 carbon atoms which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the aryl ring with Y1; Y2, and/or Y3,
(12) heteroaralkenyl of 5 to 14 ring atoms with the ring atoms selected from carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur, and which is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted on the ring with Yi, Y2, and/or Y3,
Figure imgf000021_0001
Figure imgf000021_0002
Figure imgf000022_0001
Figure imgf000022_0002
(17) fused carbocyclic alkyl of about 5 to about 15 carbon atoms,
(18) difluoromethyl or perfluoroalkyl of 1 to about 12 carbon atoms,
(19) perfluoroaryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms,
(20) perfluoraralkyl of about 7 to about 15 carbon atoms , and
(21) hydrogen when X is a direct link; wherein (i) each Yl t Y2, and Y3 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, cyano, nitro, tetrazolyl optionally substituted with alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, guanidino, amidino, methylamino, methylguanidino, -CF3, -CF2CF3, -CH(CF3)2, -C(OH) (CF3)2, -0CF3, -OCF2CF3, -OCF2H, -OC(0)NH2, -0C(0)NHZι, -OC(0)NZιZ2, -NHC(0)Zl7 -NHC(0)NH2, -NHC(0)NHZ!, -NHC(0)NZ;jZ2, -C(0)0H, -C(0)0Zx, -C(0)NH2, -C(0)NZιZ2, -P(0)3H2, -P(0)3(Zι)2, -S(0)3H, -S(0)pZι, -Z1# -OZi, -OH, -NH2, -NHZi, -NZιZ2, N-morpholino, and
-S (O) P(CF2) qCF3, wherein p is 0, 1 or 2 , q is an integer from 0 to 5 , and Zi and Z2 are independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl of 1 to about 12 carbon atoms, aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms, heteroaryl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms, aralkyl of about 7 to about 15 carbon atoms, and heteroaralkyl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms, or
(ii) Yi and Y2 are selected together to be -0[C(Z3) (Z4)]r0- or -0[C(Z3) (Z4)]r+α-, wherein r is an integer from 1 to 4 and Z3 and Z4 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl or 1 to about 12 carbon atoms, aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms, heteroaryl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms, aralkyl of about 7 to about 15 carbon atoms, and heteroaralkyl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms;
(C) Lac is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000023_0001
wherein
(1) n is 0, 1, 2, or 3; and
(2) R2 and R3 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl of 3 to about 8 carbon atoms, and aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms or R2 and R3 taken together are -CH2-;
(D) J is selected from
(1)
Figure imgf000024_0001
(2)
Figure imgf000024_0002
(3)
Figure imgf000024_0003
(4)
Figure imgf000025_0001
wherein qq is 0 or 1, R4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms; cycloalkyl of 3 to about 8 carbon atoms and aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms ; R5a and R5b are independently selected from hydrogen, fluoro, chloro and alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms; Rg is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms, -C(=0)R7a, or -CH20R7b; 7a is alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, amino, alkylamino of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms or dialkylamino of 2 to about 12 carbon atoms; R7b is hydrogen, acyl, or alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms; and Q7, Q8 and Q9 are independently selected from C(R5a), N, S and 0, provided that (i) Q7, Q8 and Q9 are not all C (R5a) and (ii) only one of Q7, Q8 and Q9 can be 0 or S;
(E) alternatively Lac-J is
Figure imgf000025_0002
wherein m is 1, 2 or 3 and Jx is -C (=0) -NH-CH2- ; and (F) E is selected from
(1) a group having the formula
Figure imgf000026_0001
wherein
(a) Qi is C(R8) C(R9) (R9a) , N, N(R8a) or a direct link;
(b) Q2 is C(R8) C(Rιo) (Rioa) N, N(R8a), S, or
O;
(c) Q3 is C(R8), C(Rιι) (Rna) , N, or N(R8a); (d) Q4 is C(R8), C(Rι2) (R12a) , N, N(R8a), S, or 0;
(e) Q5 is C(Rι3), C(Rι3) (Risa) or N;
(f) Q6 is C(R14), C(R14) (Ri4'a) or N;
(g) R8 is Rι5Ri6 or -ORι5;
(h) R8a is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms, NRι5a6a or -0Rι5a;
(i) R9, Rio, Rn, Rι2, Rι3 and Ri4 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms optionally substituted with alkoxy of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms; halogen and trifluoromethyl;
(j) R9a, Rioa, Riia Ri2a, i3 and Ri4 are independently hydrogen or absent; (k) R15 and Rι5a are independently hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms, or -C(=0)Rι7;
(1) Rx6 and Rι6a are independently hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms ;
(m) alternatively, Rι5 and Rι6 or Rι5a and R16a taken together form a divalent radical of the formula -(CH2)W-, where w is 3, 4 or 5; and
(n) Rι7 is alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms or alkoxy of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms ; with the provisos that:
(i) no more than one of Qi, Q2, Q3 and Q4 can be C(R8) or N(R8a);
(ii) at least one of Qi, Q2, Q3 and Q4 but not all, is N or N(R8a) ;
(iii) only one of Q2 and Q4 can be 0 or S ; and (iv) Qi, Q , Q3 and Q4 are not all heteroatoms;
(2) the group consisting of
(a)
(b)
Figure imgf000028_0001
(c)
Figure imgf000028_0002
(d)
Figure imgf000028_0003
(e)
Figure imgf000029_0001
(f)
Figure imgf000029_0002
(g)
Figure imgf000029_0003
wherein R'8 and R'9 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms substituted with alkoxy of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, and trifluoromethyl; R'IO is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkoxy of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms, trihydrocarbylsilyl of 3 to about 16 carbon atoms, alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms or -C(=0)R'ι4a; R'n is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms; R'ι2 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms or -C(=0)R'i4b; R'i3 is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms; R'i2 and R'i3 taken together form a divalent radical of the formula -(CH2)W- where w is 3, 4 or 5; and R'i4a and R'ι4b are independently alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms or (CF2)jCF3 wherein j is 0, 1, 2 or 3; and
(3) a six membered heterocyclic ring having two ring nitrogen atoms and the remainder of the ring atoms carbon atoms which is substituted with
/R"B
-N.
\
R'\
on a ring carbon and is substituted with R"ιo and R"n on different ring carbons wherein
(1) R"8 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl of about 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl of 3 to about 7 carbon atoms, -(CF2)kCF3, -0Rι2, -C(=0)R"ι2, -C(=0)0R"12 and -C(=0)NHR"ι2 wherein R"12 is H or alkyl of 1 to about 12 carbon atoms and k is 0, 1, 2 or 3 ;
(2) R"9 is selected from hydrogen and alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms;
(3) alternatively R"8 and R"9 are taken together to give a divalent radical of the formula -(CH2)W- wherein w is 3, 4 or 5 ; and
(4) R"ιo and R"n are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms substituted with alkoxy of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to about 8 carbon atoms, halogen, trifluoromethyl, -OC (R"13) (R"14) - (=0) -R"15 wherein R"ι3 and R"ι4 are independently selected from hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, R"ι5 is hydroxy, alkoxy of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms or -N(R"ι6) (R"i7) wherein R"ι6 and R"ι7 are independently hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms ; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
In one aspect, the present invention is directed to compounds which are potent inhibitors of thrombin. According to a preferred aspect, these compounds comprise novel azepin-2-one peptidomimetics . The invention is also directed to pharmaceutical compositions which comprise one of these compounds and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. These compounds and pharmaceutical compositions are potent inhibitors of blood coagulation in vitro and in vivo in mammals. These compounds and pharmaceutical compositions may be used as therapeutic agents for treating disease states in mammals which are characterized by abnormal thrombosis. A further aspect of the present invention is directed to the use of these compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for treatment of disease states in mammals characterized by abnormal thrombosis. An alternate aspect of the present invention is directed to methods of using these thrombin inhibitors as in vitro diagnostic agents. In yet another aspect, the present invention is directed to methods of using the compounds and pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention for the prevention of thrombosis in a mammal suspected of having a condition characterized by abnormal thrombosis, comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention or pharmaceutical composition comprising such a compound.
Definitions In accordance with the present invention and as used herein, the following terms are defined to have following meanings, unless explicitly stated otherwise:
In referring to formula (I), PI, P2 , P3 and P4 denote the portions of the molecule indicated below:
Figure imgf000032_0001
P4 P3 P2 PI wherein Rl f X, Lac, J and E are as defined in connection with formula (I) . The term "acyl" refers to the group -C(=0)R' where R' is a hydrocarbyl group.
The term "alkenyl" refers to unsaturated aliphatic groups having at least one double bond.
The term "alkynyl" refers to unsaturated aliphatic groups having at least one triple bond.
The term "alkyl" refers to saturated aliphatic groups including straight-chain, branched-chain and cyclic groups. The terms "alkoxy" and "alkoxyl" refer to a group having the formula, R-0-, wherein R is an alkyl group.
The term "alkoxycarbonyl" refers to -C(0)OR wherein R is alkyl.
The term "aminoalkyl" refers to an alkyl group substituted with an amino (NH2) group. The term "aralkenyl" refers to an alkenyl group substituted with an aryl group. Preferably the alkenyl group has from 2 to about 6 carbon atoms .
The term "aralkyl" refers to an alkyl group substituted with an aryl group. Suitable aralkyl groups include benzyl, picolyl, and the like, all of which may be optionally substituted. Preferably the alkyl group has from 1 to about 5 carbon atoms.
The term "aryl" refers to an aromatic group which has at least one ring having a conjugated pi electron system and includes a carbocyclic aryl, heterocyclic aryl and biaryl groups, all of which may be optionally substituted.
The term "aryloxy" refers to a group having the formula, R-0-, wherein R is an aryl group. The term "aralkoxy" refers to a group having the formula, R-0-, wherein R is an aralkyl group.
The term "amino acid" refers to both natural and unnatural amino acids in their D and L stereoisomers, if their structures allow such stereoisomeric forms, and their analogs. Natural amino acids include alanine
(Ala) , arginine (Arg) , asparagine (Asn) , aspartic acid (Asp) , cysteine (Cys) , glutamine (Gin) , glutamic acid (Glu) , glycine (Gly) , histidine (His) , isoleucine (lie) , leucine (Leu) , lysine (Lys) , methionine (Met) , phenylalanine (Phe) , proline (Pro) , serine (Ser) , threonine (Thr) , tryptophan (Trp) , tyrosine (Tyr) and valine (Val) . Unnatural amino acids include, but are not limited to, azetidinecarboxylic acid, 2-aminoadipic acid, 3-aminoadipic acid, beta-alanine, aminopropionic acid, 2 -aminobutyric acid, 4-aminobutyric acid, 6- aminocaproic acid, 2-aminoheptanoic acid, 2 - aminoisobutyric acid, 3-aminoisobutyric acid, 2- aminopimelic acid, 2,4 diaminoisobutyric acid, demosine, 2 , 2 ' -diaminopimelic acid, 2 , 3-diaminopropionic acid, N- ethylglycine, N-ethylasparagine, hydroxylysine, allo- hydroxylysine, 3-hydroxyproline, 4-hydroxyproline, isodesmosine, allo- isoleucine, N-methylglycine, N- methylisoleucine, N-methylvaline, norvaline, norleucine, ornithihe and plpecolic acid. Amino acid analogs include the natural and unnatural amino acids which are chemically blocked, reversibly or irreversibly, or modified on their N-terminal amino group or their side- chain groups, as for example, methionine sulfoxide, methionine sulfone, S- (carboxymethyl) -cysteine, S (carboxymethyl) -cysteine sulfoxide and S- (carboxymethyl) -cysteine sulfone.
The term "amino acid residue" refers icals having the structure: (1) -C(0)-R-NH-, w' a R typically is -CH(R')-, wherein R' is H or a carbon (CH2)p
<^ ^>"C(=0).
N containing substituent; or (2) ' , wherein p is 1, 2 or 3 representing the azetidinecarboxylic acid, proline or pipecolic acid residues, respectively.
The term "amino acid analog" refers to an amino acid wherein either the C-terminal carboxy group, the N- terminal amino group or side-chain functional group has been chemically modified to another functional group. For example, aspartic acid- (beta-methyl ester) is an amino acid analog of aspartic acid; N-ethylglycine is an amino acid analog of glycerine; or alanine carboxamide is an amino acid analog of alanine.
"Arginine mimic side chain" or "side chain of an arginine mimic" refers to a group of atoms which spatially and electronically resemble or mimic the normal arginine side chain. These groups include the cyclic R5 groups defined in connection with formula (I) . "Biaryl" refers to phenyl substituted by carbocyclic or heterocyclic aryl as defined herein, ortho, meta or para to the point of attachment of the phenyl ring .
"Brine" refers to an aqueous saturated solution of sodium chloride. "Camphor derivative" refers to the groups:
Figure imgf000036_0001
"Carbocyclic" refers to a group having one or more rings wherein the ring atoms are all carbon atoms and includes groups having aryl, cycloalkyl, and unsaturated cycloalkyl or a combination of such rings. Such groups include cyclohexyl, cycloheptenyl , tetrahydronaphthyl , phenyl, naphthyl, and the like.
"Carbocyclic aryl" refers to aromatic groups wherein the ring atoms on the aromatic ring are carbon atoms. Carbocyclic aryl groups include monocyclic carbocyclic aryl groups and naphthyl groups, all of which may be optionally substituted. Suitable carbocyclic aryl groups include phenyl and naphthyl. Suitable substituted carbocyclic aryl groups include indene and phenyl substituted by one to two substituents such being advantageously lower alkyl, hydroxy, lower alkoxy, lower alkoxycarbonyl, halogen, trifluoromethyl, nitro, and cyano. Substituted naphthyl refers to 1- or 2 -naphthyl substituted by lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, or halogen.
"Carboxylate mimic" or "carboxylic acid mimic" refers to a group which spatially and electronically mimics a carboxylic acid and provides a net negative charge, i.e., an anion, and also has a pKa value similar to that of a corresponding carboxylic acid, preferably having a pKa of about 4 to 5. "Cycloalkenyl" or "unsaturated cycloalkyl" refers to a cyclic alkenyl group, that is, a cycloalkyl group modified by having at least one double band. Suitable cycloalkenyl groups include, for example, cyclopentenyl and cyclohexenyl .
"Cycloalkyl" refers to a cyclic alkyl group. Suitable cycloalkyl groups include, for example, cyclohexyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, and cycloheptyl .
"Cyclohexylmethyl" refers to a cyclohexyl group attached to CH2.
"Fused carbocyclic" refers to a group having multiple rings which are fused, including multicyclic fused carbocyclic rings having both aromatic and non- aromatic rings. Suitable fused carbocyclic rings include fluorenyl, tetralin and the like.
"Fused carbocyclic alkyl" refers to an alkyl group substituted with a fused carbocyclic ring moiety, preferably a multicyclic fused carbocyclic ring having both aromatic and nonaromatic rings. Suitable fused carbocyclic alkyl groups include fluorenyl methyl and the like. The term "halogen" refers to fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine .
"Heterocyclic" refers to a group having 1 or more rings wherein the ring atoms are carbon atoms or heteroatoms, and includes rings that are reduced, saturated, unsaturated and aromatic and, if the group has more than one ring, includes a combination of such rings. Suitable heteroatoms include oxygen, nitrogen and S(0)ι wherein i is 0, 1 or 2. Thus, heterocyclic groups include groups having (i) heterocyclo rings (ii) unsaturated heterocyclo rings, (iii) heteroaryl rings or (iv) a combination of such rings.
"Heteroaryl" refers to aromatic groups having a mixture of carbon atoms and heteroatoms . Preferred heteroaryl groups include those having 5 to 14 ring atoms and from 1 to 9 carbon atoms and the remainder of the ring atoms heteroatoms . Heteroaryl groups include those heterocyclic systems described in "Handbook of Chemistry and Physics", 49th edition, 1968, R.C Weast, editor; The Chemical Rubber Co., Cleveland, OH. See particularly Section C, Rules for Naming Organic Compounds, B. Fundamental Heterocyclic Systems. Suitable heteroatoms include oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur. Typical heteroaryl groups include furanyl, thienyl, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, pyrimidyl , pyrazinyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl and the like.
"Heteroaralkenyl" refers to an alkenyl group substituted with a heteroaryl group. Preferably the alkenyl group has from 2 to about 6 carbon atoms . "Heteroaralkyl" refers to an alkyl group substituted with a heteroaryl group. Preferably the alkyl group has from 1 to about 6 carbon atoms .
"Heterocyclo" refers to a reduced heterocyclic ring system comprised of carbon, nitrogen, oxygen and/or sulfur atoms, and includes such heterocyclic systems described in "Handbook of Chemistry and Physics", 49th edition, 1968, R.C Weast, editor; , The Chemical Rubber Co., Cleveland, OH. See particularly Section C, Rules for Naming Organic Compounds, B. Fundamental Heterocyclic Systems.
"Unsaturated heterocyclo" refers to a heterocyclo group which is modified by having at least one double bond, but which is not aromatic. "Heterocycloalkyl" refers to an alkyl group substituted with a heterocyclo group. Preferably the alkyl group has from 1 to about 6 carbon atoms.
The term "hydrocarbyl" denotes an organic radical composed of carbon and hydrogen which may be aliphatic (including alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl groups and groups which have a mixture of saturated and unsaturated bonds) , alicyclic (such as cycloalkyl) , aromatic (such as aryl) or combinations thereof, and may refer to straight-chained, branched-chain or to cyclic structures or to radicals having a combination thereof, as well as to radicals substituted with halogen atom(s) or heteroatoms, such as nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur and their functional groups (such as amino, alkoxy, aryloxy, lactone groups, and the like) , which are commonly found in organic compounds and radicals.
The term "hydroxyalkyl" refers to an alkyl group substituted with a hydroxy group.
The term "lower" referred to herein in connection with organic radicals or compounds defines such with up to and including 6, preferably up to and including 4 and advantageously one or two carbon atoms . Such groups may be straight chain or branched chain. "Perfluoroalkyl" refers to an alkyl group which has every hydrogen replaced with fluorine.
"Perfluoroaryl" refers to an aryl group which has every hydrogen replaced with fluorine.
"Perfluoroarylalkyl" or "Perfluoroaralkyl" refers an aralkyl group in which every hydrogen on the aralkyl moiety is replaced with fluorine.
"Pharmaceutically acceptable salt" includes salts of the compounds of the present invention derived from the combination of such compounds and an organic or inorganic acid. In practice the use of the salt form amounts to use of the base form. The compounds of the present invention are useful in both free base and salt form, with both forms being considered as being within the scope of the present invention.
The term "quaternary ammonium salt" refers to compounds produced by reaction between a basic nitrogen in an R substituent and an alkylhalide, arylhalide, and aralkylhalide . Other reactants with good leaving groups may also be used, such as alkyl trifluoromethanesulfonates, alkyl methanesulfonates, and alkyl p-toluenesulfonates . A quaternary ammonium salt has a positively charged nitrogen in the R substituent. Pharmaceutically acceptable counterions include C1-, Br", I", CF3C(0)0" and CH3C(0)0". The counterion of choice can be made using ion exchange resin columns. R groups with basic nitrogens include -CH2CH2CH2NHC (=NH)NH2,
Figure imgf000041_0001
, -(CH2)PNH2, wherein p is an integer from 1 to 6. For example, the following R groups contain basic nitrogens: 3- (R) -quinuclidine, 3- (S) -quinuclidine, 3-yl- 2 -ethyl-4 (3H) -quinazolinone, ethyl morpholine, ethyl piperidine, 2- (2 -ethyl) pyridine, and 4- (methyl) -5- hydroxy-6-methyl-3- pyridine methanol.
"Trihydrocarbylsilyl" refers to the group
Si-
R wherein each R is an independently selected hydrocarbyl group .
The term "terminal carbon" refers to the carbon atom of a straight chain alkyl which is furthest from the parent structure.
In addition, the following abbreviations stand for the following:
"Bn" refers to benzyl .
"Boc" or "BOC" refers to t-butoxycarbonyl. "Boc20" refers to Boc anhydride or di-tert-butyl dicarbonate .
"BOP" refers to benzotriazol-1-yl-oxy-tris- (dimethylamino) -phosphonium hexafluorophosphate .
"BnS02" or "BzlS02" refers to benzylsulfonyl . "t-BuOK" refers to potassium tert-butoxide .
"Cbz" or "CBz" refers to benzyloxycarbonyl . "DCA" refers to dichloroacetic acid. "DCC" refers to N,N' -dicyclohexylcarbodiimide. "DCE" refers to 1, 2-dichloroethane .
"DCM" refers to dichloromethane (also called methylene chloride) .
"DHP" refers to 3 , 4-dihydro-2H-pyran. "DMF" refers to N,N-dimethylformamide . "DMSO" refers to dimethyl sulfoxide.
"DMAP" refers to 4-N,N-dimethylamino-pyridine . "DPPA" refers to diphenylphosphoryl azide. "EDAC" or "EDC" refers to l-ethyl-3- (3- dimethylamino-propyl) carbodiimide hydrochloride salt. "Et3N" refers to triethylamine. "EtOH" refers to ethanol .
"HATU" refers to 0- (7-azabenzotriazol-l-yl) - 1,1,3, 3 -tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate .
"HBTU" refers to 2- (lH-benzotriazol-1-yl) -1, 1, 3 , 3- tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate . "HCl" refers to hydrochloric acid. "HOAc" refers to acetic acid.
"HOAt" refers to l-hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole . "HOBt" refers to 1-hydroxybenzotriazole monohydrate.
"HPLC" refers to high pressure liquid chromatography.
"KOAc" refers to potassium acetate. "i-BuOCOCl" refers to isobutyl chloroformate. "LiAlH4" refers to lithium aluminum hydride.
"LiAlH2 (OEt) 2" refers to lithium diethoxy aluminum hydride . "Me" refers to methyl . "NaOH" refers to sodium hydroxide. "NBS" refers to N-bromosuccinimide. "NMM" refers to N-methylmorpholine . "Ph3P" or "PPh3" refers to triphenylphosphine. "2-PrPen" refers to 2-propylpentanoyl . "pTSA" or "pTSA catalyst" refers to para- toluenesulfonic acid catalyst.
"TBTU" refers to 2- (lH-benzotriazol-1-yl) -1, 1, 3 , 3- tetramethyluronium tetrafluoroborate . "TEA" refers to triethylamine . "TFA" refers to trifluoroacetic acid. "THF" refers to tetrahydrofuran. "TLC" refers to thin layer chromatography.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS Figure 1 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of intermediates used in the preparation of compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure "i" through "viii" are defined as follows: i) sulfur trioxide-DMF in 1,2- dichloroethane, 80°C (1 hour) ; ii) thionyl chloride, 70°C (3 hours) ; iii) Boc20, K2C03 in THF; iv) lithium bis (trimethylsilyl) amide, THF, 35°C (1 hour); v) benzyl bromoacetate; vi) 5M HCl in EtOAc; vii) compound 2, acetonitrile, Et3N; and viii) 10% Pd/C, MeOH/toluene, 45 psi H2 (24 hours) .
Figure 2 depicts reaction schemes for the synthesis of intermediates used in the preparation of compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, "i" through "viii" are- defined as follows: i) Et3N, acetonitrile; ii) 10% Pd/C, MeOH, 45 psi H2 (15 hours) ; iii) Et3N, acetonitrile; iv) 10% Pd/C, MeOH, 45 psi (15 hours) ; v) Et3N, acetonitrile; vi) 10% Pd/C, MeOH, 45 psi H2 (15 hours) ; vii) Et3N, acetonitrile; viii) 10% Pd/C, MeOH, 45 psi H2 (15 hours) .
Figure 3 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of intermediates used in the preparation of compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, "i" through "xi" are defined as follows: i) CuCN, DMF, reflux (4 hours); ii) EtOAc, 10% aqueous NaCN; iii) N-bromosuccinimide, 2, 2 ' -azo-bisisobutyronitrile, CC14, reflux (5 hours); iv) NaN3, DMF; v) triphenylphosphine, THF, water, 0°C, stirring (10 hours) ; vi) K2C03, Boc20, water, dioxane; vii) hydroxylamine HCl, NMM, MeOH; viii) 10% Pd/C, MeOH, 45 psi H2 (10 hours) ; ix) 4M HCl in dioxane; x) CsC03, iodopropane in DMF; and xi) 4M HCl, dioxane, 3 hours, room temperature . Figure 4 depicts reaction schemes for the synthesis of a compound of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, "i" through "iii" are defined as follows: i) EDC, HOBt, NMM, DMF; ii) Zn powder, HOAc; and iii) EDC, HOBt, diisopropylamine, DMF. Figure 5 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of intermediates which are used in the preparation of compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, "i" through "iv" are defined as follows: i) NaN3, DMF; ii) 10% Pd/C, EtOAc, 45 psi H2 (11 hours) ; iii) hydroxylamine HCl, NMM, MeOH; and iv) 10% Pd/C, MeOH, 45 psi H2 (48 hours) .
Figure 6 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of intermediates which are used in the preparation of compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, "i" through "vii" are defined as follows: i) Cu(I)CN, DMF; ii) NBS, benzoylperoxide, CC14, 80°C (14 hours) ; iii) NaN3, DMF, stirring (20 hours) ; iv) hydroxylamine HCl, NMM, MeOH, stirring (3 days) ; v) CsC03, iodopropane, DMF, 50°C (20 hours) ; vi) triphenylphosphine, THF, stirring (20 hours) ; and vii) 3M NaOH to pH14.
Figure 7 depicts reaction schemes for the synthesis of certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, "i" through "vii" are defined as follows: i) EDC, HOBt, NMM, DMF, stirring (8 hours) ; ii) TFA, methylene chloride, 50°C (0.5 hour); iii) BOP, NMM, DMF, stirring (13 hours) ; iv) BOP, NMM, DMF, stirring (13 hours) ; v) 10% Pd/C, 45 psi H2 (13 hours) ; vi) EDC, HOBt, NMM, DMF, stirring (10 hours); and vii) Zn powder in HOAc .
Figure 8 depicts reaction schemes for the synthesis of certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, "i" through "iv" are defined as follows: i) EDC, HOBt, DIEA, DMF, stirring (13 hours); ii) EDC, HOBt, DIEA, DMF, stirring (13 hours) ; iii) EDC, HOBt, DIEA, DMF, stirring (13 hours) ; and iv) EDC, HOBt, DIEA, DMF, stirring (13 hours) .
Figure 9 depicts reaction schemes for the synthesis of certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, "i" through "iv" are defined as follows: i) EDC, HOBt, DIEA, DMF, stirring (18 hours) ; ii) EDC, HOBt, .DIEA, DMF, stirring (18 hours) ; iii) EDC, HOBt, DIEA, DMF, stirring (18 hours) ; and iv) EDC, HOBt, DIEA, DMF, stirring (18 hours) . Figure 10 depicts reaction schemes for the synthesis of .certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, "i" through "iv" are defined as follows: i) EDC, HOBt, DIEA, DMF, stirring (13 hours) ; ii) 5M HCl in EtOAc (2 hours) ; iii) BOP, NMM, DMF, stirring (13 hours) ; and iv) 4M HCl in dioxane, 60°C (2 hours) .
Figure 1-1 depicts reaction schemes for the synthesis of certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, "i" through "x" are defined as follows: i) Boc20, Na2C03, water/dioxane, stirring (18 hours) ; ii) lithium bis (trimethylsilyl) amide, THF, 40°C (1 hour); iii) benzyl bromoacetate, stirring (10 hours) ; iv) 5M HCl in HOAc, EtOAc, 0°C (0.5 hour); v) compound 2, NMM, DMF, room temperature, 10 hours; vi) 10% Pd/C, MeOH, 45 psi H2 (3 hours) ; vii) compound 34, EDC, HOBt, NMM, MeOH, stirring (10 hours) ; viii) hydroxylamine HCl, NMM, MeOH, stirring 10 hours; ix) 10% Pd/C, MeOH, 45 psi H2 (2 days); and x) compound 47, EDC, HOBt, DMF, stirring (12 hours) . Figure 12 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, "i" through "vii" are defined as follows: i) thionyl chloride, MeOH, stirring (12 hours) ; ii) diethylamine,
DMF; iii) compound 2, NMM, DMF, stirring (10 hours); iv) aqueous LiOH, MeOH; v) compound 34, EDC, HOBt, DIEA, DMF, stirring (13 hours) ; vi) hydroxylamine HCl, NMM, MeOH, stirring (13 hours) ; and vii) 10% Pd/C, MeOH, 45 psi H2 (48 hours) .
Figure 13 depicts reaction schemes for the synthesis of certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, "i" through "vi" are defined as follows: i) acetonitrile, NMM, 0°C (1 hour) , stirring (10 hours) ; ii) 10% Pd/C, MeOH/benzene, 45 psi H2 (12 hours) ; iii) compound 60, EDC, HOBt, NMM, DMF, stirring (12 hours) ; iv) 4M HCl in dioxane, stirring (4 hours) ; v) compound 45, EDC, HOBt, NMM, DMF, stirring (13 hours) ; and vi) EDC, HOBt, NMM, DMF, stirring (13 hours) .
Figure 14 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of an intermediate which may be used to prepare a compound of the present invention having a 5- (aminomethyl) indazole at PI. In this figure, "i" through "ix" are defined as follows: i) 10% Pd/C, H2 (10 psi), ethanol, room temperature 1.5 hours; ii) 10% Pd/C, H2 (30 psi), ethanol, room temperature 8 hours; iii) KOAc, Ac20, CHC13, reflux 3 hours; iv) cool to room temperature, isoamylnitrite, 18-crown-6, reflux 28 hours; v) room temperature, Ac20, room temperature 12 hours; vi) aqueous 48% HBr, room temperature 16 hours; vii) DHP, THF, reflux 2 hours, room temperature 12 hours; viii) NaN3, DMF, 90°C 30 minutes and ix) LiAlH4, THF, 0°C one hour, NaOH. These procedures are more fully described in Examples 68 to 73.
Figure 15 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of an intermediate compound which may be used for the preparation of certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure "i" through "vii" are defined as follows: i) H2 balloon, 10% Pd/C, EtOAc, room temperature 48 hours, 51% yield; ii) Ac20/KOAc, CHC13, reflux 2 hours, flash chromatography, 92% yield; iii) isoamylnitrite, KOAc, catalytic amount 18-crown-6, Ac20, CHC13, reflux 28 hours, 95% yield; iv) aqueous 48% HBr, room temperature, 46 hours, 84% yield; v) DHP, THF, reflux 2 hours, 72% yield; vi) NaN3, DMF, 90°C 0.5 hour, 83% yield; and vii) LiAlH, THF, 0°C 1 hour. These procedures are more fully described in Examples 74 to 80.
Figure 16 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of an intermediate which may be used to prepare certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure "i" through "vii" are defined as follows: 1) CuCN, DMF, reflux 6 hours, 76% yield; ii) NH2NH2, ethanol, reflux under N2, 17 hours, 91% yield; iii) B2H6/THF, 0°C to room temperature 15 hours; iv) 6N HCl, water and methanol, room temperature 6 hours neutralize with NaOH; v) Boc20 in THF, THF/methanol , room temperature 15 hours, 60% yield; vi) 2N HCl, methanol/dioxane, room temperature 4 hours; and vii) OH" resin. These procedures are more fully described in Examples 81 to 84.
Figure 17 depicts reaction schemes for the synthesis of an intermediate which may be used in the preparation of certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, "i" through "viii" are defined as follows: i) CuCN, DMF, reflux 5 hours; ii) NBS, AIBN, CCl4, reflux 4.5 hours; iii) phthalimide, Cs2C03, DMF, room temperature 0.5 hour; iv) hydrazine, n-butanol, reflux 5 minutes; v) Boc20, DCM, room temperature 1 hour; vi) hydrazine, n-butanol, reflux 22 hours; vii) 2M HCl in dioxane, room temperature 0.5 hour; and viii) OH" resin. These procedures are more fully described in Examples 85 to 90.
Figure 18 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of an intermediate compound which may be used to prepare certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure "i" through "vi" are defined as follows: i) NaN3, DMF, room temperature, 15 hours; ii) Ph3P, THF/H20, room temperature, 15 hours; iii) Boc20 in DMF, room temperature overnight; iv) t-BuOK, DMF, room temperature 30 minutes, add 118, room temperature, 15 hours, then 70°C, 24 hours; v) 2N HCl, methanol/dioxane, room temperature 0.5 hour; and vi) OH" resin. These procedures are more fully described in Examples 91 to 93.
Figure 19 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of an intermediate which may be used in the preparation of a compound of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure "i" through "vii" are defined as follows: i) NBS, benzoyl peroxide, CC14, reflux 6 hours; ii) NaN3, DMF, room temperature 15 hours; iii) Ph3P, THF/H20, 0°C, 0°C to room temperature 15 hours, 0.25M HCl, neutralize with NaOH; iv) DCM, IM Boc20 in THF, room temperature 15 hours; v) t-BuOK, DMF, room temperature 15 hours, add 118, room temperature 15 hours, 65°C 4 hours; vi) 2M HCl, methanol/dioxane, room temperature 4 hours; and vii) OH" resin. These procedures are more fully described in Examples 94 to 99.
Figure 20 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of an intermediate which may be used in the preparation of a compound of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, "i" through "vii" are defined as follows: i) NBS, benzoyl peroxide, CC1 , reflux 6 hours; ii) NaN3, DMF, room temperature 15 hours; iii) Ph3P, THF/H20, 0°C, 0°C to room temperature 15 hours, 0.25M HCl, neutralize with 2M NaOH; iv) DCM, IM Boc20 in THF, room temperature 15 hours; v) hydrazine, n-butanol, reflux 4 hours; vi) 2M HCl methanol/dioxane, room temperature 3 hours; and vii) OH" resin. These procedures are more fully described in Examples 100 to 105.
Figure 21 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of an intermediate which may be used in the preparation of a compound of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, "i" through "vii" are defined as: i) NBS, AIBN, CC14, reflux 8 hours; ii) NaN3, DMF, room temperature 15 hours; iii) Ph3P, THF, 0°C, 0°C to room temperature 15 hours; iv) Boc20, DCM, room temperature 2 hours; v) t-BuOK, DMF, room temperature 15 hours; vi) 2N HCl, methanol/dioxane, room temperature 5 hours; and vii) OH" resin. These procedures are described more fully in Examples 106 to 111.
Figure 22 depicts a reaction scheme for the preparation of an intermediate which may be used in the preparation of a compound of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, "i" through "iii" are defined as follows: i) hydrazine, n-butanol, reflux 22 hours; ii) 2M HCl in dioxane, room temperature 3 hours; and iii) OH" resin. These procedures are more fully described in Examples 112 to 113.
Figure 23 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of an intermediate which may be used in the preparation of a compound of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, "i" through "iii" are defined as follows: i) Cu(I)CN, DMF, reflux 20 hours; ii) DMAP, Boc20, THF, room temperature 2 hours; and iii) 10% Pd/C, IM HCl (aq) /ethanol , H2 (50 psi), 16 hours. These procedures are more fully described in Examples 114 to 116. Figure 24 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of an intermediate which may be used to prepare a compound o' present invention having thrombin in. ~>ry a- ii--". In this figure, "i" through "iv" ai cined lows: i) r">Ac, Br-, NaHC03; ii) Cu(I)C< DMF, rei., «:s; i. DMAP, THF, room temperature 2 houi I iv) 10% t-d/C, 1 N HCl/EtOH, H2(45 psi), 16 hours. These procedures are more fully described in Examples 117 to 120.
Figure 25 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of an intermediate which may be used to prepare a compound of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, "i" through "iii" are defined as follows: i) NaC03, water, Br2, 65°C 1.5 hours; ii) Cu(I)CN, DMF, 185°C reflux 20 hours; and iii) 10% Pd/C, IM HCl (aq) , EtOH, THF, H2(20 psi), 16 hours. These procedures are more fully described in Examples 121 to 123. Figure 26 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of a compound of the present invention ..g thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, " through "viii" are defined as follows: i) NaH, ; , room temperature 5 hours; ii) 9-BBN, THF, 0°C one h , 5°C 16 hours; iii) warm 159 to room temperature, 3 NaOH, Pd(PPh3)4, reflux 7 hours; iv) 2M HCl/dioxane, 5°C fifteen hours, room temperature 4 hours; v) QH" resin; vi) CH3CN, α-toluene-sulfonyl chloride, 2, 4, 6-collidine, room temperature 15 minutes; vii) hydroxylamine hydrochloride, Et3N, ethanol, 80°C four hours; and viii) Zn, H0Ac/H20. These procedures are more fully described in Examples 124 to 128.
Figure 27 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of a compound of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, "i" through "x" are defined as follows: i) 9-BBN, THF, 0°C one hour, 5°C 18 hours, warm to room temperature; ii) compound 160, Pd(PPh3)4, 2M NaOH, reflux 2 hours, cool to room temperature; iii) 30% H202/H20, room temperature about one hour; iv) ZnEt2 in hexane/DCM, CHI2, compounds 167 and 168 in DCM, 0°C to room temperature 15 hours; v) saturated NH4C1, room temperature overnight; vi) Ph3P, THF, DEAD, 0°C ten minutes, room temperature; vii) 4M HCl/EtOAc, room temperature 3 hours; viii) CH3CN, 2,4,6- collidine, α-toluene sulfonyl chloride, room temperature 4 hours; ix) hydroxylamine HCl, Et3N, ethanol, 60°C overnight; and x) Zn, HOAc/H20. These procedures are described more fully in Examples 129 to 134.
Figure 28 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of a compound of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, "i" through "vi" are defined as follows: i) hydroxylamine HCl, Et3N, ethanol, room temperature 2 days; ii) methanol (anhydrous), acetyl chloride, reflux 2 hours; iii) HOAt, EDC, DMF, room temperature 15 hours; iv) pyridine, reflux 3 hours; v) LiOH-H20 methanol/water, room temperature 10 hours; and vi) HOAt, EDC, NH4C1, Et3N, DMF, room temperature 15 hours. These procedures are more fully described in Examples 135 to 139.
Figure 29 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of a compound of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, "i" through "ix" are defined as follows: i) CsOAc, DMF, room temperature 16 hours; ii) hydroxylamine HCl, Et3N, ethanol, room temperature, one week; iii) Cs2C03, DMF, room temperature 16 hours; iv) LiOH-H20, methanol, H-f* room temperature 48 hours; v) DCM, CBr4 , ' . ι. temperature, 30 minutes; vi) Et4NCN, temperature, 72 hours; vii) hr am e HCl, Et3N, ethanol, room temperature " viii) HOAt, EDC,
DMF, room temperature -urs ; and ix) Zn, HOAc/H20, 5 minutes . Tnese pr _. are more fully described in Examples 140 to 1
Figure 30 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of a compound of the present invention having a P1-P2 thiazole amide bioisostere. In this figv "i" through "viii" are defined as follows: i) Br 03 in THF; ii) LiN(TMS)2, THF, BrCH2CN, 0°C tc temperature; iii) HCl, EtOAc, 0°C to roc ^erature; iv) BnS02Cl, N-methylmorpholine, CH3CN to room temperature; v) H2S, pyridine; vi) p- _H2C (=0) CH2C1 (preparation: P. Richter and G. W _, Pharmazie 1976, 31 , 445-449), benzene, reflux; vi. NH20H-HC1, Et3N, EtOH, room temperature to reflux; and viii) H2, Pd/C, EtOH, HOAc, H20. Figure 31 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of a compound of the present invention having a P1-P2 imidazole amide bioisostere. In this figure, "i" through "x" are defined as follows: i) Boc20, K2C03 in THF; ii) LiN(TMS)2, THF, BrCH2CN, 0°C to room temperature; iii) HCl, EtOAc, 0°C to room temperature; iv) BnS02Cl, N-methylmorpholine, CH3CN, 0 °C to room temperature; v) H2S, pyridine; vi) methyl iodide, acetone; vii) NH4OAc, EtOH; viii) p-CNPhCH2C (=0) CH2C1 (preparation: P. Richter and G. Wagner, Pharmazie, 1976, 31 , 445-449), benzene, reflux; ix) NH20H-HC1, Et3N, EtOH, room temperature to reflux; and x) H2, Pd/C, EtOH, H0Ac, H20.
Figure 32 depicts a reaction scheme for the synthesis of a compound of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. In this figure, "i" through "vii" are defined as follows: i) H2S04, methanol, reflux, 20 hours; ii) DHP, pTSA catalyst, THF, reflux, 20 hours; iii) LiAlH4, THF, room temperature, 30 minutes; iv) DPPA, DBU, THF, room temperature, 18 hours; v) LiAlH4, THF, room temperature, 30 minutes; vi) EDC, HOAt, NMM, DMF, room temperature, 18 hours; and vii) 3N HCl, THF, 50°C, 18 hours .
Figures 33A to 33C depict certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. Figures 34A to 34C depict certain compounds of the present invention having thrombin inhibitory activity. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
1. Preferred Compounds
According to one aspect, the present invention is directed to compounds of the formula:
Figure imgf000056_0001
wherein
(A) X is selected from the group consisting of -S(0)2-, -N(R')-S(0)2-, -C(=0)-, -OC(=0)-, -N(R')C(=0)-, and a direct link, wherein R' is selected from hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms and aralkyl of about 6 to about 16 carbon atoms ;
(B) Rx is selected from the group consisting of:
(1) alkyl of 1 to about 12 carbon atoms which is optionally substituted with Yi and/or Y2,
(2) alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms substituted with cycloalkyl of about 3 to about 8 carbon atoms which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the ring with Yi, Y2 and/or Y3,
(3) cycloalkyl of 3 to about 15 carbon atoms, which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the ring with Yi, Y2 and/or Y3,
(4) heterocycloalkyl of 4 to about 10 ring atoms with the ring atoms selected from carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen, and S(0)i, wherein i is 0, 1 or 2, which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the ring with Yα, Y2 and/or Y3, (5) heterocyclo of 4 to about 10 ring atoms with the ring atoms selected from carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen, and S(0)ι, rc rc including — ^- f , wherein — ^ ^-^ ? is a 5 to 7 member heterocycle of 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms, where G is
-CH2-, -0-, -S(=0)-, -S(0)2- or -S-, which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the ring carbons with Yi, Y2 and/or Y3,
(6) alkenyl of about 2 to about 6 carbon atoms which is optionally substituted with cycloalkyl of about 3 to about 8 carbon atoms, which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the ring carbons with Yi, Y2 and/or Y3,
(7) aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms which is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted with
Yi, Y2, and/or Y3,
(8) heteroaryl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms with the ring atoms selected from carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur, and which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted with Yl7 Y , and/or Y3,
(9) aralkyl of about 7 to about 15 carbon atoms which is optionally substituted on the alkyl chain with hydroxy or halogen and mono-, di-, or tri- substituted in the aryl ring with Yi, Y2, and/or Y3,
(10) heteroaralkyl of 5 to 14 ring atoms with the ring atoms selected from carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur, and which is optionally substituted on the alkyl chain with hydroxy or halogen and optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted on the ring with Y , Y2, and/or Y3,
(11) aralkenyl of about 8 to about 16 carbon atoms which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the aryl ring with Yi; Y2, and/or Y3,
(12) heteroaralkenyl of 5 to 14 ring atoms with the ring atoms selected from carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur, and which is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted on the ring with Yl f Y2, and/or Y3,
Figure imgf000058_0001
Figure imgf000058_0002
Figure imgf000058_0003
Figure imgf000059_0001
(17) fused carbocyclic alkyl of about 5 to about 15 carbon atoms,
(18) difluoromethyl or perfluoroalkyl of 1 to about 12 carbon atoms,
(19) perfluoroaryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms , (20) perfluoraralkyl of about 7 to about 15 carbon atoms , and
(21) hydrogen when X is a direct link; wherein
(i) each Yl r Y2 , and Y3 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, cyano, nitro, tetrazolyl optionally substituted with alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, guanidino, amidino, methylamino, methylguanidino, -CF3, -CF2CF3, -CH(CF3)2, -C(OH) (CF3)2, -OCF3, -OCF2CF3, -OCF2H, -OC(0)NH2, -0C(0)NHZ!, -0C(0)NZιZ2, -NHC(0)Zι, -NHC(0)NH2,
-NHC(0)NHZι, -NHC(0)NZιZ2, -C(0)0H, -C(0)0Zι, -C(0)NH2, -C(0)NZιZ2, -P(0)3H2, -P(0)3(Zι)2, -S(0)3H, -S(0)pZι, -Zlf -OZi, -OH, -NH2, -NHZi, -NZαZ2, N-morpholino, and -S (0)p (CF2) qCF3, wherein p is 0, 1 or 2, q is an integer from 0 to 5 , and i and Z2 are independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl of 1 to about 12 carbon atoms, aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms, heteroaryl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms, aralkyl of about 7 to about 15 carbon atoms, and heteroaralkyl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms, or
(ii) Y and Y2 are selected together to be -0 [C (Z3 ) (Z4)]rO- or -0 [C (Z3 ) (Z4)]r+i-, wherein r is an integer from 1 to 4 and Z3 and Z4 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl or 1 to about 12 carbon atoms, aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms, heteroaryl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms, aralkyl of about 7 to about 15 carbon atoms, and heteroaralkyl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms ; (C) Lac is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000060_0001
wherein
(1) n is 0, 1, 2, or 3; and
(2) R2 and R3 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl of 3 to about 8 carbon atoms, and aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms or R2 and R3 taken together are -CH2-;
(D) J is selected from (1)
Figure imgf000061_0001
(2)
Figure imgf000061_0002
(3)
Figure imgf000061_0003
(4)
Figure imgf000061_0004
wherein qq is 0 or 1, R4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms ; cycloalkyl of 3 to about 8 carbon atoms and aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms ; R5a and R5b are independently selected from hydrogen, fluoro, chloro and alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms; R6 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms, -C(=0)R7a, or -CH20R7b; R7a is alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, amino, alkylamino of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, or dialkylamino of 2 to about 12 carbon atoms; R7 is hydrogen, acyl, or alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms; and Q7, Q8 and Q9 are independently selected from C(R5a), N, S and O, provided that (i) Q7, Q8 and Q9 are not all C(RSa) and (ii) only one of Q7, Q8 and Q9 can be 0 or S ;
(E) alternatively Lac-J is
Figure imgf000062_0001
wherein m is 1, 2 or 3 and Jx is -C (=0) -NH-CH2- ; and (F) E is selected from
(1) a group having the formula
Figure imgf000062_0002
wherein (a) Qi is C(R8), C(R9) (R9a), N, N(R8a) or a direct link;
(b) Q2 is C(R8), C(Rιo) (Rioa), N, N(R8a), S, or
0;
(c) Q3 is C(R8), C(Rιι) (Rlla) , N, or (R8a);
(d) Q4 is C(R8), C(RX2) (Ri2a) , N, N(R8a), S, or
O;
(e) Q5 is C(Rι3), C(RX3) (Risa) or N;
(f) Q6 is C(Ri4), C(R14) (Rι4a) or N;
(g) R8 is NRι5R16 or -ORα5;
(h) R8a is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms, NRι5a6a or -ORι5a;
(i) R9, Rio, Rn, Rι2, Ri3 and Ri4 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms optionally substituted with alkoxy of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms , alkoxy of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms; halogen and trifluoromethyl;
(j) R9a, Rioa, Riia Ri2a Risa and R14 are independently hydrogen or absent;
(k) R15 and Rι5a are independently hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms, or -C(=0)Rι7; (1) RX6 and Rι6a are independently hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms;
(m) alternatively, Ri5 and Ri6 or Rι5a and Rι6a taken together form a divalent radical of the formula -(CH2)W-, where w is 3, 4 or 5 ; and (n) Rα7 is alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms or alkoxy of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms; with the provisos that: (i) no more than one of Ql7 Q2, Q3 and Q4 can be C(R8) or N(R8a) ;
(ii) at least one of Ql7 Q2, Q3 and Q4, but not all, is N or N(R8a) ;
(iii) only one of Q2 and Q4 can be O or S ; and
(iv) Qi, Q2, Q3 and Q4 are not all heteroatoms ;
(2) the group consisting of
(a)
Figure imgf000064_0001
(b)
Figure imgf000064_0002
(c)
Figure imgf000065_0001
(d)
Figure imgf000065_0002
(e)
Figure imgf000065_0003
(f)
Figure imgf000065_0004
(g)
Figure imgf000066_0001
wherein R'8 and R'g are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms substituted with alkoxy of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, and trifluoromethyl; R'ι0 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkoxy of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms, trihydrocarbylsilyl of 3 to about 16 carbon atoms, alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms or -C(=0)R'ι4a; R'n is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms; R'i2 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms or -C(=0)R'ι4b; R'i3 is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms; R'ι2 and R'ι3 taken together form a divalent radical of the formula -(CH2)W- where w is 3, 4 or 5; and R'ι4a and R'ι4 are independently alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms or (CF2)jCF3 wherein j is 0, 1, 2 or 3; and
(3) a six membered heterocyclic ring having two ring nitrogen atoms and the remainder of the ring atoms carbon atoms which is substituted with R " N / °
K g on a ring carbon and is substituted with R"ιo and R"n on different ring carbons wherein
(1) R"8 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl of about 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl of 3 to about 7 carbon atoms, -(CF2)kCF3, -0Rι2, -C(=0)R"ι2, -C(=0)0R"i2 and -C(=0)NHR"ι2 wherein R"ι2 is H or alkyl of 1 to about 12 carbon atoms and k is- 0, 1, 2 or 3 ;
(2) R"9 is selected from hydrogen and alkyl of l to about 4 carbon atoms;
(3) alternatively R"8 and R"9 are taken together to give a divalent radical of the formula -(CH2)W- wherein w is 3, 4 or 5 ; and
(4) R"ιo and R"n are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms substituted with alkoxy of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to about 8 carbon atoms, halogen, trifluoromethyl, -0C(R"ι3) (R"ι4) -C(=0) -R"i5 wherein R"ι3 and R"ι4 are independently selected from hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, R"i5 is hydroxy, alkoxy of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms or -N(R"ι6) (R"ι7) wherein R"ι6 and R"ι7 are independently hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
Preferred X groups include -S(0)2-, and a direct link. Especially preferred for X is -S(0)2-. Preferred Ri groups include benzyl, substituted benzyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl and 2 , 3-dihydrobenzo furan-5 -yl. Particularly preferred R2 substituents include substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, and substituted or unsubstituted benzyl. According to an especially preferred aspect, Rx is phenyl, 2 , 3-dihydrobenzo- [b] furanyl , or benzyl .
Preferred compounds include those where Lac is
Figure imgf000068_0001
wherein n is preferably 2. Preferably R2 and R3 are hydrogen or methyl, more preferably R2 and R3 are hydrogen.
Also preferred are compounds where Lac is
Figure imgf000068_0002
wherein n is preferably 2.
Other preferred compounds include those where Lac-J is
Figure imgf000069_0001
wherein n is preferably 2 and m is preferably 1, Preferred are compounds where J is
Figure imgf000069_0002
Preferred R4 groups include hydrogen, and alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms. Especially preferred are compounds wherein R4 is hydrogen. Preferably R6 is hydrogen.
According to one aspect of the present invention, when E is
Figure imgf000069_0003
Preferred E groups include those wherein Qi is a direct link. Preferably (a) Q2 is C(R8) or C(Ri0) (Rioa) Ch is N and Q4 is N; (b) Q2 is C(R8) or C(Rι0) (Rι0a) , Ch is C(Rιι) (Rna) and Q is N; (c) Q2 is 0, Q3 is N and Q4 is C(R8); (d) Q2 is N, Q3 is N and Q4 is C(R8) or (e) Q2 is N, Q3 is C(R8) or C(Rιι) (Rna) , and Q4 is N. Especially preferred E groups include those where Q6 is C(Ri4) or C(Rι4) (Rι4a) - According to one aspect of the present invention, preferred compounds include the following E groups :
Figure imgf000070_0001
Especially preferred E groups include
Figure imgf000070_0002
Figure imgf000071_0001
Preferred compounds according to one aspect of the present invention include those wherein Rα is benzyl, substituted benzyl, phenyl, and substituted phenyl. Especially preferred substituted phenyl groups include 2, 3-dihydrobenzofuran-5-yl . Preferably, X is -S(0)2- or a direct link, more preferably -S(0)2-. According to this aspect, preferred E groups include:
Figure imgf000071_0002
Figure imgf000072_0001
Especially preferred E groups include
Figure imgf000072_0002
Preferred compounds according to this aspect include those where Lac is
Figure imgf000072_0003
and n is 2.
According to an alternate aspect, preferred compounds of the present invention include those where Lac is
Figure imgf000073_0001
and n is 2. According to this aspect, E is preferably selected from
Figure imgf000073_0002
Especially preferred compounds according to this aspect include those wherein R2 is hydrogen, R3 is hydrogen, and J is
Figure imgf000074_0001
more preferably R4 and R6 are hydrogen. Especially preferred E groups according to this aspect include
Figure imgf000074_0002
According to an alternate aspect of the present invention, preferred E groups include:
Figure imgf000074_0003
Figure imgf000075_0001
According to this alternate preferred aspect, examples of especially preferred E groups include:
Figure imgf000075_0002
Figure imgf000075_0003
Figure imgf000075_0004
Figure imgf000076_0001
According to an aspect of the present invention, preferred compounds include those where R1 is benzyl, substituted benzyl, phenyl or substituted phenyl. A particularly preferred Rx is 2 , 3-dihydrobenzo- [b] furanyl According to this aspect, X is preferably -S(0)2- or a direct link. Preferably Lac is
Figure imgf000076_0002
where n is 2. Preferred E groups according to this aspect include
Figure imgf000077_0001
Figure imgf000077_0002
Figure imgf000077_0003
Figure imgf000077_0004
30 Preferred J groups according to this aspect include
Figure imgf000078_0001
Especially preferred E groups according to this aspect include :
Figure imgf000078_0002
Preferred compounds according to this alternate aspect of the present invention include the following:
Figure imgf000078_0003
Figure imgf000078_0004
Figure imgf000078_0005
Figure imgf000079_0001
Figure imgf000079_0002
Figure imgf000079_0003
20
Figure imgf000079_0004
Figure imgf000079_0005
Figure imgf000080_0001
Figure imgf000080_0002
Figure imgf000080_0003
Figure imgf000080_0004
Figure imgf000080_0005
Figure imgf000081_0001
An especially preferred compound is
Figure imgf000081_0002
According to another aspect of the present invention, E is a six-membered heterocyclic ring having two ring nitrogen atoms and the remainder of the ring atoms carbon atoms which is substituted with -NR"8R"9 on a carbon atom and is substituted with R"ιo and R"n on different ring carbons. Such suitable E groups include:
Figure imgf000081_0003
R"
Figure imgf000082_0001
Preferred E groups include
Figure imgf000082_0002
Figure imgf000082_0003
Especially preferred E groups include:
Figure imgf000082_0004
Preferred compounds according to one aspect of the present invention include those wherein Ri is benzyl, substituted benzyl, phenyl, and substituted phenyl. Especially preferred substituted phenyl groups include 2 , 3-dihydrobenzofuran-5-yl . Preferably, X is -S(0)2- or a direct link, more preferably -S(0)2-. According to this aspect, preferred E groups include:
Figure imgf000083_0001
R"
Figure imgf000083_0002
Especially preferred E groups include
Figure imgf000083_0003
Preferred compounds according to this aspect include those where Lac is
Figure imgf000084_0001
and n is 2.
Especially preferred compounds according to this aspect include those wherein R2 is hydrogen, R3 is hydrogen, and J is
Figure imgf000084_0002
more preferably R and R6 are hydrogen, Esτ-< y preferred E groups according to this r iude
Figure imgf000084_0003
According to an aspect of the present invention, preferred compounds include those where Ri is benzyl, substituted benzyl, phenyl or substituted phenyl. A particularly preferred 2 is 2 , 3-dihydrobenzo- [b] furanyl According to this aspect, X is preferably -S(0)2- or a direct link. Preferably Lac is
Figure imgf000085_0001
where n is 2. Preferred E groups according to this aspect include
Figure imgf000085_0002
Figure imgf000085_0003
Preferred J groups according to this aspect include
Figure imgf000086_0001
Preferably R4 is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms. R6 is preferably hydrogen. Especially preferred E groups according to this aspect include:
Figure imgf000086_0002
Preferred compounds of the present invention include those depicted in Figures 33A to 33C and 34A to 34C.
The compounds of present invention may have chiral centers and occur as racemates, racemic mixtues and as individual diastereomers or enantiomers with all isomeric forms being included in the present invention. The compounds of the present invention may also have polymorphic crystalline forms, with all polymorphic crystalline forms being included in the present invention.
For any give variable having a value of 0, the bond attached to the variable is not present, for example, with the group --(Rδ)n/ if n is 0, then the single bond that would attach to R6 is also not present.
Description of compounds of the present invention are limited by principles of chemical bonding known to those skilled in the art.
Combinations of substituents and/or variables are permissible only if such combinations result in stable compounds .
2. Preparation of Preferred Compounds
Preferred means of chemically coupling (as for example, amide bond function) include formation of a peptide bond by using conventional coupling reagents known in the art. See Bodanszky, N. , Peptide Chemistry, pp. 55-73, Springer-Verlag, New York (1988) and references cited therein. The chemical coupling may be either by means of one-step or two-step coupling. In one-step coupling, the two coupling partners are coupled directly. Preferred coupling reagents for one-step coupling of the include DCC with HOBt, EDC with HOBt, HBTU or TBTU. In two-step coupling, an activated ester or anhydride of the C-terminal carboxy group of one coupling partner is formed prior to its coupling to the other coupling partner.
For preparation of certain compounds having hydrogenation sensitive substituent groups, it is preferred to avoid the use of hydrogen gas with palladium on carbon for hydrogenation steps. Another preferred method for preparing compounds of the present invention containing hydrogenation sensitive groups such as alkenyl or aryl moieties substituted with halogen, cyano, nitro, or
-S-Zi, is to use boron tris (trifluoroacetate) , B(OCOCF3)3, to cleave protecting groups such as the N9- nitro of an arginine side chain. The reagent is prepared by the reaction of BBr3 and CF3COOH in dichloromethane at 0°C. The reagent is also commercially available. Generally, the N9-nitro compound is treated with boron tris (trifluoroacetate) in trifluoroacetic acid at 0°C. See, e . g. , Fieser, M. and Fieser, L. F. , Reagents for Organic Synthesis, p. 46, John Wiley & Sons, New York (1974); Pless, J. , and Bauer, W. Ange . Chem. , Internat . Ed. , 12, 147 (1973) .
In addition, another preferred reagent for selective nitro group cleavage is titanium trichloride. This reagent is commercially available. The Ng nitro compound is treated with titanium trichloride in aqueous methanol containing an ammonium acetate buffer followed by exposure of the reaction mixture to air or dimethyl sulfoxide. Freidinger, R.M. , Hirschmann, R. , and Veber, D.F., J . Org . Chem. , 43, 4800 (1978).
3. Selection of Preferred Compounds
The compounds of the present invention are screened for their ability to inhibit some or all of thrombin, factor Xa, plasmin, recombinant tissue plasminogen activator (rt-PA) , activated protein C (aPC) , chymotrypsin, and trypsin as set forth below. Certain of the preferred compounds are distinguished by their ability to inhibit thrombin, while not substantially inhibiting some or all of plasmin, tissue plasminogen activator (t-PA) , activated protein C (aPC) , chymotrypsin, and trypsin. With respect to thrombin and the other enzymes and as used herein, the term "not substantially inhibiting" means that the IC50 (or Ki) for plasmin, t-PA, aPC, chymotrypsin, and trypsin for a given compound is greater than or equal to its IC50 (or Ki, respectively) for thrombin. Preferably the ratio of IC50's for plasmin, and the other enzymes, to IC50 for thrombin will be at least about 25 or greater, more preferably about 100 or greater. It is believed that the ability to selectively inhibit thrombin will result in therapeutic benefits to patients.
With respect to compounds within the present invention that inhibit members within the trypsin/chymotrypsiri family, including trypsin, chymotrypsin, elastase, and serine proteases involved in the coagulation cascade, "not specifically inhibiting" means the IC50 or Ki for the target enzyme is less than or equal to the IC50 or Ki for non-target enzymes contacted with the inhibitor.
For screening compounds using these assays, the compounds of the present invention are dissolved in buffer to give solutions containing concentrations such that assay concentrations range from 0 to 100 micromolar. In the assays for thrombin, plasmin, t-PA, aPC, chymotrypsin, and trypsin, a chromogenic synthetic substrate is added to a solution containing test compound and the enzyme of interest and the residual catalytic activity of that enzyme is determined spectrophometrically . The IC50 of a compound of the present invention is determined from the rate of substrate turnover caused by the specific enzyme being measured. IC50 is the concentration of test compound which gives 50% inhibition of the rate of substrate turnover. Likewise, the Ki of a compound of the present invention is determined from the rate of substrate turnover caused by the specific enzyme being measured at various enzyme concentrations. Example A provides exemplars of in vi tro assays used to select the compounds of the present invention.
Certain of the preferred compounds of the present invention have a Ki of about 0.001 to about 200 nM in the thrombin assay. Especially preferred compounds have a Ki of about 0.001 to about 50 nM. The more especially preferred compounds have a Ki of about 0.001 to about 10 nM.
Certain of the preferred compounds of the present invention have a IC50 for plasmin, t-PA, aPC, chymotrypsin, and trypsin which is at least 10 times greater than its IC50 for thrombin. Especially preferred compounds have an IC50 for plasmin, t-PA, aPC, chymotrypsin, and trypsin which is about 20 to about 100,000 times greater than its IC50 for thrombin. More especially preferred compounds have an IC50 for plasmin, t-PA, aPC, chymotrypsin, and trypsin which is about 100 to about 1,000,000 times greater than its IC50 for thrombin. In the event that a compound of the present invention has an IC50 with respect to plasmin, t-PA, aPC, chymotrypsin, or trypsin which is greater than the highest concentration of compound tested, the highest concentration of compound tested is considered to be the reported IC50.
The compounds of the present invention are dissolved in buffer to give solutions containing concentrations such that assay concentrations range from 0 to 100 micromolar. In the assays for factor Xa, thrombin, plasmin, t-PA, aPC, chymotrypsin, and trypsin, a chromogenic synthetic substrate is added to a solution containing test compound and the enzyme of interest, and the residual catalytic activity of that enzyme is determined spectrophotometrically. The IC50 of a compound of the present invention is determined from the rate of substrate turnover caused by the specific enzyme being measured. IC0 is that concentration of test compound giving 50% inhibition of the rate of substrate turnover. Likewise, the Ki of a compound of the present invention is determined from the rate of substrate turnover caused by the specific enzyme being measured at various enzyme concentrations. Example A provides an example of the in vi tro assays used to select the preferred compounds of the present invention. Example A provides a method for identifying and selecting compounds of the present invention that inhibit thrombin, plasmin, t-PA, aPC, chymotrypsin and trypsin to a greater extent than they inhibit factor Xa and, thus, have utility as inhibitors of those proteases .
4. Pharmaceutical Compositions
In another aspect, the present invention encompasses pharmaceutical compositions prepared for storage or administration which comprise a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier . The therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention will depend on the route of administration, the type of mammal being treated, and the physical characteristics of the specific mammal under consideration. These factors and their relationship to determining this amount are well known to skilled practitioners in the medical arts. This amount and the method of administration can be 'tailored to achieve optimal efficacy but will depend on such factors as weight, diet, concurrent medication and other factors which those skilled in the medical arts will recognize.
The therapeutically effective amount of the compound of the present invention can range broadly depending upon the desired affects and the therapeutic indication. Typically, dosages will be between about
0.01 mg/kg and 100 mg/kg body weight, preferably between about 0.01 and 10 mg/kg, body weight. Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers for therapeutic use are well known in the pharmaceutical art, and are described, for example, in Remingto ' s Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Co. (A.R. Gennaro edit. 1985) . For example, sterile saline and phosphate-buffered saline at physiological pH may be used. Preservatives, stabilizers, dyes and even flavoring agents may be provided in the pharmaceutical composition. For example, sodium benzoate, sorbic acid and esters of p-hydroxybenzoic acid may be added as preservatives. Id. at 1449. In addition, antioxidants and suspending agents may be used. Id.
The pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may be formulated and used as tablets, capsules or elixirs for oral administration; suppositories for rectal administration; sterile solutions and suspensions for injectable administration; and the like. The dose and method of administration can be tailored to achieve optimal efficacy but will depend on such factors as weight, diet, concurrent medication and other factors which those skilled in the medical arts will recognize.
When administration is to be parenteral, such as intravenous on a daily basis, injectable pharmaceutical compositions can be prepared in conventional forms, either as liquid solutions or suspensions, solid forms suitable for solution' or suspension in liquid prior to injection, or as emulsions. Suitable excipients are, for example, water, saline, dextrose, mannitol, lactose, lecithin, albumin, sodium glutamate, cysteine hydrochloride, or the like. In addition, if desired, the injectable pharmaceutical compositions may contain minor amounts of nontoxic auxiliary substances, such as wetting agents, pH buffering agents, and the like. If desired, absorption enhancing preparations (e.g., liposomes) may be utilized.
5. Utility and Methods
Compounds of the present invention when made and selected as disclosed are useful as potent inhibitors of thrombin in vi tro and in vivo . As such, these compounds are useful as in vi tro diagnostic reagents to prevent the clotting of blood and as in vivo pharmaceutical agents to prevent, inhibit and/or attenuate thrombosis in mammals suspected of having a condition characterized by abnormal thrombosis.
The compounds of the present invention are useful as in vitro diagnostic reagents for inhibiting clotting in blood drawing tubes. The use of stoppered test tubes having a vacuum therein as a means to draw blood obtained by venipuncture into the tube is well known in the medical arts. Kasten, B.L., "Specimen Collection", Laboratory Test Handbook, 2nd Edition, Lexi-Comp Inc., Cleveland pp. 16-17 (Edits. Jacobs, D.S. et al . 1990). Such vacuum tubes may be free of clot-inhibiting additives, in which case, they are useful for the isolation of mammalian serum from the blood. They may alternatively contain clot-inhibiting additives (such as heparin salts, EDTA salts, citrate salts or oxalate salts) , in which case, they are useful for the isolation of mammalian plasma from the blood. The compounds of the present invention are potent inhibitors of thrombin, and as such, can be incorporated into blood collection tubes to prevent clotting of the mammalian blood drawn into them.
The compounds of the present invention are used alone, in combination with other compounds of the present invention, or in combination with other known inhibitors of clotting, in the blood collection tubes. The amount to be added to such tubes is that amount sufficient to inhibit the formation of a clot when mammalian blood is drawn into the tube. The addition of the compounds to such tubes may be accomplished by methods well known in the art, such as by introduction of a liquid composition thereof, as a solid composition thereof, or liquid composition which is lyophilized to a solid. The compounds of the present invention are added to blood collection tubes in such amounts that, when combined with 2 to 10 mL of mammalian blood, the concentration of such compounds will be sufficient to inhibit clot formation. Typically, ' the required concentration will be about 1 to 10,000 nM, with 10 to 1000 nM being preferred.
The compounds of the present invention are useful as a pharmaceutical agent for preventing, inhibiting and/or attenuating thrombosis in a mammal suspected of having a condition characterized by abnormal thrombosis. Conditions characterized by abnormal thrombosis are well known in the medical arts and include those involving the arterial and venous vasculature of mammals. With respect to the coronary arterial vasculature, abnormal thrombosis (thrombus formation) characterizes the rupture of an established atherosclerotic plaque which is the major cause of acute myocardial infarction and unstable angina, as well as also characterizing the occlusive coronary thrombus formation resulting from either thrombolytic therapy or percutaneous transluminal coronary angioplasty (PTCA) . With respect to the venous vasculature, abnormal thrombosis characterizes the condition observed in patients undergoing major surgery in the lower extremities or the abdominal area who often suffer from thrombus formation in the venous vasculature resulting in reduced blood flow to the affected extremity and a predisposition to pulmonary embolism. Abnormal thrombosis further characterizes disseminated intravascular coagulopathy which commonly occurs within both vascular systems during septic shock, certain viral infections and cancer, a condition wherein there is rapid consumption of coagulation factors and systemic coagulation which results in the formation of life- threatening thrombi occurring throughout the microvasculature leading to widespread organ failure. The present invention includes methods for preventing a condition in a mammal suspected of having a condition characterized by abnormal thrombosis, comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a compound or a pharmaceutical composition of the present invention.
The compounds or pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention are administered in vivo, ordinarily in a mammal, preferably in a human. In employing them in vivo, the compounds or pharmaceutical compositions can be administered to a mammal in a variety of ways, including orally, parenterally, intravenously, subcutaneously, intramuscularly, colonically, rectally, nasally or intraperitoneally, employing a variety of dosage forms. Administration is preferably parenteral, such as intravenous on a daily basis. Alternatively, administration is preferably oral, such as by tablets capsules or elixirs taken on a daily basis.
In practicing the methods of the present invention, the compounds or pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention are administered alone or in combination with one another, or in combination with other therapeutic or in vivo diagnostic agents.
As is apparent to one skilled in the medical art, a "therapeutically effective amount" of the compounds or pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention will vary depending upon the age, weight and mammalian species treated, the particular compounds employed, the particular mode of administration and the desired affects and the therapeutic indication. Because these factors and their relationship to determining this amount are well known in the medical arts, the determination of therapeutically effective dosage levels, the amount necessary to achieve the desired result of preventing thrombosis, will be within the ambit of one skilled in these arts. Typically, administration of the compounds or pharmaceutical composition of the present invention is commenced at lower dosage levels, with dosage levels being increased until the desired effect of preventing in vivo thrombosis is achieved which would define a therapeutically effective amount. For the compounds of the present invention, alone or as part of a pharmaceutical composition, such doses are between about 0.01 mg/kg and 100 mg/kg body weight, preferably between about 0.01 and 10 mg/kg, body weight.
Certain compounds of the present invention have utility as inhibitors of proteases within the trypsin/chymotrypsin class of enzymes. Members of that class include, but are not limited to, elastase, chymotrypsin, and the serine proteases trypsin, thrombin, factor Xa, and factor Vila. With respect to the inhibitors within the present invention directed at serine proteases acting within the coagulation cascade, e . g. inhibitors of thrombin, factor Xa and factor Vila, such have in vitro and in vivo utilities as provided hereinabove for thrombin inhibitors.
Elastase has been implicated in a variety of conditions, including pulmonary hypertension
(Rabinovitch, M. , Acta Paediatr. Jpn 37:657-666 (1995)), idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis, rheumatoid arthritis, adult respiratory distress syndrome, cystic fibrosis, and other inflammatory diseases and conditions (Doring, G., Am . J. Respir . Cri t . Care Med . 15_0 : S114-S117 (1994)). Inhibition of elastase was shown to prevent or retard progression of pulmonary hypertension (Rabinovitch) . Thus, inhibitors of the present invention directed toward elastase are useful as pharmaceutical compositions for the inhibition of elastase in conditions where elastase activity is associated with a pathological condition.
Elevated levels of chymotrypsin and trypsin are associated with the pathological effects resulting from pancreatitis (see US 5,534,498). Animal studies of chemically-induced pancreatitis suggest that the disorder is rooted in the inability of pancreatic acinar cells to excrete digestive proenzymes, resulting in activation of trypsinogen to trypsin by lysosomal hydrolases within the cell. The amount of trypsin produced exceeds protective levels of protease inhibitor normally available.
The elevated levels of trypsin then cause activation of the other digestive enzymes co-localized with trypsin in the lysosome, such as chymotrypsin. The net effect of the enzyme activation is pancreatitis, which is characterized by damage to the pancreas and surrounding tissues from autodigestion of the cells by the various digestive enzymes. These activated digestive enzymes also cause edema, interstitial hemorrhage, vascular damage, coagulation necrosis, fat necrosis and parenchymal cell necrosis.
Inhibitors of the present invention directed toward either trypsin or chymotrypsin, or other members of the trypsin/chymotrypsin family that contribute to the deleterious effects of pancreatitis, are useful for the prevention and treatment of pancreatitis in mammals.
In addition to the in vivo utilities, inhibitors of the present invention also find utility in vitro . Inhibitors of enzymes within the coagulation cascade are useful inhibitors of blood coagulation in vi tro, as described hereinabove. Inhibitors of other enzymes within the trypsin/chymotrypsin family, including trypsin, chymotrypsin, and elastase, are useful reagents in in vi tro assays designed to measure the activity of such enzymes . For instance, to determine or confirm the presence of active trypsin, chymotrypsin, or elastase in a sample, the activity of the enzyme in the sample is determined in the presence and absence of the specific inhibitor (which may be labeled using a radioactive or other detectable label) . Lower activity measured in the presence of inhibitor as compared to in the absence of inhibitor demonstrates inhibition of the enzyme and, thus, its presence in the sample.
Similarly, the level of activity of an enzyme present in a sample is determined by adding inhibitor to the sample in a range of titrating doses, and calculating activity of the enzyme at each escalating dose of inhibitor. The concentration of inhibitor that completely inhibits the enzyme in the assay, along with knowledge of the assay parameters and characteristic of enzyme inhibition, allows one to calculate the activity of the enzyme in the sample.
The level of chymotrypsin measured in stool samples in vi tro is used as an indicator of pancreatitis
(Riedel, L. et al . , Gut 32:321-324 (1991); Chari, S., Trop . Gastroenterol . , 11:144-147 (1990)). Chymotrypsin inhibitors of the present invention are useful in such assays to evaluate the level of active chymotrypsin in such a sample, according to protocols such as those outlined hereinabove.
An additional use of the inhibitors of the present invention is their use to quench enzymatic reactions effected by the target enzyme. Thus, to control or prevent digestion of a sample with trypsin or chymotrypsin, an inhibitor of trypsin or chymotrypsin, respectively, is added in inhibit the target enzyme and, thus, control or prevent digestion by that enzyme.
Certain compounds of the present invention can also be useful inhibitors of elastase, and are. therefore useful pharmaceutical agents for the control of inflammation.
To assist in understanding, the present invention will now be further illustrated by the following examples. These examples as they relate to this invention should not, of course, be construed as specifically limiting the invention and such variations of the invention, now known or later developed, which would be within the purview of one skilled in the art are considered to fall within the scope of the invention as described herein and hereinafter claimed.
To assist in understanding, the present invention now will be further illustrated by the following examples. These examples, as they relate to the present invention, should not, of course, be construed as specifically limiting the invention; such variations of the invention, now known or later developed, which would be within the purview of one skilled in the art, are considered to fall within the scope of the invention as described and claimed herein.
EXAMPLES
Example 1
Preparation of 7-chlorosulfonyl-2 , 3-dihydrobenzo [Jb] furan (2)
Figure imgf000102_0001
2, 3-Dihydrobenzo [Jb] furan (1) (Aldrich, 5.6 mL, 50 mmol) was added to a suspension of sulfur trioxide- dimethylformamide complex (Aldrich, 9.2 g, 60 mmol) in 1, 2 -dichloroethane (Aldrich, 20 mL) . After being heated at 80°C for 1 hour, the reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature, and thionyl chloride (Aldrich, 4.5 mL, 57 mmol) was introduced. The reaction mixture was then heated at 70°C for 3 hours. After cooling down to room temperature, the reaction mixture was poured into ice water (100 mL) which was extracted with ether (3 x 30 mL) . Combined organic layers were washed with brine, then dried (MgS04) . Removal of solvent under vacuum ■ yielded a light yellow solid (10.2 g, 94%). TLC Rf 0.45 (9:1 of hexane-ethyl acetate); MS (electrospray) 219 (M + 1); XH NMR (CDC13) 53.35 (t, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz), 4.78 (t, 2H, J= 7.2 Hz), 6.92 (d, IH, J = 3.1 Hz) , 7.82 (s, IH) , 7.83 (d, IH, J = 3.1 Hz). For similar compounds see: Miller, W. D.; Tao, E. V. P. United States Patent No. 5,387,681 (1995) .
Example 2
Preparation of 3- (S) - ert-butoxycarbonylamino-4 , 5, 6, 7- tetrahydroazepin-2-one (4)
Figure imgf000103_0001
Di- ert-butyl dicarbonate (Fluka, 25.5 g, 0.11 mol) was added to a stirred, ice cooled solution of L-α- Amino-ε-caprolactam (compound 3) (Fluka, 15 g, 0.11 mol) and Potassium carbonate (Fluka, 26.7 g, 0.11 mol) in THF. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to ambient temperature and then stirred for eighteen hours. The reaction mixture was filtered and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure to give 26.4 g (99%) of the title compound (4) as a white solid. TLC Rf 0.91 (9:1 of hexane-ethyl acetate); MS (electrospray) 229 (M + 1); 1H R (CDC13) δ 1.39 (m, 2H) , 1.50 (s, 9H) , 1.82 (m, 2H) , 2.03 (m, 2H) , 3.25 (m, 2H) , 4.29 (m, IH) , 5.91 (s, IH) , 6.36 (s, IH) .
Example 3
Preparation of 3- (S) - ert-butoxycarbonylamino-1- benzylmethylenecarboxy-4 ,5,6, 7-tetrahydro-azepin-2-one (5)
Figure imgf000104_0001
To a solution of Boc-L-α-amino-ε-caprolactam (compound 4, 15 g, 0.06 mol) in THF at 0°C was added 1.0M Lithium bis (trimethylsilyl) amide (Aldrich, 121 mL , 0.12 mol) over a period of 20 minutes. The reaction mixture was warmed to 35°C for one hour, then cooled to 0°C. Benzyl bromoacetate (20 mL, 0.12 mol) was added and the reaction mixture was allowed to slowly warm to room temperature where it was stirred for fifteen hours. Solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The precipitate was taken up with ethyl acetate, and the organic layer was washed two times each with an aqueous solution of NH4C1 and NaHC03. The organic layer was dried over MgS04. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to give an oil. Purification by flash chromatography eluting with a 30:70 gradient of ethyl acetate/hexane gave the title product (24g, 97%) as a colorless oil. TLC Rf 0.33 (7:3 of hexane-ethyl acetate) ; MS (electrospray) 377 (M + 1) ; XHNMR (CDC13) δ 1.41 (s, 9H) , 1.59 (m, 3H) , 1.76 (m, 2H) , 1.94 (m, IH) , 3.18 (m, IH) , 3.64 (m, IH) , 4.20 (s, 2H) , 4.41 (m, IH) , 5.18 (s, 2H) , 5.92 (br S, IH) , 7.35 (m, 5H) .
Example 4
Preparation of 3- (S) -amino-1-benzylmethylenecarboxy- 4,5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (6)
Figure imgf000105_0001
The compound of Example 3, 1- (carbobenzoxy) methyl- 3-L- (tert-Butoxycarbonyl) aminoazepin-2 -one (compound 5, 22 g, 0.07 mol), was dissolved in 210 mL of 5M HCl in EtOAc and stirred for one hour at ambient temperature. The solution was concentrated under vacuum to afford the title compound as a colorless oil (21.5 g, 99%) which was used as such without further purification. TLC Rf 0.15 (9:1 of CH2Cl2/methanol) ; MS (electrospray) 277 (M + 1) ; 1HNMR (CDCl3) δ 1.72 (m, 4H) , 1.98 (m, 2H) , 3.37 (m, IH) , 3.45 (m, IH) , 4.30 (s-, 2H) , 4.35 (m, IH) , 5.18 (s, 2H) , 7.35 (m, 5H) .
Example 5 Preparation of 3- (S) - (2 , 3-dihydrobenzo [Jb] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) amino- 1-benzylmethylenecarboxy- ,5,6,7- tetrahydroazepin-2-one (7)
Figure imgf000106_0001
To a chilled solution of 1- (carbobenzoxy) methyl-3- L-aminoazepin-2-one (compound 6, 4.17 g, 0.015 mol) in acetonitrile (Aldrich, 90 mL) was added 7- chlorosulfonyl-2 , 3-dihydrobenzo [Jb] furan (compound 2, 4.1 g, 0.019 mol) in one portion. Trietylamine (Aldrich, 25 mL, 0.18 mol) was then added dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0°C for half an hour, followed by twelve hours at ambient temperature. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the remaining residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate (150 mL) and washed two times each with 100 mL portions of IM potassium bisulfate, saturated sodium bicarbonate and saturated sodium chloride solutions. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography eluting with a 50:50 gradient of ethyl acetate/hexane. The pure product was obtained as an amorphous solid (4.8 g, 83%). TLC Rf 0.33 (1:1 of hexane/ethyl acetate); MS (electrospray) 459 (M '+ 1); 1HNMR (CDC13) δ 1.62 (m, 4H) , 1.98 (m, 2H) , 2.12 (m, IH) , 3.11 (m, IH) , 3.21 (t, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz), 3.25 (m, IH) , 3.99 (m, IH) , 4.12 ( , IH) , 4.61 (t, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz), 5:i5 (s, 2H) , 6.15 (d, IH, J 3.5 Hz), 6.80 (d, IH, J = 7.8 Hz), 7.36 (m, 5H) , 7.61 (d, IH, J = 7.8 Hz), 7.63 (s, IH) .
Example 6
Preparation of 3- (S) - (2 , 3-dihydrobenzo [b] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) amino-l-carbohydroxymethyl-4 ,5,6,7- tetrahydroazepin-2-one (8)
Figure imgf000107_0001
10% Pd-on-C (Aldrich, 45 mg) was added to a solution of 3- (S) - (2, 3-Dihydrobenzo [Jb] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) amino-l-benzylmethylenecarboxy-4 ,5,6,7- tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 7, 4.8 g, 10.5 mmol) in methanol and toluene (3:1, 100 mL) and the resulting mixture was hydrogenated (45 psi of H2) on a Parr apparatus for 24 hours. The catalyst was filtered and the solvent was removed under vacuum to give a white solid (3.34 g, 87%). XHNMR (CD30D) δ 1.60 (m, 4H) , 1.91 (m, 2H) , 3.21 (t, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz), 3.28 (m, IH) , 3.49 (dd, IH, J = 15.7, 7.5 Hz), 3.95 (d, IH, J = 14.8 Hz), 4.03 (d, IH, J = 14.8 Hz), 4.05, (m, IH) , 4.60 (t, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz), 6.78 (d, IH, J = 7.8 Hz), 7.58 (d, IH, J = 7.8 Hz) , 7.62 (s, IH) . Example 7 Preparation of 3- (S) - (2-Naphthalenesulfonyl) amino-1- benzylmethylenecarboxy-4 ,5,6, 7-tetra-hydroazepin-2-one (10)
Figure imgf000108_0001
Triethylamine (Aldrich, 12.5 L, 90 mmol) was added to a solution of 3- (S) -Amino-1-benzylmethylenecarboxy- 4, 5, 6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 6, 5.0 g, 18 mmol) and 2-naphthalenesulfonyl chloride (9) (Aldrich, 5.2 g, 23 mmol) in acetonitrile (100 mL) at 0°C. After 30 minutes, the reaction mixture was warmed to ambient temperature and stirred at ambient temperature overnight (12 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the remaining residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate (150 mL) and washed two times each with 100 mL portions of IM potassium bisulfate, saturated sodium bicarbonate and saturated sodium chloride solutions. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography eluting with a 50:50 gradient of ethylacetate/hexane . The pure product was obtained as a foam crystal (4.61 g, 55%). TLC Rf 0.23 (1:1 of hexane/ethyl acetate); MS (electrospray) 467 (M + 1); XHNMR (CDC13) δ 1.62 (m, 4H) , 1.93 (m, IH) , 2.16 (m, IH) , 3.08 (m, IH) , 3.42 (dd, IH, J = 8.2, 3.3 Hz), 3.95 (d, IH, J = 8.2 Hz), 4.07 (s, 2H) , 4.13 (m, IH) , 5.05 (m, 2H) , 6.35 (m, IH) , 7.35 (m, 3H) , 7.60 (rri, 2H) , 7.81 (d, IH, J = 7.2 Hz), 7.88 (m, 3H) , 8.41 (s, IH) .
Example 8
Preparation of 3- (S) - (2-Naphthalenesulfonyl) amino- 1- carbohydroxymethyl-4 ,5,6, 7-tetrahydro-azepin-2 -one (11)
Figure imgf000109_0001
10% Pd-on-C (Aldrich, 40 mg) was added to a solution of 3- (S) - (2-naphthalenesulfonyl) amino-1- benzylmethylenecarboxy-4 ,5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 10, 4.0 g, 10.5 mmol) in methanol (100 mL) and the resulting mixture was hydrogenated (45 psi of H ) on a Parr apparatus for 15 hours. The catalyst was removed by filtering and the solvent was removed under vacuum to give a white solid (3.2 g, 99%). MS (electrospray) 377 (M + 1); αHNMR (CD30D) δ 1.61 (m, 4H) , 1.85 (m, 2H) , 3.11 (m, IH) , 3.52 (m, IH) , 3.95 (s, 2H) , 4.18 (d, IH, J = 7.5 Hz), 7.6 (m, 2H) , 7.80 (d, IH, J = 7.8 Hz), 7.95 (m, 3H) , 8.40 (s, IH) .
Example 9 Preparation of 3- (S) -Benzenesulfonylamino-1- benzylmethylenecarboxy-4, 5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (13)
Figure imgf000110_0001
Triethylamine (Aldrich, 12.5 mL, 90 mmol) was added to a solution of 3- (S) -Amino- 1-benzylmethylenecarboxy- 4, 5, 6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 6, 5.0 g, 18 mmol) and benzenesulfonyl chloride (12) (Aldrich, 4.1 g, 23 mmol) in acetonitrile (100 mL) at 0°C . After 30 minutes, the reaction mixture was warmed to ambient temperature and stirred at ambient temperature overnight (12 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the remaining residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate (150 mL) and washed with 100 mL portions of IM potassium bisulfate, saturated sodium bicarbonate and saturated sodium chloride aqueous solutions. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography, eluting with a 50:50 gradient of ethyl acetate/hexane . The pure product was obtained as a foam crystal (4.1 g, 54%). TLC Rf 0.25 (1:1 of hexane/ethyl acetate) ; MS (electrospray) 417 (M + 1) ; HNMR (CDC13) δ 1.59-1.67 (m, 4H) , 1.93 (m, IH) , 2.14 (m, IH) , 3.10 (m, IH) , 3.45 (dd, IH, J = 8.2, 3.5 Hz), 4.06 (m, IH) , 4.07 (s, 2H) , 4.12 (s, 2H) , 5.10 (d, 2H, J = 1.2 Hz), 6.19 (m, IH) , 7.25 - 7.39 (m, 8H) , 7.82 (m, 3H) .
Example 10
Preparation of 3- (S) -Benzenesulfonylamino-1- carbohydroxymethyl-4 ,5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (14)
Figure imgf000111_0001
10% Pd-on-C (Aldrich, 40 mg) was added to a solution of 3- (S) -benzenesulfonylamino-1- benzylmethylenecarboxy-4 ,5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 13, 4.0 g, 9 . 6 mmol) in methanol (100 mL) and the resulting mixture was hydrogenated (45 psi of H2) on a Parr apparatus for 15 hours. The catalyst was removed by filtering and the solvent was removed under vacuum to give a white solid (3.1 g, 99%). MS (electrospray) 327 (M + 1); XHNMR (CD30D) δ 1.60 (m, 4H) , 1.85 (m, 2H) , 3.25 (m, IH) , 3.52 (m, IH) , 4.08 (s, 2H) , 4.15 (d, IH, J = 7.5 Hz), 7.50 (m, 2H) , 7.56 (m, IH) , 7.80 (d, IH, J = 7.8 Hz)
Example 11 Preparation of 3-(S)-(2,5- dimethoxy) benzenesulfonylamino- 1-benzylmethylenecarboxy- 4,5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (16)
Figure imgf000112_0001
Triethylamine (Aldrich, 11.1 mL, 80 mmol) was added to a solution of 3- (S) -Amino- 1-benzylmethylenecarboxy- 4, 5, 6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 6, 4.3 g, 16 mmol) and 2 , 5-dimethoxybenzenesulfonyl chloride (15) (Aldrich 4.78 g, 20 mmol) in acetonitrile (100 mL) at 0°C. After 30 minutes, the reaction mixture was warmed to ambient temperature and stirred at ambient temperature overnight (12 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the remaining residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate (150 mL) and washed two times each with 100 mL portions of IM potassium bisulfate, saturated sodium bicarbonate and saturated sodium chloride aqueous solutions. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography, eluting with a 50:50 gradient of ethyl acetate/hexane. The pure product was obtained as a foam crystal (2.5 g, 34%). TLC Rf 0.53 (1:1 of hexane/ethyl acetate); MS (electrospray) 477 (M + 1); aHNMR (CDC13) δ 1.58 (m, 2H) , 1.66 (m, 3H) , 1.90 (m, IH) , 2.22 (m, IH) , 3.10 (dd, IH, J = 8.3, 1.2 Hz), 3.45 (dd, IH, J = 8.3, 3.3 Hz), 3.79 (s, 3H) , 3.81 (s, 3H) , 3.90 (m, IH) , 4.10 (m, 2H) , 5.12 (m, 2H) , 6.72 (d, IH, J = 2.2 Hz), 6.88 (d, IH, J = 7.2 Hz), 7.02 (dd, IH, J = 7.2, 2.2 Hz), 7.35 (m, 5H) .
Example 12 Preparation of 3-(S)-(2,5- dimethoxy) benzenesulfonylamino-1-carbohydroxymethyl- 4,5,6, 7-tetra-hydroazepin-2-one (17)
Figure imgf000113_0001
10% Pd-on-C (Aldrich, 800 mg) was added to a solution of 3- (S) - (2 , 5-dmethoxy) benzenesulfonylamino-1- benzylmethylenecarboxy-4, 5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one
(compound 16, 4.0 g, 8.4 mmol) in methanol (100 mL) and the resulting mixture was hydrogenated (45 psi of H2) on a Parr apparatus for 15 hours. The catalyst was removed by filtering and the solvent was removed under vacuum to give a white solid (2.0 g, 62%). MS (electrospray) 387 (M + 1) . Example 13 Preparation of 3-(S)-(3,4- dimethoxy) benzenesulfonylamino-1-benzylmethylenecarboxy- 4,5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (19)
Figure imgf000114_0001
Triethylamine (Aldrich, 9.7 mL, 70 mmol) was added to a solution of 3- (S) -Amino-1-benzylmethylenecarboxy- 4 , 5, 6 , 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 6, 4.0 g, 14 mmol) and 3 , 4-dimethoxybenzenesulfonyl chloride (18) (Aldrich 4.2 g, 18 mmol) in acetonitrile (100 mL) at 0°C. After 30 minutes, the reaction mixture was warmed to room temperature and stirred at room temperature overnight (12 hours) . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the remaining residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate (150 mL) and washed two times each with 100 mL portions of aqueous solutions of IM potassium bisulfate, saturated sodium bicarbonate and saturated sodium chloride. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography, eluting with a 50:50 gradient of ethylacetate/hexane . The pure product was obtained as a foam crystal (2.0 g, 29%) . TLC Rf 0.42 (1:1 of hexane/ethyl acetate); MS (electrospray) 477 (M + 1); αHNMR (CDCl3) δ 1.65 (m, 4H) , 1.95 ( , IH) , 2.10 (m, IH) , 3.12 (dd, IH, J = 8.1, 1.5 Hz), 3.42 (dd, IH, J = 8.1, 3.5 Hz), 3.78 (s, 3H) , 3.80 (s, 3H) , 3.95 (m, IH) , 4.10 (m, 2H) , 5.10 (s, 2H) , 6.18 (d, IH, J = 2.0 Hz), 6.85 (d, IH, J = 5.5 Hz), 7.33 (m, 8H) .
Example 14
Preparation of 3-(S)-(3,4- dimethoxy) benzenesulfonylamino-1-carbohydroxymethyl- 4,5,6, 7-tetra-hydroazepin-2-one (20)
Figure imgf000115_0001
10% Pd-on-C (Aldrich, 800 mg) was added to a solution of 3- (S) - (3 , 4-Dmethoxy) benzenesulfonylamino-1- benzylmethylenecarboxy-4 ,5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one
(compound 19, 2.0 g, 4.2 mmol) in methanol (100 mL) and the resulting mixture was hydrogenated (45 psi of H2) on a Parr apparatus for 15 hours. The catalyst was removed by filtering and the solvent was removed under vacuum to give a white solid (1.1 g, 68%) . MS (electrospray) 387
(M + 1) .
Example 15
Preparation of 2 -cyano-5-methylthiophene (22)
H3θ^S-^ .CN
A solution of 2 -bromo-5-methylthiophene (21) (TCI chemicals, 5 g, 28 mmol) and copper(I) cyanide (Aldrich, 2.53 g, 28 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) was heated at reflux for 4 hours. After cooling to ambient temperature, ethyl acetate (500 mL) and a 10% NaCN aqueous solution (500 mL) was added. After separation of aqueous and organic layers, the aqueous layer was extracted with ethyl acetate (300 mL) . The combined organic layers were concentrated to an oil, which was further purified by a flash column chromatography (ethyl acetate) to give the title compound (3.03 g, 87%). TLC Rf 0.30 (1:1 of hexane/ethyl acetate); XHNMR (CDC13) δ 2.55 (m, 3H) , 6.76 (d, IH, J = 3.6 Hz), 7.42 (d, IH, J = 3.6 Hz).
Example 16
Preparation of 2-cyano-5- (bromomethyl) thiophene (23j
Figure imgf000116_0001
A solution of 2 -cyano-5-methylthiophene (compound 22, 3.0 g, 24 mmol), N-bromosuccinimide (Aldrich, 4.8 g, 27 mmol), and 2 , 2 ' -azobisisobutyronitrile (Aldrich, 0.4 g, 2.4 mmol) in CC1 (Aldrich, 60 mL) was heated at reflux for 5 hours. After cooling to ambient temperature, the solvent was removed under vacuum to give a yellow oil. The oil was purified by a flash column chromatography (1:1 hexane/ethyl acetate) to give the title compound (4.5 g, 91%). TLC Rf 0.91 (1:1 of hexane/ethyl acetate); XHNMR (CDC13) δ 4.66 (s, 2H) , 7.10 (d, IH, J = 3.8 Hz) , 7.48 (d, IH, J = 3.8 Hz) . Example 17 Preparation of 2-cyano-5- (azidomethyl) thiophene (24)
N3^ - CN
A solution of 2-cyano-5- >»thyl) thiophene (compound 23, 3.5 g, 17.3 mmol) an :ιτ> azide 0 (Aldrich, 1.7 g, 26 mmol) in DMF (Aldri ^, -. mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 10 hours. Flash column chromatography (20% ethyl acetate in hexane) gave the title compound (2.35 g, 83%). TLC Rf 0.48 (20% of ethyl acetate in hexane); 1HNMR (CDC13) δ 4.56 (s, 2H) , 5 7.01 (d, IH, J = 3.7 Hz), 7.55 (d, IH, J = 3.7 Hz).
Example 18
Preparation of 2-cyano-5- (aminomethyl) thiophene (25)
Figure imgf000117_0001
Triphenylphosphine (Aldrich, 5.7 g) was added to a solution of 2-cyano-5- (azidomethyl) thiophene (compound 24, 2.5 g, 10 mmol) in THF (Aldrich, 40 mL) and water .. (10 mL) at 0°C. The solution was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred at ambient temperature for 10 hours. RP-HPLC purification gave the title compound (2.3 g, 94%). MS (electrospray) 139 (M + 1); aHNMR (CDC13) δ 4.01 (s, 2H) , 4.75 (br s, 2H, NH2) , 6.82 (d, Q IH, J = 3.5 Hz), 7.08 (d, IH, J = 3.5 Hz). Example 19
Preparation of 2-cyano-5- ( t- butoxycarbonylaminomethyl) thiophene (26)
& CN
BocHN
Potassium carbonate (Aldrich, 2 g) was added to a solution of 2-cyano-5- (aminomethyl) thiophene (compound 25, 0.6 g, 4 mmol), Boc20 (Fluka, 0.95 g, 4 mmol) in water (4 mL) and 1,4-dioxane (Aldrich). The resulting mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 12 hours . Flash chromatography (1:1 hexane/ethyl acetate) gave the title compound (0.58 g, 56%). MS (electrospray) 239 (M + 1); αHNMR (CDCl3) δ 1.44 (s, 9H) , 4.55 (s, 2H) , 4.90 (br s, IH, NH) , 6.88 (d, IH, J = 3.6 Hz), 7.07 (d, IH, J = 3.6 Hz) .
Example 20
Preparation of 2- (N-hydroxyamidinyl ) -5- ( t- butoxycarbonylaminomethyl) thiophene (27)
Figure imgf000118_0001
A solution of 2-cyano-5- ( t- butoxycarbonylmethyl) thiophene (compound 26, 560 mg, 2.44 mmol), hydroxylamine hydrochloride (Aldrich, 330 mg, 4.8 mmol) and 4-methylmorpholine (Aldrich, 1 mL, 9.1 mmol) in methanol (5 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 12 hours. Flash chromatography (5:95:1 isopropyl alcohol/methylene chloride/triethylamine) gave the title compound (550 mg, 86%. MS (electrospray) 272 (M + 1) .
Example 21
Preparation of 2 -amidinyl-5 - (aminomethyl) thiophene (28)
Figure imgf000119_0001
10% Pd-on-C (Aldrich, 100 mg) was added to a solution of 2- (AT-Hydroxyamidinyl) -5- ( t- butoxycarbonylaminomethyl) thiophene (compound 27, 900 mg, 3.3 mmol) in methanol (10 mL) . The resulting mixture was hydrogenated (45 psi of H2) in a Parr apparatus at room temperature for 10 hours. The catalyst was removed by filtering and the solvent was evaporated under vacuum to give the Boc protected intermediate [900 mg, 94%, MS (electrospray) 256 (M + 1)] which was treated with 4 M HCl in 1,4-dioxane (Aldrich, 5 mL) for 3 hours at ambient temperature to yield the title compound (460 mg, 84%) . MS (electrospray) 156 (M + 1); XHNMR (CD3OD) δ 4.43 (s, 2H) , 7.42 (d, IH, J = 3.5 Hz), 7.78 (d, IH, J = 3.5 Hz).
Example 22
Preparation of 2- [N- (propyloxy) amidinyl) -5-
(aminomethyl) thiophene (29)
Figure imgf000119_0002
CsC03 (Aldrich, 0.5 g) was added to a solution of 2- (W-Hydroxyamidinyl) -5- ( t- butoxycarbonylaminomethyl) thiophene (compound 27, 271 mg, 1.0 mmol) and iodopropane (Aldrich, 200 mg, 1.2 mmol) in DMF. The reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 10 hours. Flash chromatography (5:95:1 isopropyl alcohol/methylene chloride/triethylamine) gave the Boc protected intermediate [MS (electrospray) 314 (M + 1) ] which was treated with 4M HCl in 1,4-dioxane (Aldrich) for 3 hours at ambient temperature to yield the title compound (201 mg, 81%) . MS (electrospray) 214 (M + 1) ; 1HNMR (CDC13) δ 0.95 (t, 3H, J = 7.5 Hz), 1.55 (br s, 2H, NH2) , 1.70 (m, 2H) , 4.00 (t, 2H, J = 7.5 Hz), 4.01 (d, 2H, J = 7.5 Hz), 4.70 (br s, 2H, NH2) , 6.80 (d, IH, J = 3.6 Hz), 7.08 (d, IH, J = 3.6 Hz) .
Example 23
Preparation of 3 - (S) - ( 2 , 3 -dihydrobenzo [b] furanyl-5 - sulf onyl ) amino- 1- ( 2 -propyloxyamindino-5 - methylenecarboxamidomethylthiophenyl ) -4 , 5 , 6 , 7- tetrohydroazepin-2 -one ( 30 )
Figure imgf000120_0001
A solution of 3- (S) - (2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [b] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) amino-l-carbohydroxy-methyl-4 ,5,6,7- tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 8, 133 mg, 0.36 mmol), 2- [N- (propyloxy) amidinyl) -5- (aminomethyl) thiophene (compound 29, 90 mg, 0.36 mmol), EDC (Aldrich, 191 mg, 1 mmol) , HOBt (Aldrich, 135 mg, 1 mmol) , and 4- methylmorpholine (1 mL, 3 mmol) in DMF (2 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 7 hours. RP HPLC purification (acetonitrile-water) yielded the title compound [204 mg, 99%, MS (electrospray) 565 (M + l)].
Example 24
Preparation of 3- (S) - (2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [b] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) amino-1- (2-amindino-5- methylenecarboxamidomethylthiophenyl) -4,5,6,7- tetrahydroazepin-2-one (31)
Figure imgf000121_0001
Method A: Zinc powder (Aldrich, 200 mg, 3 mmol) was added to a solution of 3-(S)-(2,3- dihydrobenzo [Jb] furanyl-5-sulfonyl) amino-1- (2- propyloxyamindino-5- methylenecarboxamidomethylthiophinyl) -4,5,6,7- tetrohydroazepin-2-one (compound 30, 200 mg, 0.35 mmol), in acetic acid (2 mL) and was stirred at ambient temperature for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was filtered to remove zinc. The reaction mixture was then subjected to RP HPLC purification (acetonitrile-water) to obtain the title compound (126 mg, 70%) . Method B: A solution of 3-(S)-(2,3- Dihydrobenzo [Jb] furanyl-5-sulfonyl) amino-1- carbohydroxymethyl-4, 5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 8, 200 mg, 0.54 mmol), 2-amidinyl-5- (aminomethyl) thiophene (compound 28, 126 mg, 0.82 mmol), EDC (Aldrich, 57 mg, 0.82 mmol), HOBt (Aldrich, 110 mg, 0.82 mmol), and diisopropylamine (Aldrich 0.48 mL, 2.7 mmol) in DMF (2 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 13 hours. RP HPLC purification (acetonitrile-water) gave the title compound (85 mg, 35%) . HPLC retention, 10.36 minute; C18 column 5-75% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes, 1.0 mL/min; MS (electrospray) 506 (M + 1); αHNMR (CD3OD) δ 1.62 (m, 4H) , 1.83 (m, 2H) , 3.41 (m, 4H) , 3.98 (m, IH) , 4.05 (d, 2H, J = 7.5 Hz), 4.60 (s, 2H) , 4.61 (t, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz), 6.80 (d, IH, J = 7.0 Hz), 7.18 (d, IH, J = 3.5 Hz), 7.60 (d, IH, J = 7.0 Hz), 7.66 (s, IH) , 7.78 (d, IH, J = 3.5 Hz), 8.60 (br s, IH, NH) .
Example 25
Preparation of α-azido-4-cyanotoluene '(33)
Figure imgf000122_0001
Sodium azide (Aldrich, 3.5 g, 54 mmol) was added to a solution of p-cyanobenzyl bromide (32) (Aldrich, 10 g, 51 mmol) in DMF (100 mL) , and the resulting mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 5 hours. The reaction mixture was then diluted with water (350 mL) and extracted with ether (2 x 100 mL) . Combined organic layers were washed with brine and dried (MgS04) . Removal of solvent gave the title compound (8 g, 96%) . 2HNMR (CDC13) δ 4.42 (s, 2H) , 7.41 (d, 2H, J = 8.1 Hz), 7.65 (d, 2H, J = 8.1 Hz) .
Example 26
Preparation of p-cyanobenzylamine (34)
Figure imgf000123_0001
10% Pd-on-C (Aldrich, 800 mg) catalyst was added to a solution of α-azido-4-cyanotoluene (compound 33, 8 g, 51 mmol) in EtOAc (150 mL) . The reaction mixture was hydrogenated (H2, 45 psi) in a Parr apparatus for 11 hours. Catalyst was removed by filtering and the solvent was removed under vacuum to give the title compound (6.3 g, 93%). XHNMR (CDC13) δ 3.85 (s, 2H) , 7.45 (d, 2H, J = 8.1), 7.60 (d, 2H, J = 8.1 Hz), 7.78 (s, 2H, NH2) .
Example 27
Preparation of 4- (aminomethyl) phenyl -N-hydroxyamidine (35)
Figure imgf000124_0001
Hydroxylamine hydrochloride (7 g) was added to a solution of compound 34 (7 g) and NMM (4 mL) in methanol (100 mL) . The mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 3 days. The compound was purified by RP HPLC to give the title compound (7 g, 89%) . MS (electrospray) 166 (M + 1) .
Example 28 Preparation of 4- (aminomethyl) phenylamidine (36)
Figure imgf000124_0002
10% Pd-on-C (Aldrich, 800 mg) was added to a solution of 4- (aminomethyl) phenyl -N-hydroxyamidine (compound 35, 7 g) in methanol (150 mL) . The reaction mixture was hydrogenated (H2, 45 psi) in a Parr apparatus for 48 hours. Catalyst was removed by filtering and the solvent was removed under vacuum to give the title compound (6.3 g, 99%) . MS (electrospray) 150 (M + 1). Example 29 Preparation of 2-fluoro-4 -cyanotoluene (38)
Figure imgf000125_0001
Copper (I) cyanide (Aldrich, 3.6 g, 40 mmol) was added to a solution of 4-bromo-2-fluorotoluene (37) (Aldrich, 5 g, 27 mmol) in DMF (60 mL) . The reaction mixture was heated at 150°C for 11 hours. After cooling to room temperature, the mixture was partitioned between water and EtOAc (500 mL each) . The organic layer was dried (MgS04) , and solvent was removed under vacuum to give the title compound (2.08, 58%). αHNMR (CDC13) δ 2.36 (s, 3H) , 7.30 (m, 3H) , 7.35 (d, IH, J = 8.1 Hz).
Example 30
Preparation of 3-fluoro-4- (bromomethyl) benzonitrile (39)
Figure imgf000125_0002
NBS (Aldrich, 3.02 g, 17 mmol) and benzoylperoxide (Aldrich, 0.37 g, 1.5 mmol) was added to a solution of 2-fluoro-4-cyanotoluene (compound 38, 2.08 g, 15 mmol) in CC14. The reaction mixture was heated at 80°C for 14 hours. After cooling down to ambient temperature, the mixture was diluted with ether (100 mL) and washed with aqueous Na2S303, and dried (MgS04) . Removal of solvent under vacuum led to a yellow oil which was purified by flash chromatography. The title compound 39 (1.4 g,
42%) was obtained, together with a by-product, 3-fluoro- 4- (dibromomethyl) benzonitrile (40) (1.0 g, 30 %) . For the title compound (39): 1H MR (CDC13) δ 4.46 (s, 2H) , 7.35 (d, IH, J = 8.0 Hz), 7.42 (d, IH, J = 8.0 Hz), 7.52 (t, IH, J = 8.0 Hz). For the by-product (40): XHNMR (CDC13) δ 6.90 (s, IH) , 7.35 (d, IH, J = 8.0 Hz), 7.55 (d, IH, J = 8.0 Hz), 7.96 (t, IH, J = 8.0 Hz).
Example 31 Preparation of 3-fluoro-4- (azidomethyl) benzonitrile (41)
Figure imgf000126_0001
Sodium azide (Aldrich, 0.63 g, 9.8 mmol) was added to a solution of 3-fluoro-4- (bromomethyl) benzonitrile (compound 39, 1.4 g, 6.5 mmol) in DMF (15 mL) . After stirring at ambient temperature for 20 hours, the reaction mixture was partitioned in EtOAc and water (100 mL, each) . Organic layer was then dried (MgS04) , and solvent was removed under vacuum to give the title compound (0.995 g, 86%). ^NMR (CDC13) δ 4.50 (s, 2H) , 7.38 (d, 2H, J = 8.1 Hz), 7.52 (m, 2H) . Example 32
Preparation of 3-fluoro-4- (azidc ^hyl) phenyl -N- hydroxyamidine (42)
Figure imgf000127_0001
Hydroxylamine hydrochloride (Aldrich, 800 mg, 11.6 mmol) was added to a solution of 3-fluoro-4 - (azidomethyl) benzonitrile (compound 41, 1.2 g, 6.8 mmol) and NMM (2 L) in methanol (25 L) . After stirring at room temperature for 3 days, the reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc and washed with brine. Removal of solvent under vacuum yielded the title compound (1.38, 82%) . 1HNMR (CD3 OD) δ 4.41 (s, 2H) , 7.45 (m, 3H) .
Example 33
Preparation of 3-fluoro-4- (azidomethyl) phenyl ( -N- propyloxy) amidine (43)
Figure imgf000127_0002
Cesium carbonate (Aldrich, 3.2 g, 9.9 mmol) was added to a solution of iodopropane (1 mL, 10 mmol) and 3-fluoro-4- (azidomethyl) phenyl-N-hydroxyamidine (compound 42, 1.38 g, 6.6 mmol) in DMF (20 mL) . The reaction mixture was heated at 50°C for 20 hours. After cooling down to ambient temperature, water was added and resulting mixture was extracted with ether. The organic layer was washed with brine and dried (MgS04) . Flash chromatography gave the title compound (1.03 g, 62%) . ^ΗN R (CDC13) δ 0.99 (t, 3H, J = 7.5 Hz), 1,75 (m, 2H) , 4.08 (t, 2H, J = 7.5 Hz), 4.40 (s, 2H) , 4.78 (br s, 2H) , 7.40 ( , 3H) .
Example 34
Preparation of 3-fluoro-4- (aminomethyl) henyl ( -N- propyloxy) amidine (44)
Figure imgf000128_0001
Triphenylphosphine (Aldrich, 1.6 g, 6.2 mmol) was added to a solution of 3-fluoro-4- (azidomethyl) phenyl ( - N-propyloxy) amidine (compound 43, 1.03 g, 4."' mol) in THF (15 L) . The reaction mixture was st-> , at ambient temperature for 20 hours. NaOH was added to the reaction mixture until pH = 3 -e resulting solution was extracted with EtOAc ' JOmL) . The combined organic layers were wash . me and dried (MgS04) . Removal of solvent und< acuum gave the title compound (825 mg, 77%). XHNMR ( jD) δ 0.98 (t, 3H, J = 7.5 Hz), 1,72 (m, 2H) , 3.82 (≤, 2H) , 3.95 (t, 2H, J = 7.5 Hz), 7.35 (d, IH, J = 8.0 Hz), 7.40 (m, 2H) . Example 35
Preparation of 3- (S) - (2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [b] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) amino-1- (2-amino-6-methyl-5- methylenecarboxamidomethylpyridinyl) -4,5,6,7- tetrahydroazepin-2-one (46)
Figure imgf000129_0001
A solution of 3- (S) - (2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [Jb] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) amino-l-carbohydroxymethyl-4, 5,6,7- tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 8, 60 mg, 0.16 mmol), 2-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-5-aminomethyl-6- methylpyridine (compound 45, Sanderson, P. E. J. et . al . J. Medi cinal Chemistry, 1998, 41 , 4466-4474, 45 mg, 0.16 mmol), EDC (Aldrich, 90 mg, 0.46 mmol), HOBt (Aldrich, 70 mg, 0.51 mmol), and 4-methylmorpholine (Aldrich 1 mL) in DMF (1 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 8 hours. TFA (Aldrich, 5 mL) and methylene chloride (5 mL) were then introduced and the resulting mixture was heated at 50°C for 0.5 hours. RP HPLC purification (acetonitrile-water) gave the title compound 46 (47 mg, 59%). HPLC retention, 9.49 minute; C18 column 10-70% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes, 1.0 mL/min; MS (electrospray) 488 (M + 1); aHNMR (CD30D) δ 1.61 (m, 4H) , 1.83 (m, 2H) , 2.43 (s, 3H) , 3.22 (t, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz), 3.45 (m, 2H) , 4.00 (s, 3H) , 4.02 (m, IH) , 4.21 (s, 3H) , 4.62 (t, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz), 4.79 (d, 2H, J = 6 . 9 Hz), 7.58 (d, IH, J = 6.9 Hz), 7.65 (s, IH) , 7.80 (d, IH, J = 6.9 Hz) , 8.22 (br s, IH, NH) .
Example 36
Preparation of 3- (S) - (2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [Jb] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) amino-1- (l^amidino-4-methylene- carboxamidomethylpiperidmyl) -4,5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin- 2 -one (48)
Figure imgf000130_0001
A solution 3- (S) - (2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [Jb] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) amino-l-carbohydroxymethyl-4, 5,6,7- tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 8, 90 mg, 0.24 mmol), 4- (aminomethyl) piperidine N-formamidine (compound 47, AstaTech, Inc. PA, USA, 90 mg, 0.39 mmol), BOP (Nova Biochem, CA, USA, 180 mg, 0.40 mmol) and NMM (Aldrich, 0.5 mL) in DMF (3 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 13 hours. -RP HPLC purification gave the title compound (99 mg, 80%). HPLC retention, 10.36 minutes; C18 column 5-75% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes,
1.0 mL/min; MS (electrospray) 507 (M + 1); XHNMR (CD3OD) δ 1.20 (m, 2H) , 1.62 (m, 4H) , 1.80 (m, 4H) , 1.87 (m, IH) , 3.05 (t, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz), 3.11 (m, 2H) , 3.24 (m, 2H) , 3.51 (m, 2H) , 3.88 (m, 2H) , 3.92 (s, 2H) , 4.03 (d, IH, J = 7.0 Hz), 4.70 (t, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz), 6.82 (d, IH, J =
7.1 Hz), 7.18 (br s, IH, NH) , 7.66 (d, IH, J = 7.1 Hz), 7.83 (s, IH) , 7.85 (br s, IH, NH) . Example 37 Preparation of compound 49
Figure imgf000131_0001
A solution 3- (S) - (2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [Jb] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) amino-l-carbohydroxymethyl-4 ,5,6,7- tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 8, 190 mg, 0.51 mmol), 4- (aminomethyl) phenyl -N-hydroxyamidine (compound 35, 160 mg, 0.79 mmol), BOP (Nova Biochem, CA, USA, 442 mg, 1.0 mmol) and NMM (Aldrich, 0.5 mL) in DMF (3 mL) was stirred at ambient . temperature for 13 hours. RP HPLC purification gave the title compound (165 mg, 62%) .
Example 38
Preparation of compound 50
Figure imgf000131_0002
10% Pd-on-C (Aldrich, 50 mg) was added to a solution of compound 49 (65 mg, 0.13 mmol) in methanol, and reaction mixture was hydrogenated (H2, 45 psi) in a Parr apparatus for 13 hours. The catalyst was removed by filtering and the solvent was evaporated under vacuum to give an oil. RP HPLC purification gave the title compound (41 mg 65%). HPLC retention, 10.5 minute; C18 column 5-75% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes, 1.0 mL/min; MS (electrospray) 500 (M + 1) ; ^NMR (CD30D) δ 1.65 (m, 4H) , 1.90 (m, 2H) , 3.22 (t, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz), 3.45 (m, IH) , 3.57 (m, IH) , 4.10 (t, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz), 4.15 (m, IH) , 4.45 (m, 2H) , 4.46 (m, 2H) , 6.78 (d, IH, J = 7.2 Hz), 7.52 (d, IH, J = 7.4 Hz), 7.60 (d, IH, J = 7.2 Hz), 7.70 (s, IH) , 7.75 (d, IH, J = 7.4 Hz
Example 39
Preparation of 3- (S) - (2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [Jb] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) amino- 1- (4-amidinylbenzylmethyl- enecarboxamido) -4,5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (51)
Figure imgf000132_0001
A solution of 3- (S) - (2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [Jb] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) amino-l-carbohydroxymethyl-4 , 5,6,7- tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 8, 60 mg, 0.16 mmol), 3-fluoro-4- (aminomethyl) phenyl (-IT-propyloxy) amidine
(compound 44, 30 mg, 0.18 mmol), EDC ( 90 mg, 0.46 mmol), HOBt (70 mg, 0.51 mmol), and NMM (1 mL, 9.1 mmol) in DMF was stirred at ambient temperature for 10 hours. RP HPLC gave the propyloxy protected amidine intermediate
[40 mg, MS (electrospray) 576 (M + 1)] which was treated with zinc powder (Aldrich, 100 mg) in acetic acid (5 mL) at ambient temperature for 2 hours . Zinc powder was removed by filtering and the solution was purified by RP HPLC to yield the title compound (35 mg, 44% overall) . HPLC retention, 10.0 minutes; C18 column 10-70% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes, 1.0 mL/min; MS
(electrospray) 518 (M + 1); XHNMR (CD3OD) δ 1.60 (m, 4H) , 1.85 (m, 2H) , 3.22 (t, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz), 3.58 (m, 2H) , 4.05 (m, 3H) , 4.47 (m, 2H) , 4.60 (t, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz), 4.80 (t, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz), 6.80 (d, IH, J = 7.2 Hz), 7.58 (m, 4H) , 7.65 (s, IH) , 8.45 (br t, IH) .
Example 40
Preparation of compound 52
Figure imgf000133_0001
A solution of 3- (S) - (2-naphthalenesulfonyl) amino-1- carbohydroxymethyl-4 , 5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one
(compound 11, 300 mg, 0.79 mmol), 4-
(aminomethyl) iperidine N-formamidine (compound 47, AstaTech, Inc. PA, USA, 250 mg, 1.1 mmol), EDC (220 mg, 1.2 mmol), HOBt (162 mg, 1.2 mmol), and DIEA (0.7 mL, 3.9 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 13 hours. RP HPLC gave the title compound (363 mg, 88%). HPLC retention, 12.32 minute; C18 column 5-75% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes, 1.0 mL/min; MS (electrospray) 515 (M + 1); XHNMR (CD30D) δ 1.20 (m, 2H) , 1.60 (m, 4H) , 1.82 (m, 5H) , 3.03 (m, 4H) , 3.38 (m, IH) , 3.55 (m, IH) , 3.82 (d, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz), 3.93 (s, 2H) , 4.20 (m, IH) , 7.63 (m, 2H) , 7.82 (s, IH) , 7.95 (d, IH, J = 7.0 Hz), 8.04 (m, 2H) , 8.44 (d, IH, J 7.0 Hz) .
Example 41
Preparation of 3- (Benzenesulfonyl) amino-1- (l-amidino-4- methylenecarboxamido-methylpiperidinyl) -4,5,6,7- tetrahydroazepin-2-one (53)
Figure imgf000134_0001
A solution of 3- (S) -benzenesulfonylamino-1- carbohydroxymethyl-4, 5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one
(compound 14, 300 mg, 0.77 mmol), 4-
(aminomethyl) piperidine N-formamidine (compound 47, AstaTech, Inc. PA, USA, 90 mg, 0.39 mmol), EDC (260 mg, 1.4 mmol), HOBt (190 mg, 1.4 mmol), and DIEA (0.82 mL, 4.6 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 13 hours. RP HPLC gave the title compound (307 mg, 72% overall) . HPLC retention, 9.87 minute; C18 column 5-75% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes, 1.0 mL/min; MS (electrospray) 465 (M + 1); -"UNMR
(CD3OD) δ 1.21 (m, 2H) , 1.62 (m, 4H) , 1.80 (m, 5H) , 3.08
(m, 3H) , 3.38 (m, 2H) , 3.55 (m, IH) , 3.84 (d, 2H, J = 7.8 Hz), 3.95 (s, 2H) , 4.10 (d, IH, J = 7.2 Hz), 7.58
(m, 2H) , 7.60 (m, IH) , 7.86 (m, 2H) . Example 42
Preparation of compound 54
Figure imgf000135_0001
A solution of 3-(S)-(2,5- dimethoxy) benzenesulfonylamino-1-carbohydroxymethyl- 4 , 5, 6, -tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 17, 300 mg, 0.77 mmol), 4- (aminomethyl) piperidine N-formamidine I5 (compound 47, AstaTech, Inc. PA, USA, 178 mg, 1.2 mmol), EDC (230 mg, 1.2 mmol), HOBt (162 mg, 1.2 mmol), and DIEA (0.7 mL, 3.9 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 13 hours. RP HPLC gave the title compound (345 mg, 85%) . HPLC retention, 10.70
20 minute; C18 column 5-75% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes, 1.0 mL/min; MS (electrospray) 525 (M + 1); ^NMR (CD3OD) δ 1.21 (m, 2H) , 1.61 (m, 4H) , 1.80 (m, 3H) , 1.92 (m, IH) , 2.01 (m, IH) , 3.02 (m, 3H) , 3.15 (m, IH) , 3.22 (m, IH) , 3.45 (m, IH) , 3.79 (s, 3H, CH3) , 3.82 (s, 5H,
25 CH3, CH2) , 3.97 (d, 2H, J = 3.3 Hz), 4.10 (d, IH, J = 7.2 Hz), 7.11 (m, 2H) , 7.38 (s, IH) , 7.90 (br s, IH, NH) .
30 Example 43 Preparation of compound 55
Figure imgf000136_0001
A solution of 3-(S)-(3,4- Dimethoxy) benzenesulfonylamino-1-carbohydroxymethyl- 4 , 5 , 6 , 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 20, 200 mg, 0.52 mmol), 4- (aminomethyl) piperidine N-formamidine (compound 47, AstaTech, Inc. PA, USA, 178 mg, 0.78 mmol), EDC (150 mg, 0.78 mmol), HOBt (105 mg, 0.78 mmol), and DIEA (0.46 mL, 2.6 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 13 hours. RP HPLC gave the title compound (119 mg, 44%) . HPLC retention, 9 . 86 minute; C18 column 5-75% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes, 1.0 mL/min; MS (electrospray) 525 (M + 1) ; ^ΗNMR (CD30D) δ 1.20 (m, 2H) , 1.63 (m, 4H) , 1.81 (m, 5H) , 3.07 (m, 4H) , 3.66 (m, 2H) , 3.85 (s, 8H, 2CH3, CH2) , 3.96 (s, 2H) , 4.08 (d, IH, J = 7.2 Hz), 7.07 (d, IH, J = 7.0 Hz), 7.37 (s, IH) , 7.45 (d, IH, J = 7.0 Hz), 7.82 (br s, IH, NH) . Example 44 Preparation of compound 56
Figure imgf000137_0001
A solution of 3- (S) - (2-naphthalenesulfonyl) amino-1- carbohydroxymethyl-4 , 5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 11, 200 mg, 0.53 mmol), 4-
(aminomethyl) phenylamidine (compound 36, 112 mg, 0.79 mmol), EDC (150 mg, 0.79 mmol), HOBt (107 mg, 0.79 mmol), and DIEA (0.5 mL, 2.6 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 18 hours. RP HPLC gave the title compound (2 mg, 3%) . HPLC retention, 12.42 minute; C18 column 5-75% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes, 1.0 mL/min; MS (electrospray) 508. (M + 1) ; XHNMR (CD3OD) δ 1.65 (m, 4H) , 1.83 (m, 2H) , 3.36 (m, IH) , 3.57 (m, IH) , 3.96 (d, IH, J = 14.1 Hz), 4.03 (d, IH, J = 14.1 Hz), 4.21 (d, IH, J = 7.2 Hz), 4.38 (dd, IH, J = 14.0, 4.2 Hz), 4.42 (dd, IH, J = 14.0, 4.2 Hz), 7.47 (d, 2H, J = 7.1 Hz), 7.61 (m, 2H) , 7.72 (d, 2H, J = 7.1 Hz), 7.81 (d, IH, J = 7.0 Hz), 7.90 (d, IH, J = 7.0 Hz), 7.95 (d, IH, J = 7.0 Hz), 8.02 (d, IH, J = 7.0 Hz) Example 45 Preparation of compound 57
Figure imgf000138_0001
A solution of 3- (S) -benzenesulfonylamino-1- carbohydroxymethyl-4, 5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 14, 200 mg, 0.61 mmol), 4-
(aminomethyl) henylamidine (compound 36, 137 mg, 0.92 mmol), EDC (176 mg, 0.92 mmol), HOBt (124 mg, 0.92 mmol), and DIEA (0.53 mL, 3 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 18 hours. RP HPLC gave the title compound (148 mg, 53%) . HPLC retention, 10.14 minute; C18 column 5-75% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes, 1.0 mL/min; MS (electrospray) 458 (M + 1) ; ^N R (CD3OD) δ 1.61 (m, 4H) , 1.82 (m, 2H) , 3.35 (m, IH) , 3.38 (m, IH) , 4.02 (d, IH, J = 14.1 Hz), 4.08 (d, IH, J = 14.1 Hz), 4.15 (d, IH, J ='7.2 Hz), 4.41 (d, IH, J = 14.5 Hz), 4.50 (d, IH, J = 14.5 Hz), 7.52 ( , 5H) , 7.77 (d, 2H, J = 7.0 Hz), 7.83 (d, 2H, J = 7.0 Hz
Example 46
Preparation of compound 58
Figure imgf000138_0002
A solution of 3-(S)-(2,5- dimethoxy) benzenesulfonylamino-1-carbohydroxymethyl- 4 , 5 , 6 , 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 17, 200 mg, 0.52 mmol), 4- (aminomethyl) phenylamidine (compound 36, 116 mg, 0.78 mmol), EDC (149 mg, 0.78 mmol), HOBt (105 mg, 0.78 mmol), and DIEA (0.5 mL, 2.6 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 18 hours. RP HPLC gave the title compound (3 mg, 2%) . HPLC retention, 10.89 minute; C18 column 5-75% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes, 1.0 mL/min; MS (electrospray) 518 (M + 1); ^NMR (CD30D) δ 1.64 (m, 4H) , 1.92 (m, IH) , 2.03 (m, IH) , 3.45 (m, IH) , 3.80 (s, 3H) , 3.82 (s, 3H) , 3.82 (m, IH) , 4.10 (m, 2H) , 4.42 (m, 2H) , 7.05 (d, IH, J = 7.1 Hz), 7.15 (d, IH, J = 7.1 Hz), 7.28 (s, IH) , 7.52 (d, IH, J = 7.0 Hz), 7.78 (d, IH, J = 7.0 Hz), 8.56 (d, IH, NH) .
Example 47
Preparation of compound 59
Figure imgf000139_0001
A solution of 3-(S)-(3,4- dimethoxy) benzenesulfonylamino-1-carbohydroxymethyl- 4, 5, 6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 20, 200 mg, 0.52 mmol), 4- (aminomethyl) phenylamidine (compound 36, 116 mg, 0.78 mmol), EDC (149 mg, 0.78 mmol), HOBt (105 mg, 0.78 mmol), and DIEA (0.5 mL, 2.6 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 18 hours. RP HPLC gave the title compound (7 mg, 5%) . HPLC retention, 9.97 minute; C18 column 5-75% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes, 1.0 mL/min; MS (electrospray) 518
(M + 1); XHNMR (CD3OD) δ 1.65 (m, 4H) , 1.90 (m, 2H) , 3.38
(m, IH) , 3.56 (m, IH) , 3.85 (s, 6H, 2CH3) , 4.01 (m, IH) , 4.10 (m, 2H) , 4.45 (m, 2H) , 7.02 (d, IH, J = 7.3 Hz),
7.38 (s, IH) , 7.45 (d, IH, J = 7.3 Hz), 7.50 (d, 2H, J = 7.3 Hz), 7.77 (d, 2H, J = 7.3 Hz), 8.42 (br s, IH, NH) .
Example 48 Preparation of compound 62
Figure imgf000140_0001
A solution of 3- (S) - (2, 3-dihydrobenzo [b] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) amino-l-carbohydroxymethyl-4 ,5,6,7- tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 8, 150 mg, 0.41 mmol) and trans-4- ( tert-butoxycarbonylamino) - cyclohexylmethylamine (compound 60, which was synthesized based on a literature procedure: Lyle, T. A.; et . al . Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters , 1997, 7 (1) , 67-72; 140 mg, 0.61 mmol), EDC (117 mg, 0.61 mmol), HOBt (83 mg, 0.61 mmol), and DIEA (0.36 mL, 2.0 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 13 hours. RP HPLC gave the Boc-protected intermediate (61) [200 mg, 85%, MS (electrospray) 579 (M + 1)] which was further treated with 5 M HCl in EtOAc (25 L) at ambient temperature for 2 hours . RP HPLC led to the title compound (62) (185 mg, 91%; 77% for 2 steps) . HPLC retention, 10.09 minute; C18 column 5-75% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes, 1.0 mL/min; MS (electrospray) 479 (M + 1); XHNMR (CD30D) δ 1.05 (m, 2H) , 1.32 (m, 2H) , 1.50 (m, IH) , 1.65 (m, 4H) , 1.86 (m, 4H) , 2.05 (m, 2H) , 3.04 (m, 3H) , 3.23 (m, 2H) , 3.46 (m, 2H) , 3.95 (s, 2H) , 4.02 (d, IH, J = 7.0 Hz), 4.63 (t, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz), 6.81 (d, IH, J = 7.2 Hz), 7.62 (d, IH, J = 7.1 Hz), 7.70 (s, IH) , 7.82 (br s, IH, NH) .
Example 49
Preparation of compound 65
Figure imgf000141_0001
A solution of 3- (S) - (2 , 3-dihydrobenzo [Jb] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) amino-l-carbohydroxymethyl-4 ,5,6,7- tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 8, 90 mg, 0.24 mmol), 5- (aminomethyl) -1- (2-tetrahydropyranyl) indazole (compound 63, which was synthesized based on a literature procedure: Sun, J.-H.; et . al . J. Org. Chem. , 1997, 52,6527-6529; 90 mg, 0.39 mmol), BOP (180 mg, 0.40 mmol), and NMM (0.5 mL) in DMF (3 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 13 hours . Flash chromatography (EtOAc) gave the THP protected intermediate [compound
64, 65 mg, 45%, MS (electrospray) 582 (M + 1); Rf = 0.52 in EtOAc] which was further treated with 4M HCl in dioxane (Aldrich) at 60°C for 2 hours. RP HPLC gave the title compound (65) (10 mg, 26%). HPLC retention, 12.60 minutes; C18 column 5-75% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes, 1.0 mL/min; MS (electrospray) 498 (M + 1). XHNMR (CD3OD) δ 2.55 (m, 4H) , 2.78 (m, 2H) , 3.11 (t, 2H, J = 7.8 Hz), 3.40 (m, 2H) , 3.79 (d, IH, J = 14.5 Hz), 3.95 (d, IH, J = 14.5 Hz), 3.95 (m, IH) , 4.36 (s, 2H) ,
4.50 (t, 2H, J = 7.8 Hz), 6.65 (d, IH, J = 8.8 Hz), 7.32
(d, IH, J = 8.8 Hz), 6.47 (d, IH, J = 8.8 Hz), 7.57 (dd, IH, J = 8.8, 3.5 Hz), 7.62 (s, IH) , 7.65 (s, IH) , 7.98
(s, s, IH) .
Example 50
Preparation of 3- (S) - ( tert-butoxycarbonylamino-4 , 5- dihydrobenzo [f] azepin-2-one (67)
Figure imgf000142_0001
Starting material, 3- (S) -amino-4 , 5- dihydrobenzo [f] azepin-2-one (compound 66), was synthesized based on a literature procedure: Watthey, J. W. , et. al. J. Med . Chem . , 1985, 28, 1511-1516. The optically pure isomer was obtained based on a literature resolution procedure: Schoen, W. R. J". Med . Chem. , 1994, 37, 897-906. A solution of this material (3 g, 9.3 mmol), Boc20 (Fluka, 2 g, 9.3 mmol), and Na2C03 (2 g) in water (15 mL) and dioxane (10 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 18 hours. The reaction mixture was diluted with ether (300 mL) , washed with brine, and dried (MgS04) . Removal of solvent gave the title compound (2.5 g, 99%). MS (electrospray) 277 (M + 1).
Example 51
Preparation of 3- (S) - ( tert-butoxycarbonylamino) -1- (1-methylenecarboxybenzyl) -4 , 5-dihydrobenzo [f] azepin-2- one (68)
Figure imgf000143_0001
Lithium bis (trimethylsilyl) amide (Aldrich, 1.0 M THF solution, 9 mL, 9mmol) was added to a solution of 3- (S) - (tert-butoxycarbonylamino-4, 5-dihydrobenzo [f] azepin- 2 -one (compound 67, 2.4 g, 8.7 mmol) in THF (10 mL) at 0°C. After 0.5 hour, the reaction mixture was warmed to 40°C for 1 hour. Benzylbromoacetate (Aldrich, 1.5 mL, 9.5 mmol) was introduced and the resulting solution was stirred at ambient temperature for 10 hours. The mixture was diluted with water (100 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (2 x 500 mL) . The combined organic layers were washed with aqueous NH4C1 , NaHC03 and brine. Removal of solvent gave the title compound (3.43 g, 92%) . MS (electrospray) 425 (M + 1) . Example 52 Preparation of 3- (S) -2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [b] furanyl-5 sulfonylamino) -1- (1-methylenecarboxy-benzyl) -4,5- dihydrobenzo [f] azepin-2-one (70)
Figure imgf000144_0001
A solution of 5 M HCl in EtOAc (20 mL) was added to a solution of 3- (S) - (tert-butoxycarbonylamino) -1- (1- methylenecarboxbenzyl) -4 , 5-dihydrobenzo [f] azepin-2-one
(compound 68, 3.4 g, 8.0 mmol) in EtOAc (10 mL) at 0°C. After 0.5 hour, the reaction mixture was warmed to room temperature for 1 hour. The solvent was removed under vacuum to give compound 69 which was used in the next step without further purification. To this residue, 7- Chlorosulfonyl-2 , 3-dihydrobenzo [b] furan (compound 2, 2.62 g, 12 mmol) and NMM (Aldrich, 6 mL, 55 mmol) in DMF
(12 mL) was added. The resulting solution was stirred at ambient temperature for 10 hours. Flash chromatography (EtOAc) gave the title compound (2.32 g, 57%) . MS (electrospray) 507 (M + 1) . Example 53
Preparation of 3- (S) -2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [Jb] furanyl-5- sulfonylamino) -1- (1-methylenecarboxy) -4,5- dihydrobenzo [f] azepin-2-one (71)
Figure imgf000145_0001
10% Pd-on-C (120 mg) catalyst was added to a solution of 3- (S) -2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [Jb] furanyl-5- sulfonylamino) -1- (1-methylenecarboxybenzyl) -4,5- dihydrobenzo [f] azepin-2-one (compound 70, 1.2 g, 2.4 mmol) in methanol (100 mL) . The reaction mixture was hydrogenated (H2, 45 psi) in a Parr apparatus for 3 hours. The catalyst was removed by filtering and the solvent was evaporated under vacuum to give the title compound 71 (0.96 g, 97%). MS (electrospray) 417 (M + 1) .
Example 54
Preparation of 3- (S) - (2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [Jb] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) amino-1- (4-hydroxyamidinyl- benzylmethylenecarboxamido) -4, 5-dihydrobenzo [f] azepin-2- one (72)
Figure imgf000146_0001
ς A solution of 3- (S) -2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [b] furanyl-5- sulfonylamino) -1- (1-methylenecarboxy) -4, 5- dihydrobenzo [f] azepin-2 -one (compound 72, 280 mg, 0.67 mmol), 4- (aminomethyl) benzonitrile (compound 34, 113 mg, 0.67 mmol), EDC (129 mg, 0.67 mmol), HOBt (91 mg, 0.67 U mmol) , and NMM (5mL, 46 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 10 hours. Flash chromatography (EtOAc) gave a cyano intermediate [297 mg, 83%, MS (electrospray) 531 (M + l)] which was treated with hydroxylamine hydrochloride (Aldrich, 184 „ A D_. mg, 2.6 mmol) NMM (3 mL, 27 mmol) in methanol (15 mL) .
The mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 10 hours. RP HPLC purification gave compound 72 (151 mg, 51%). HPLC retention, 12.0 minute; C18 column 5-75% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes, 1.0 mL/min; MS
30 (electrospray) 564 (M + 1); 1HN R (CD3OD) δ 2.02 (m, IH) , 2.18 (m, IH) , 2.57 (m, IH) , 3.20 (m, 3H) , 3.78 (m, IH) , 4..30 (d, IH, J = 14.5 Hz), 4.38 (m, IH) , 4.40 (d, IH, J = 14.5 Hz), 6.71 (d, IH, J = 7.2 Hz), 7.22 (m, 3H) , 7.38 (m, 4H) , 7.43 (s, IH) , 7.58 (d, IH, J = 7.2), 8.55 (br s, 2H) .
Example 55
Preparation of 3- (S) - (2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [Jb] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) amino-1- (4-amidinylphenylmethylene- carboxamido) -4, 5-dihydrobenzo [f] azepin-2 -one (73)
Figure imgf000147_0001
10% Pd-on-C (25 mg) catalyst was added to a solution of 3- (S) - (2, 3-Dihydrobenzo [Jb] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) amino-1- (4-hydroxyamidinylphenylmethylene- carboxamido) -4 , 5-dihydrobenzo [f] azepin-2-one (compound 72, 21 mg, 3.6 mmol) in methanol (20 mL) . The reaction mixture was hydrogenated (H2, 45 Psi) in a Parr apparatus for 2 days. The catalyst was removed by filtering and the solvent was removed under vacuum to give the title compound (10 mg, 49%). HPLC retention, 11.5 minutes; C18 column 5-75% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes, 1.0 mL/min; MS (electrospray) 548 (M + 1); ^NMR (CD3OD) δ 2.04 (m, IH) , 2.17 (m, IH) , 2.56 (m, IH) , 3.20 (t, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz), 3.21 (m, IH) , 3.78 ( , IH) , 4.40 (d, IH, J = 14.5 Hz), 4.40 ( , IH) , 4.41 (d, IH, J = 14.5 Hz), 4.60 (t, IH, J = 7.2Hz), 6.74 (d, IH, J = 7.2 Hz), 7.22 (m, 4H) , 7.37 (m, 4H) , 7.45 (s, IH) , 7.66 (d, IH, J = 7.2) , 8.55 (br s, IH) . Example 56 Preparation of 3- (S) - (2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [jb] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) amino-1- (l-amidino-4-methylene- carboxamidomethylpiperidyl) -4, 5-dihydrobenzo [f] azepin-2- one (74)
Figure imgf000148_0001
A solution of 3- (S) -2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [Jb] furanyl-5- sulfonylamino) -1- (1-methylenecarboxy) -4,5- dihydrobenzo [f] azepin-2 -one (compound 71, 91 mg, 0.22 mmol), 4- (aminomethyl) piperidine N-formamidine (compound 47, AstaTech, Inc. PA, USA, 50 mg, 0.22 mmol), EDC (42 mg, 0.22 mmol), HOBt (30 mg, 0.22 mmol), and NMM (lmL) in DMF (9 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 12 hours. RP HPLC purification gave the title compound (45 mg, 37%) . HPLC retention, 11.8 minutes; C18 column 5- 75% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes, 1.0 mL/min; MS (electrospray) 555 (M + 1); XHNMR (CD3OD) δ 1.10 (m, 2H) , 1.65 (m, 4H) , 2.00 (m, IH) , 2.15 (m, IH) , 2.58 (m, IH) , 2.96 (t, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz), 3.05 (m, 2H) , 3.19 (m, 4H) , 3.78 (m, 3H) , 4.19 (d, IH J = 14.5), 4.36 (d, 2H, J = 14.5 Hz), 4.63 (t, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz), 6.75 (d, IH, J = 7.2 Hz), 7.10 (s, IH) , 7.21 (m, 3H) , 7.36 (m, 2H) , 7.47 (s, IH) , 7.70 (s, IH) , 7.95 (br s,. IH) . Example 57 Preparation of Fmoc-Haic-methyl ester (76)
Figure imgf000149_0001
The starting material, (2S, 5S) -Fmoc-5-amino- 1,2,4,5,6, 7-hexahydro-azepino [3,2, 1-hi] indole-4-one- 2-carboxylic acid ("Fmoc-Haic") (compound 75), was purchased from Neosystem Laboratories, Strasbourg, France. Thionyl chloride (Aldrich, 0.7 mL, 9.6 mmol) was added to a solution of Fmoc-Haic (0.5 g, 1.06 mmol) in methanol (30 mL) , and the solution was stirred at room temperature for 12 hours. The solvent was removed under vacuum, and a white solid product was obtained [0.5 g, 99%, MS (electrospray) 483 (M + 1) ] .
Example 58
Preparation of N- (2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [Jb] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) -Haic-methyl ester (77)
Figure imgf000149_0002
A solution of Fmoc-Haic-methyl ester (compound 76, 0.48 g, 1 mmol) and diethylamine (Aldrich, 2 mL) in DMF (5 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 1 hour. 7-Chlorosulfonyl-2, 3-dihydrobenzo [Jb] furan (compound 2, 437 mg, 2 mmol) , and NMM (4 mL) in DMF (4 mL) was added. After stirring at room temperature for 10 hours, the mixture was purified by a flash chromatography (1:1 of hexane and EtOAc) to give the title compound [0.34 g, 77%, MS (electrospray) 443 (M + l), Rf = 0.48 (1:1 of Hexane and EtOAc) ] .
Example 59
Preparation of N- (2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [b] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) -Haic (78)
Figure imgf000150_0001
A solution of LiOH (1 M, 30 mL) aqueous was added to a solution of N- (2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [b] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) -Haic-methyl ester (compound 77, 340 mg, 0.77 mmol) in methanol (30 mL) and the mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 3 hours. RP HPLC give the title compound (330 mg, 98%) . MS (electrospray) 429 (M + 1) .
Example 60
Preparation of N- (2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [Jb] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) -Haic-aminomethylphenyl-JV-hydroxyamidine (80)
Figure imgf000151_0001
A solution of N- (2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [b] furanyl-5- sulfonyl) -Haic (compound 78, 150 mg, 0.35 mmol), 4-
(aminomethyl) benzonitrile (compound 34, 77 mg, 0.45 mmol), EDC (100 mg, 0.53 mmol), HOBt (71 mg, 0.53 mmol), and DIEA (0.3mL, 1.75 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 15 hours . Flash chromatography
(EtOAc) gave the compound 79 [133 mg, 70%, MS
(electrospray) 543 (M + 1) ] which was treated with hydroxylamine hydrochloride (Aldrich, 83 mg, 1.2 mmol) NMM (0.27 mL, 2.5 mmol) in methanol (5 mL) . The mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 13 hours. RP HPLC purification gave the title compound (44 mg, 33%) . HPLC retention, 12.4 minute; C18 column 5-75% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes, 1.0 mL/min; MS
(electrospray) 576 (M + 1); XHNMR (CD3OD) δ 2.22 (m, 2H) , 3.05 (m, 3H) , 3.26 (t, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz), 3.45 (m, IH) , 3.84 (m, IH) , 4.39 (dd, IH, J = 14.5, 3.3 Hz), 4.55 (dd, IH, J = 14.5, 3.3 Hz), 4.62 (t, IH, J = 7.2Hz), 5.03 (m, IH) , 6.80 (d, IH, J = 7.2 Hz), 7.01 (m, IH) , 7.08 (m, 2H) , 7.50 (d, IH, J = 7.2), 7.62 (m,"3H), 7.70 (s, IH) , 8.65 (br s, IH) .
Example 61
Preparation of N- ( 2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [Jb] furanyl -5- sulfonyl) -Haic-aminomethylphenylamidine (81)
Figure imgf000152_0001
10% Pd-on-C (25 mg) catalyst was added to a solution of N- ( 2 , 3-Dihydrobenzo [b] furanyl -5 -sulfonyl) - Haic-aminomethylphenyl-N-hydroxyamidine (compound 80, 10 mg, 0.6 mmol) in methanol (25 mL) . The reaction mixture was hydrogenated (H2, 45 Psi) in a Parr apparatus for 48 hours. The catalyst was removed by filtering and the solvent was removed under vacuum to give the title compound (2 mg, 21%). HPLC retention, 12.0 minute; C18 column 5-75% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes, 1.0 mL/min; MS (electrospray) 560 (M + 1) ; XHNMR (CD3OD) δ 2.21 ( , 2H) , 3.05 (m, 3H) , 3.26 (t, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz), 3.45 (m, IH) , 3.84 (m, IH) , 4.40 (dd, IH, J = 14.5, 3.3 Hz), 4.54 (dd, IH, J = 14.5, 3.3 Hz), 4.62 (t, IH, J = 7.2Hz), 5.02 (m, IH) , 6.80 (d, IH, J = 7.2 Hz), 7.01 (m, IH) , 7.08 (m, 2H) , 7.53 (d, IH, J = 7.2), 7.62 (d, IH, J = 7.2 Hz), 7.74 (s, IH) , 7.78 (d, IH, J = 7.2 Hz). Example 62 Preparation of 3- (S) - (benzylsulfonyl) amino-1- benzylmethylenecarboxy-4, 5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (83)
Figure imgf000153_0001
To a chilled solution of 1- (carbobenzoxy) methyl-3- -aminoazepin-2-one (compound 6, 2.76 g, 10 mmol) in acetonitrile (Aldrich, 50 mL) was added benzylsulfonyl chloride (compound 82, Aldrich, 1.9 g, 10 mmol) in one portion. NMM (Aldrich, 10 mL, 91 mmol) was then added dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0°C for half an hour followed by twelve hours at ambient temperature . The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the remaining residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate (150 mL) and washed two times each with 100 mL portions of IM potassium bisulfate, saturated sodium bicarbonate and saturated sodium chloride solutions. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography, eluting with 50:50 ethyl acetate/hexane. The pure product was obtained as a foam (3.9 g, 91%). TLC Rf 0.47 (1:1 of hexane/ethyl acetate) ; MS (electrospray) 431 (M + 1) ; αHNMR (CDC13) δ 1.53 (m, 3H) , 1.76 (m, IH) , 1.85 (m, IH) , 1.91 (m, IH) , 3.08 (dd, IH, J = 14.3, 7.0 Hz), 3.20 (dd, IH, J = 14.3, 7.0 Hz), 3.68 (m, IH) , 4.19 (s, 2H) , 4.20 (d, IH, J = 14.5 Hz), 4.35 (d, IH, J = 14.5 Hz), 5.20 (s, 2H) , 5.84 (d, IH, J = 3.5 Hz, NH) , 7.41 (m, 10 H) .
Example 63
Preparation of 3- (S) - (Benzylsulfonyl) amino- 1- carbohydroxymethyl-4 ,5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (84)
Figure imgf000154_0001
10% Pd-on-C (Aldrich, 400 mg) catalyst was added to a solution of 3- (S) - (benzylsulfonyl) amino-1- benzylmethylenecarboxy-4 ,5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one
(compound 83, 3.9 g, 9.1mmol) in methanol (200 mL) and benzene (50 L) and the resulting mixture was hydrogenated (45 psi of H2) on a Parr apparatus for 12 hours. The catalyst was filtered and the solvent was removed under vacuum to give a white solid (2.99 g, 96%). aHNMR (CD30D) δ 1.52 (m, 3H) , 1.66 (m, IH) , 1.90
(m, 2H) , 3.10 (dd, IH, J = 14.3, 7.0 Hz), 3.39 (dd, IH, J = 14.3, 7.0 Hz), 3.67 (m, IH) , 4.18 (s, 2H) , 4.26 (d, J = 14.5 Hz), 4.35 (d, IH, J = 14.5 Hz), 5.88 (d, IH, J = 3.5 Hz) , 7.41 (m, 5H) .
Example 64
Preparation of compound 85
Figure imgf000154_0002
A solution of 3- (S) - (Benzylsulfonyl) amino-1- carbohydroxymethyl- ,5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2- one (compound 84, 20 mg, 0.059 mmol) and trans-4- ( ert- butoxycarbonylamino) -cyclohexylmethylamine (compound 60, synthesized based on a literature procedure: Lyle, T. A.; et . al . Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters , 1997, 7 (1) , 67-72; 20 mg, 0.088 mmol), EDC (191 mg, 1 mmol) , HOBt (135 mg, 1 mmol) , and NMM (1 mL, 9 mmol) in DMF (1 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 12 hours. Flash chromatography (EtOAc) gave the title compound (17 mg, 61%). αHNMR (CDC13) δ 1.05 (m, 4H) , 1.25 (m, 4H) , 1.47 (s, 9H) , 1.76 (m, 6H) , 1.95 (m, 2H) , 3.00 -3.40 (m, 5H) , 3.60 (m, IH) , 3.95 (d, 2H, J = 1.5 Hz), 4.25 (d, IH, J = 14.5 Hz), 4.35 (d, IH, J = 14.5 Hz), 5.80 (d, IH, J = 3.5 Hz), 6.21 (br t, IH, NH) , 7.36 (m, 5H) .
Example 65
Preparation of compound 86
Figure imgf000155_0001
A solution of 4 M HCl in dioxane (10 mL) was added to compound 85 and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours. RP HPLC gave the title compound (6 mg, 49%) . HPLC retention, 10.2 minute; C18 column 5-50% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes, 1.0 mL/min; MS (electrospray) 451 (M + 1) ; ^ MR (D20) δ 1.15 (m, 3H) , 1.55 (m, 4H) , 1.95 (m, 4H) , 2.10 (m, 4H) , 3.25 (m, 3H) , 3.31 (m, IH) , 3.45 (m, IH) , 3.90 (d, IH, J = 7.2 Hz) , 4.05 (d, IH, J = 14.5 Hz) , 4.32 (d, IH J = 14.5 Hz) , 4.67 (s, 2H) , 7.55 (s, 5H) .
Example 66 Preparation of compound 87
Figure imgf000156_0001
A solution of 3- (S) - (Benzylsulfonyl) amino-1- carbohydroxymethyl-4, 5,6, 7-tetrahydro-azepin-2-one (compound 84, 5 mg, 0.015 mmol), 2-amino-5-methylamino- 6-methylpyridine (compound 45, Sanderson, P. E. J. et . al. J. Medicinal Chemistry, 1998, 41, 4466-4474, 5mg, 0.036 mmol), EDC (Aldrich, 5 mg, 0.026 mmol), HOBt (Aldrich, 5 mg, 0.037 mmol), and 4-methylmorpholine (Aldrich, 0.5 mL) in DMF (1 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 13 hours. RP HPLC purification (acetonitrile-water) gave the title compound (2 mg, 30%). HPLC retention, 10.2 minute; C18 column 10-75% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes, 1.0 mL/min; MS (electrospray) 460 (M + 1); XHNMR (D20) δ 1.55 (m, 4H) , 1.80 (m, 2H) , 2.20 (s, 3H) , 3.22 (m, IH) , 3.45 (m, IH) , 3.90 (m, IH) , 4.20 (m, 6H) , 6.65 (d, IH, J = 8.0 Hz), 7.42 (m, 5H) , 7.65 (d, IH, J = 8.0 Hz). Example 67 Preparation of compound 88
Figure imgf000157_0001
A solution of 3- (S) - (Benzylsulfonyl) amino-1- carbohydroxymethyl-4 , 5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one
(compound 87, 5 mg, 0.015 mmol), 4-
(aminomethyl) phenylamidine (compound 36, 5 mg, 0.033 mmol), EDC (Aldrich, 5 mg, 0.026 mmol), HOBt (Aldrich, 5 mg, 0.037 mmol), and 4-methylmorpholine (Aldrich, 0.5 mL) in DMF (1 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for
13 hours. RP HPLC gave the title compound (3 mg, 14%) .
HPLC retention, 10.2 minute; C18 column 5-75% acetonitrile in water over 25 minutes, 1.0 mL/min; MS
(electrospray) 472 (M + 1); XHNMR (D20) δ 1.75 (m, 4H) ,
1.86 (m, 2H) , 3.30 (m, IH) , 3.46 (m, IH) , 3.95 (m, 2H) ,
4.24 (m, 4H) , 4.58 (d, IH J = 14.2 Hz), 7.36 (m, 7H) , 7.60 (m, 2H) .
Preparation of 5- (Aminomethyl) indazole Intermediate 63
(Figure 14) -- Examples 68 to 73
Example 68
Preparation of 4- (hydroxymethyl) -2-methylaniline (90)
Figure imgf000157_0002
(Literature reference for making this compound see: Sun, J.-H.; Teleha, C. A.; Yan, J.-S.; Rodgers, J. D.; Nugiel, D. A. J. Org. Chem . 1997, 62, 5627-5629) .
A solution of 3-methyl-4-nitrobenzyl alcohol (compound 89, 8.5 g, 50.9 mmol) in ethanol (100 mL) was stirred at room temperature, while 10% Pd/C (1.0 g) was added in one portion. The resulting suspension was hydrogenated (10 psi) in a Parr apparatus at room temperature for 1.5 hours . The catalyst was removed by filtration, and solvent was evaporated under vacuum to give the title compound (90, 6.9 g, 99%). MS . (electrospray) 138 (M + 1); *H N MR (CDC13) δ 2.16 (s, 3H) , 2.72 (br s, 3H) , 4.52 (s, 2H) , 6.64 (d, IH, J = 8.0 Hz), 7.02 (d, IH, J = 8.0 Hz), 7.05 (s, IH) .
Use of high pressure (30 Psi) of hydrogen and a long reaction time (8 hours) resulted a hydrogenolysis product. The same starting material (89) (21.05 g, 126 mmol) yielded 2 , 4-dimethylaniline (15.20 g, 100%) under such conditions. MS (electrospray) 122 (M + 1); αH N MR (CDC13) δ 2.14 (s, 3H) , 2.23 (s, 3H) , 3.72 (br s, IH) , 6.58 (d, IH, J = 8.0 Hz), 6.84 (d, IH, J = 8.0 Hz), 6.87 (s, IH) . Example 69 Preparation of l-acetyl-5- (acetoxymethyl) indazole (91)
Figure imgf000158_0001
To a suspension of 2-methyl-4- (hydroxymethyl) aniline (compound 90, 4.0 g, 29 mmol) and potassium acetate (Aldrich, 8.6 g, 88 mmol) in chloroform (Calbiochem, 60 mL) , was added acetic anhydride (Aldrich, 8.3 mL, 88 mmol) at room temperature, and the temperature was allowed to increase to 45°C. The mixture was then heated to reflux temperature for 2 hours under nitrogen. After cooling to room temperature, isoamylnitrite (Aldrich, 7.8 mL, 88 mmol) and 18-crown-6 (Aldrich, 1.5 g, 0.6 mmol) were added. The reaction mixture was heated at its reflux temperature for 28 hours. After returning to room temperature, the mixture was further treated with acetic anhydride (10 mL) and the solution was stirred at room temperature for 12 hours. The reaction mixture was diluted with methylene chloride (600 mL) and washed with saturated aqueous NaHC03 aqueous solution (300 mL) , water (300 mL) and brine (50 mL) . After drying (Na2S04) , the organic solvent was removed under vacuum to give a yellow oil which was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel (85:15 hexane-ethyl acetate) to yield the title compound (91, 6.21 g, 91%). TLC R_ 0.45 (70:30 hexane-ethyl acetate) ; MS (electrospray) 233 (M + 1) ; XH N MR (CDC13) δ 2.12 (s, 3H) , 2.79 (app d, 3H, J = 0.4
Hz), 5.23 (s, 2H) , 7.56 (dd, IH, J = 8.8, 1.6 Hz), 7.74 (t, IH, J = 0.8 Hz), 8.12 (s, IH) , 8.43 (dd, IH, J = 8.8, 0.6 Hz) . Example 70 Preparation of 5- (bromomethyl) -IH- indazole Hydrogen Bromide (92)
Figure imgf000159_0001
A suspension of l-acetyl-5- (acetoxymethyl) indazole (91) (3.0 g, 13 mmol) in aqueous hydrobromic acid (15 mL, 226 mmol) was stirred at room temperature for 25 hours . The solid was collected on a Buchner funnel and dried under vacuum for 12 hours. The filtrate was stirred at room temperature for additional 24 hours and more solid was collected. After drying under vacuum, title compound was obtained as a yellow solid (92, 3.48 g, 92%) which was used in the next synthesis step without further purification. H NMR (CDC13) δ 4.88 (s, 2H) , 7.43 (d, IH, J = 8.8), 7.56 (d, IH, J = 8.8 Hz), 7.87 (s, IH) , 8.10 (s, IH) . Example 71
Preparation of 5- (bromomethyl) -1- (2- tetrahydropyranyl) indazole (93)
Figure imgf000160_0001
A yellow suspension of 5- (bromomethyl) -IH-indazole hydrogen bromide (compound 92 , 3.0 g, 14 mmol) and 3,4- dihydro-2H-pyran (Aldrich, 2.4 g, 29 mmol) in THF (100 mL) was heated at reflux temperature for 2 hours. After cooling down to room temperature, the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 12 hours under nitrogen. The reaction mixture was diluted with methylene chloride (250 mL) , washed with saturated aqueous NaHC03, water and brine. After drying (MgS0 ) , the solvent was removed under vacuum to give a yellow oil. Flash chromatography yielded the title compound (93, 3.34 g, 80%). TLC Rf 0.58 (70:30 hexane-ethyl acetate); MS (electrospray) 295, 297 (M + 1); XH N MR (CDC13) δ 1.57-1.84 (m, 3H) , 2.16 ( , 2H) , 2.55 ( , IH) , 3.75 (m, IH) , 4.01 (m, IH) , 4.65 (s, 2H) , 5.71 (d, IH, J = 9.2 Hz), 7.44 (d, IH, J = 8.8 Hz), 7.59 (d, IH, J = 8.8 Hz), 7.73 (s, IH) , 8.00 (s, IH) . Example 72
Preparation of 5- (azidomethyl) -1- (2- tetrahydropyranyl) indazole (94)
Figure imgf000161_0001
To a solution of 5- (bromomethyl) -1- (2- tetrahydropyranyl) indazole (compound 93, 3.0 g, 10.2 mmol) in DMF (30 mL) , was added with sodium azide (Aldrich, 2.64 g, 40.6 mmol) in one portion. The suspension was heated at 90°C for 30 minutes and a yellow solution formed. After cooling to room temperature, the reaction mixture was poured into water
(100 mL) and extracted with ether (2 x 150 mL) . Combined organic layers were washed with brine, then dried (MgS04)/. Evaporation of solvent gave the product
(94) as a yellow oil (2.61 g, 99%). TLC R. 0.63 (60:40 hexane-ethyl acetate) ; MS (electrospray) 258 (M + 1) ; lH NMR (CDC13) δ 2.03-2.15 (m, 2H) , 2.55 (m, IH) , 3.72 (m, IH) , 4.02 (m, IH) , 4.52 (s, IH) , 5.71 (d, IH, J = 9.4 Hz), 7.32 (d, IH, J = 8.8 Hz), 7.56 (d, IH, J = 8.8 Hz), 7.63 (s, IH) , 8.00 (s, IH) . Example 73
Preparation of 5- (aminomethyl) -1- (2 - tetrahydropyranyl) indazole (63)
Figure imgf000161_0002
A solution of LiAlH4 (Aldrich, 10.5 mL, 10.5 mmol, 5 1.0 M) in THF was added dropwise into a yellow solution of 5- (azidomethyl) -1- (2-tetrahydropyranyl) indazole (compound 94, 2.6 g, 10.1 mmol) in THF (30 mL) at 0°C. The addition time was 10 minutes and gas was released. After stirring at 0°C for 1 hour, NaOH (1.0M, 1.5 L) ■ was added. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to ® room temperature. Ethyl acetate (100 mL) was added, and the suspension was filtered (Celite) . The filter cake was washed with an addition portion of ethyl acetate (40 mL) . Combined organic layers were evaporated under vacuum to give free amine 63 (2.14 g, 92%) . MS (electrospray) 232.5 (M + 1); 'H NMR (CDC13) δ 1.61 (m, 3H) , 2.02 (m, 2H) , 2.50 (m, IH) , 2.83 (br s, 2H) , 3.68 (m, IH) , 3.85 (s, 2H) , 3.95 (m, IH) , 5.62 (d, IH, J = 9.2 Hz), 7.29 (d, IH, J = 8.8 Hz), 7.48 (d, IH, J = 8.8 Hz), 7.53 (s, IH) , 7.92 (s, IH) .
0 Preparation of Intermediate 102 (Figure 15)
Examples 74 to 80 Example 74 Preparation of 3- (Hydroxymethyl) -6-methylaniline (96)
Figure imgf000162_0001
A solution of 3-nitro-4-methylbenzyl alcohol (20 g, 120.0 mmol) (95) in ethyl acetate (500 mL) was stirred at room temperature, while 10% Pd/C (1.0 g) was added in one portion. The resulting suspension was hydrogenated 0 (10 psi) at room temperature under a hydrogen-filled balloon for 48 hours. The catalyst was removed by filtration, and solvent was evaporated under vacuum to give an 1:1 mixture (16.1 g) of the title compound (51%) and a by-product, 2, 5-dimethylaniline. This mixture was used in the procedure of Example 75 without further separation. The by-product is removed during the flash column chromatography step of Example 75. For the title compound: MS (electrospray) 138 (M + 1) ; *H NMR (CD3OD) δ 2.14 (s, 3H) , 4.54 (s, 2H) , 7.12 (d, IH, J = 7.6 Hz), 7.19 (d, IH, J = 7.6 Hz), 7.30 (s, IH) .
Use of a high pressure (30 Psi) of hydrogen or use of alcohol as a solvent in the hydrogenation step led almost exclusively to 2 , 5-dimethylaniline as a hydrogenation product, in high yield (99%) . MS
(electrospray) 122 (M + 1); *H NMR (CD30D) δ 2.13 (s, 3H) ,
2.46 (s, 3H) , 6.62 (d, IH, J = 7.6 Hz), 6.72 (d, IH, J =
7.6 Hz) , 6.94 (s, IH) .
Example 75
Preparation of 3- (hydroxymethyl) -6-methyl-N-
(methylcarbonyl) aniline (97)
o °γ Me -vγN NH
Me" H
^ CH3
To a solution of an approximately 1:1 mixture of 3- (hydroxymethyl) -6-methylaniline, (8.05 g, 58.8 mmol)
(96) and 2 , 5-dimethylaniline in chloroform (290 mL) , was added acetic anhydride (20 mL, 206 mmol) and potassium acetate (20 g, 202 mmol) . The resulting mixture was heated to its reflux temperature for 2 hours. The mixture was then concentrated and purified by a flash column chromatography (1:1 of hexane-ethyl acetate) which also removed the by-product from Example 74 to give the title compound (12.02 g, 92%). TLC R£: 0.52 (ethyl acetate) ; MS (electrospray) 222 (M + 1) ; *H N MR
(CDC13) δ 2.09 (s, 3H) , 2.21 (s, 3H) , 2.25 (s, 3H) , 5.06
(s, 2H) , 7.00 (br s, IH, NH) , 7.08 (d, IH, J = 7.6 Hz),
7.18 (d, IH, J = 7.6 Hz), 7.81 (s, IH) .
Example 76
Preparation of 1 -Acetyl- 6 - (acetoxymethyl) indazole (98)
Figure imgf000164_0001
To a suspension of 3- (hydroxymethyl) -6 -methyl-N- (methylcarbonyl) aniline (10.0 g, 45 mmol) (97) and potassium acetate (8.6 g, 88 mmol) in chloroform (300 mL) , was added acetic anhydride (8.3 mL, 88 mmol), isoamylnitrite (35 mL, 300 mmol) and 18 -crown- 6 (1.5 g, 0.6 mmol) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was heated at its reflux temperature for 28 hours. The reaction mixture was diluted with methylene chloride (600 mL) and washed with saturated NaHC03 aqueous solution (300 mL) , water (300 mL) and brine (50 mL) . After drying (Na2S04) , the organic solvent was removed under vacuum to give a yellow oil which was purified by a flash chromatography on silica gel (85:15 hexane-ethyl acetate) to yield the title compound (98) (10.01 g, 95%). TLC Rf 0.47 (70:30 of hexane-ethyl acetate); MS (electrospray) 233 (M + 1); XH N MR (CDC13) δ 2.10 (s, 3H) , 2.78 (s, 3H) , 5.27 (s, 2H) , 7.36 (d, IH, J = 8.0 Hz), 7.73 (d, IH, J = 8.0 Hz), 8.12 (s, IH) , 8.47 (s, IH) . Example 77
Preparation of 6- (Bromomethyl) -IH- indazole Hydrogen
Bromide (99)
Figure imgf000165_0001
• HBr
A suspension of l-acetyl-6- (acetoxymethyl) indazole (9.5 g, 41 mmol) (98) in aqueous hydrobromic acid (48% aqueous solution, 20 mL, 177 mmol) was stirred at room temperature for 46 hours. The solid was collected on a Buchner funnel and dried under vacuum for 12. hours. The filtrate was stirred at room temperature for additional 24 hours and more solid was collected. After drying under vacuum, title compound was obtained as a yellow solid (10.0 g, 84%) which was used as such without further purification. MS (electrospray) 211 (M + l for 79Br) , 213 (M + l for 81Br) ; XH N MR (CDC13) δ 4.85 (s, 2H) , 7.65 (d, IH, J = 8.4 Hz) , 7.78 (d, IH, J = 8.4 Hz) , 8.05 (s, IH) , 8.10 (s, IH) . Example 78
Preparation of 6- (bromomethyl) -1- (2- tetrahydropyranyl) indazole (100)
P
Figure imgf000165_0002
A yellow suspension of 6- (bromomethyl) -IH-indazole hydrogen bromide ( 9 . 0 g, 43 mmol) (99) and 3,4-dihydro- 2H-pyran (7.2 g, 86 mmol) in THF (200 mL) was heated at its reflux temperature for 2 hours. .After cooling down to room temperature, the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 12 hours under nitrogen. The 5 reaction solution was diluted with methylene chloride
(500 L) , washed with saturated NaHC03, water and brine. After drying (MgS04) , the solvent was removed under vacuum to give a yellow oil. Flash chromatography yielded the title compound (6.6 g, 72%). TLC R£ 0.52
(80:20 of hexane-ethyl acetate); MS (electrospray) 295, 10 297 (M + 1); *H N MR (CDC13) δ 1.57-1.84 (m, 3H) , 2.16 (m, 2H) , 2.55 (m, IH) , 3.75 (m, IH) , 4.01 (m, IH) , 4.65 (s, 2H) , 5.71 (d, IH, J = 9.2 Hz), 7.44 (d, IH, J = 8.8 Hz), 7.59 (d, IH, J = 8.8 Hz), 7.73 (s, IH) , 8.00 (s, IH) . Example 79
Preparation of 6- (Azidomethyl) -1- (2-
15 tetrahydropyranyl) indazole (101)
Figure imgf000166_0001
20 To a solution of 6- (bromomethyl) -1- (2- tetrahydropyranyl) indazole (4.0 g, 14 mmol) (100) in DMF (30 mL) was added sodium azide (6 g, 92 mmol) in one portion. The suspension was heated at 90°C for 30 minutes and a yellow solution was formed. After cooling down to room temperature, the reaction mixture was
25 poured into water (100 mL) and extracted with ether (2 x
150 mL) . Combined organic layers were washed with brine then dried (MgS04) . Evaporation of solvent gave an yellow oil which was purified by column chromatography to yield title compound (2.91 g, 83%). TLC R£ 0.31
_0 (70:30 of hexane-ethyl acetate); MS (electrospray) 258
(M + 1); "H NMR (CDC13) δ 1.75 (m, 3H) , 2.10 (m, 2H) ,
2.55 (m, IH) , 3.72 (m, IH) , 4.01 (m, IH) , 4.48 (s, 2H) ,
5.73 (dd, IH, J = 8.2, 2.8 Hz), 7.12 (dd, IH, J = 8.2, 0.8 Hz), 7.55 (s, IH) , 7.71 (d, IH, J = 8.2 Hz), 8.02 (s, IH) . Example 80
Preparation of 6- (Aminomethyl) -1- (2- tetrahydropyran 1 ) indazo1e (102)
Figure imgf000167_0001
A solution of LiAlH4 (9 mL, 9 mmol, 1.0 M) in THF was added dropwise to a yellow solution of 6- (azidomethyl) -1- (2-tetrahydropyranyl) indazole (2.4 g, 9 mmol) (101) in THF (30 mL) at 0°C. The addition time was 10 minutes, and gas came out. After stirring at 0°C for 1 hour, NaOH (1.0 m, 1.5 mL) was added. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature. Ethyl acetate (100 mL) was added, and the suspension was filtered through (Celite) . The filter cake was washed with an addition portion of ethyl acetate (40 mL) . Combined organic layers were evaporated under vacuum to five essentially pure amine (2.1 g, 97%). MS (electrospray) 232.5 (M + 1); "H NMR (CDClj) δ 1.67 (m, 3H) , 2.01 (m, 2H) , 2.48 (m, IH) , 3.85 (m, IH) , 3.94 (m, IH) , 5.75 (d, IH, J = 9.4 Hz), 7.14 (d, IH, J = 8.4 Hz), 7.62 (s, IH) , 7.62 (d, IH, J = 8.4
Hz), 7.93 (s, IH) Preparation of Intermediate 108 (Figure 16) Examples 81 to 84
Example 81 Preparation of (104)
Figure imgf000168_0001
To a solution of 2 , 5-dibromo-4-fluorotoluene (Aldrich, 50.00 g, 186.6 mmol) (103) in DMF (100 mL) was added CuCN (Aldrich, 33.40 g, 373.2 mmol) and the mixture was refluxed under nitrogen for 6 hours. After cooling to room temperature, the mixture was partitioned between 10% KCN water solution and ether. The water layer was extracted with ether, and the combined extracts were washed by brine twice and dried over Na2S04. After filtration and evaporation, the crude product was purified on a silica gel column eluting with hexane-EtOAc (from 95:5 to 90:10) to provide the title compound as- a yellow-green solid (22.66 g, 76% yield) . TLC Rt 0.63 (hexane: EtOAc 4:1); m.p. 141-143°C; *H NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) : δ 7.60 (d, IH, J 6 . 1 Hz), 7.47 (d, IH, J 8.2 Hz) , 2.58 (s, 3H) .
Example 82 Preparation of (105)
Figure imgf000168_0002
A mixture of 2 , 5-dicyano-4-fluorotoluene (compound 104, 10.95 g, 68.4 mmol) and anhydrous hydrazine (4.5 mL, 143.6 mmol) in anhydrous ethanol (342 mL) was refluxed under nitrogen for 17 hours. After cooling down to the room temperature, a yellow crystalline solid product precipitated out. The solid was filtered, washed by ethanol, and dried under high vacuum to provide yellow crystalline product (4.26 g) . The filtrate was evaporated and purified on a silica gel column eluting with dichloromethane and 5% methanol in dichloromethane to provide additional product (6.47 g) . Total 10.73 g of yellow crystalline solid product (105) was obtained (91% yield). TLC Rf 0.36 (5% MeOH in CH2C12) ; -Η NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) : δ 9.05 (bs, IH) , 7.64 (s, IH) , 7.48 (s, IH) , 4.12 (bs, 2H) , 2.61 (s, 3H) . Example 83 Preparation of (106) and (107)
Figure imgf000169_0001
106
Figure imgf000169_0002
107
To a solution of IM borane in THF (40 mL, 40 mmol) , was added a solution of compound 105 (0.80 g, 4.65 mmol) in anhydrous THF (15 mL) at 0°C under nitrogen. The reaction mixture was stirred from 0°C to room temperature under nitrogen for 15 hours. To the reaction solution were added 6N HCl (30 L) slowly, followed by water (30 mL) and methanol (200 mL) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 6 hours. Most of THF and methanol were evaporated to give the intermediate 106, which was neutralized to pH ~13 by NaOH, and then adjusted to pH -11 by NaHC03.
A solution of (Boc)20 in THF (15 mL, 15 mmol), was added to the above solution of 106 in THF and methanol, and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15 hours. The product was extracted with dichloromethane, and the combined extracts were washed by brine and dried over Na2S04. After filtration and evaporation, the product was purified on a silica gel column eluting with 1% and 2% methanol in dichloromethane to provide an off-white product (compound 107, 1.05 g, 60% yield). TLC Rf 0.88 (5% MeOH in CH2C12) ; XH NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : δ 7.27 (s, IH) , 7.08 (s, IH) , 5.90 (bs, 2H) , 4.76 (bs, IH) , 4.29 (bd, 2H, J 5.8 Hz), 2.25 (s, 3H) , 1.62 (s, 9H) , 1.46 (s, 9H) . Example 84 Preparation of (108)
Figure imgf000170_0001
Compound 107 (795 mg, 2.11 mmol) was dissolved in 2 M HCl methanol/dioxane (1:1) solution (20 mL) . The reaction solution was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours and a lot of white precipitate was formed. After evaporation of solvent, the residue was suspended in methanol (30 mL) , and to the mixture was added hydroxide form basic resin (AG 1-X8 Resin from Bio-Rad Laboratories) to make a clear solution and adjust the pH ~11. The resin was filtered and washed with methanol thoroughly. The methanol solution was evaporated and the residue was dried under high vacuum to provide the free amine compound 108 as a white solid (395 mg, 100% yield). *H NMR (400 MHz, CD30D) : δ 7.44 (s, IH) , 7.26 (s, IH) , 3.90 (s, 2H) , 2.37 (s, 3H) , 1.62 (s, 9H) .
Preparation of Intermediate 116 (Figure 17) Examples 85 to 90 Example 85
Preparation of (110)
Figure imgf000171_0001
To a solution of 4 -bromo-3-fluorotoluene (109) (Aldrich, 50.00 g, 264.5 mmol) in DMF (100 mL) was added CuCN (Aldrich, 23.69 g, 264.5 mmol). The mixture was refluxed under nitrogen for 5 hours. After cooling to the room temperature, CuBr precipitated out. The mixture was diluted with ether (500 mL) , filtered, and CuBr solid was washed by ether. The combined ether solution was washed with brine three times and dried over MgS04. After filtration, evaporation and high vacuum dry, an off-white solid product was obtained (32.50 g, 94% yield). TLC Rt 0.54 (hexane :EtOAc 5:1), H-NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) : δ 7.48 (dd, IH, J 8.2 Hz, J 6.1 Hz), 7.05 (d, IH, J 8.2 Hz), 7.01 (d, IH, J 10.1 Hz) , 2.42 (s, 3H) . Example 86 Preparation of (111)
Figure imgf000172_0001
To a solution of 4-cyano-3-fluorotoluene (Compound 110, 28.51 g, 211.0 mmol) in carbon tetrachloride
(Aldrich, 844 mL) were added NBS (Aldrich, 41.31 g, 162.8 mmol) and AIBN (Aldrich, 2.43 g, 14.8 mmol). The mixture was degassed with nitrogen for three times, and then was refluxed at 85°C for 4.5 hours. After standing at room temperature overnight, and the mixture was filtered. The solid by-product was washed with CCl4. The filtrate was evaporated and purified on a silica gel column, eluting with hexane-EtOAc (from 20:1 to 5:1) . The title product (24.54 g, 54% yield) was obtained as a colorless liquid which solidified after standing at room temperature. TLC i?f0.44 (hexane :EtOAc 10:1), ^-NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) : δ 7.61 (dd, IH, J" 7.9 Hz, J 6.7 Hz), 7.28
(d, IH, J 6.7 Hz), 7.27 (d, IH, J" 7.0 Hz), 4.44 (s, 2H) .
Example 87 Preparation of (112)
Figure imgf000172_0002
To a solution of -bromo-4-cyano-3-fluorotoluene (compound 111, 7.67 g, 35.83 mmol) in DMF (250 mL) were added phthalimide (Aldrich, 8.74 g, 59.44 mmol) and Cs2C03 (Aldrich, 35.21 g, 108.1 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature under nitrogen for half an hour, and then poured into water (1 L) . The product precipitated out of the water solution. After filtration, washing by water (500 mL) and methanol (100 mL) , and high vacuum dry, the product was obtained as a white crystalline solid (9.15 g, 91% yield). 'H-NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) : δ 7.88 (dd, 2H, J 3.05 Hz, J 5.2 Hz), 7.76 (dd, 2H, J 3.05 Hz, J 5.5 Hz), 7.58 (dd, 2H, J 7.9 Hz, J 6.4 Hz), 7.31 (d, 2H, J" 7.9 Hz), 7.27 (d, 2H, J 12.5 Hz) , 4.87 (s, 2H) . Example 88 Preparation of (114)
Figure imgf000173_0001
To a solution of compound 112 (8.50 g, 30.33 mmol) in n-butanol (Aldrich, 150 mL) was added anhydrous hydrazine (Aldrich, 2.95 mL, 94.02 mmol). The mixture was refluxed under nitrogen for 5 minutes. A voluminous precipitate formed which was removed by filtering out after cooling the mixture to the room temperature, n- Butanol was removed by evaporation. The residue (compound 113) was dissolved in dichloromethane; (Boc)20 (7.28 g, 33.36 mmol) was added and the resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. After evaporation of solvent, the residue was purified on a silica gel column eluting with hexane-EtOAc (from 5:1 to 3:1) to provide compound 114 as a white crystalline solid (7.52 g, 99% yield). TLC Rf 0.37 (hexane :EtOAc 3:1), "H-NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) : δ 7.57 (dd, IH, J 7.6 Hz, J 6.7 Hz), 7.16 (d, J 7.6 Hz, IH) , 7.14 (d, IH, J 9.8 Hz), 5.01 (bs, IH) , 4.36 (bd, 2H, J 5.8 Hz), 1.46 (s, 9H) .
Example 89 Preparation of (115)
Figure imgf000174_0001
To a solution of compound 114 (7.52 g, 30.3 mmol) in n-butanol (150 mL) was added hydrazine (Aldrich, 2.86 mL, 91.0 mmol) . The reaction mixture was refluxed under nitrogen for 22 hours. After evaporation of solvent, the residue was purified on a silica gel column eluting with 5% methanol in dichloromethane to provide product compound 115 (5.13 g, 64% yield) as a light yellow crystalline solid. TLC Rf 0.33 (5% MeOH in CH2C12) , *H- NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : δ 8.85 (bs, IH) , 7.51 (d, IH, J 8.2 Hz), 7.22 (s, IH) , 7.10 (d, IH, J" 8.2 Hz), 4.91
(bs, IH) , 4.41 (bd, 2H, J 5.5 Hz), 4.08 (bs, 2H) , 1.47
(s, 9H) . Example 90 Preparation of (116)
Figure imgf000175_0001
Compound 115 (5.13 g, 19.6 mmol) was dissolved in a 2M HCl dioxane solution (60 mL) . The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for half an hour. After evaporation of solvent, a light yellow solid was obtained which was suspended in methanol (300 mL) . To the mixture was added hydroxide form basic resin (AG 1- X8 Resin from Bio-Rad Laboratories) to adjust the pH to -10. After filtration, the resin was washed by methanol thoroughly. The methanol solution was evaporated and the residue was dried under high vacuum to provide compound 116 as a light yellow solid (3.17 g, 100% yield). "H NMR (400 MHz, D20) : δ 7.58 (d, IH, J" 8.2 Hz), 7.25 (s, IH) , 6.99 (d, IH, J 8.2 Hz), 3.85 (s, 2H) .
Preparation of Intermediate 120 (Figure 18) Examples 91 to 93 Example 91 Preparation of (117)
Figure imgf000175_0002
To a solution of -bromo-4-cyano-3-fluorotoluene (compound 111, 10.00 g, 46.72 mmol) in DMF (100 mL) was added sodium azide (Aldrich, 3.64 g, 56.06 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature under nitrogen for 15 hours, and then poured into water (500 mL) . The product was extracted with ether and the combined extracts were washed with brine three times, and dried over Na2S04. After filtration, evaporation and high vacuum dry, a light yellow crystalline product (compound 117, 8.22 g, 100% yield) was obtained which was used for the next step without further purification. TLC Rf 0.72 (hexane:EtOAc 5:1), "H-NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) : δ 7.64 (dd, IH, J 1 . 6 Hz, J 6 . 1 Hz), 7.22 (d, IH, J" 6.7 Hz), 7.21 (d, IH, J" 10.4 Hz), 4.47 (s, 2H) . Example 92 Preparation of (119)
Figure imgf000176_0001
To a solution of -azido-4-cyano-3-fluorotoluene (compound 117, 1.75 g, 10 mmol) in THF (46 mL) and water (2 mL) , was slowly added triphenylphosphine (Aldrich, 2.89 g, 11 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15 hours, and then the solvents were evaporated. The residue was dissolved in 0.25 M HCl (75 mL, 18.7 mmol) . The water solution was washed by EtOAc until no UN active compounds were detected, neutralized to pH -10 by 2M ΝaOH solution, and then extracted with dichloromethane. The combined extracts were dried over Νa SO, . After filtration, the filtrate was condensed to 50 mL and used in the next step without further isolation. To that solution was added IM (Boc)20 in THF (Aldrich, 11 mL, 11 mmol) . The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for overnight. The solvents were evaporated and the residue was dissolved in dichloromethane (200 mL) , washed by 0.5 N HCl, saturated aqueous NaHC03 and brine, and dried over Na2S04. After filtration, evaporation and high vacuum dry, the product (compound 114) was obtained as a light yellow crystalline solid (2.48 mg, 99% yield). TLC Rt 0.40 (hexane:EtOAc 3:1), 'H-NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) : δ 7.57 (dd, IH, J 7.9 Hz, J 6.4 Hz), 7.17 (d, IH, J 7.9 Hz), 7.14 (d, IH, J 9.5 Hz), 5.02 (bs, IH) , 4.36 (bd, 2H, J" 5.5 Hz) , 1.46 (s, 9H) .
The following procedure is based on a literature reference (M. G. Palermo, Tetrahedron Lett. 37 (17), 1996, 2885-2886) for making the similar compounds. To the solution of acetohydroxamic acid (Aldrich, compound 118, 450.4 mg, 6.0 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (4 mL) was added t-BuOK (Aldrich, 673.3 mg, 6.0 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature under nitrogen for 30 minutes to get a gel-like suspension. Compound 114 (1.00 g, 4.0 mmol) was introduced, and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature under nitrogen for 15 hours and then at 70°C for 24 hours. The mixture was cooled to room temperature, poured into water, and extracted with EtOAc. The combined extracts were washed with brine five times and dried over Na2S04. After filtration and evaporation, the crude product was purified on a silica gel column eluting with hexane- EtOAc (from 4:1 to 1:1) to give some recovered compound 114 (415 mg, 1.66 mmol, 41%) and the product 119 as a white crystalline solid (583 mg, 55% yield, 95% yield based on the recovered starting material) . TLC Rt 0.09 (hexane:EtOAc 3:1); "H-NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) : δ 7.47 (d, IH, J 8.1 Hz), 7.34 (s, IH) , 7.18 (d, IH, J" 8.1 Hz), 4.97 (bs, IH) , 4.45 (bd, 2H, J" 5.5 Hz), 4.36 (bs, 2H) , 1.47 (s, 9H) . Example 93 Preparation of (120)
Figure imgf000178_0001
Compound 119 (580 mg, 2.20 mmol) was dissolved in 2M HCl in methanol/dioxane (1:1) (20 mL) . The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for half an hour and a voluminous white precipitate formed. After evaporation of solvents and co-evaporation with dichloromethane, the residue was suspended in methanol
(20 mL) , and to the mixture was added hydroxide form basic resin (AG 1-X8 Resin from Bio-Rad Laboratories) to make a clear solution and adjust the pH to -10. The resin was filtered and washed with methanol thoroughly. The methanol solution was evaporated and the residue was dried under high vacuum to provide a free amine
(compound 120) as a white solid (356 mg, 100% yield) . Preparation of Intermediate 127 (Figure 19) Examples 94 to 99
Example 94 Preparation of (122)
Figure imgf000179_0001
To a solution of 2-chloro-3-cyano-6-methylpyridine (compound 121, Aldrich, 10 g, 65.54 mmol) in carbon tetrachloride (250 mL) , were added NBS (Aldrich, 12.83 g, 72.09 mmol) and benzoyl peroxide (1.59 g, 6.55 mmol). The reaction mixture was degassed and charged with nitrogen three times, and then refluxed at 85°C for 6 hours. After cooling to room temperature, the solid byproduct was removed by filtering and washed by CC14. The filtrate was evaporated and purified on a silica gel column eluting with hexane-EtOAc (from 10:1 to 5:1). The product 122 (5.28 g, 35% yield) was obtained as a light yellow solid. TLC Rf 0.35 (hexane :EtOAc 5:1), *H- NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : δ 8.01 (d, IH, J 1 . 9 Hz), 7.53 (d, IH, J 1 . 9 Hz) , 4.50 (s, 2H) . Example 95 Preparation of (123)
Figure imgf000179_0002
To a solution of α-bromo-2-chloro-3-cyano-6- methylpyridine (compound 122, 5.28 g, 22.83 mmol) in DMF
(50 mL) , was added sodium azide (Aldrich, 1.78 g, 27.40 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature under nitrogen for 15 hours, and then poured into water
(300 mL) . The product was extracted with ether, the combined extracts were washed with brine three times, and dried over MgS04. After filtration and evaporation, the crude product was purified on a silica gel column eluting with hexane-EtOAc (from 9:1 to 5:1) to provide a product 123 as a light yellow solid (3.48 g, 79% yield) . TLC Rt 0.11 (hexane:EtOAc 9:1), 'H-NMR (400 MHz, CDC13): δ 8.03 (d, IH, J 7.9 Hz), 7.47 (d, IH, J 7.9 Hz), 4.57
(s, 2H) . Example 96 Preparation of (124)
Figure imgf000180_0001
To a solution of α-azido-2-chloro-3-cyano-6- methylpyridine (compound 123, 3.48 g, 17.98 mmol) in THF (84 mL) and water (4 mL) , was added triphenylphosphine (5.19 g, 19.77 mmol) slowly at 0°C. The reaction mixture was stirred at a temperature of from 0°C to room temperature for 15 hours. During this time the color of the solution changed from light yellow to green, and then to deep red color. After evaporation of the solvents, the residue was dissolved in 0.25M HCl (100 mL, 25 mmol) . The aqueous solution was washed with EtOAc to give a colorless solution, and then neutralized to pH = 11 with 2M NaOH solution. The free amine was extracted with dichloromethane and the combined extracts were dried over Na2S04. After filtration, evaporation and high vacuum dry, a green crystalline solid product (124) was obtained (1.58 g, 52% yield) . "H-NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) : δ 7.96 (d, IH, J" 7.9 Hz), 7.45 (d, IH, J" 7.9 Hz), 4.05 (s, 2H) , 1.64 (bs, 2H) . Example 97 Preparation of (125)
Figure imgf000181_0001
To the solution of α-amino-2 -chloro-3 -cyano-6- methylpyridine (compound 124, 1.58 g, 9.43 mmol) in dichloromethane (40 mL) , was added IM (Boc)20 in THF (11.3 mL, 11.3 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15 hours. After evaporation of the solvent, the residue was purified on a silica gel column eluting with hexane-EtOAc (from 5:1 to 3:1) to provide product 125 as an off-white solid (1.07 g, 42% yield) . TLC Rf 0.73 (hexane:EtOAc 1:1); "H-NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) : δ 7.96 (d, IH, J 7.9 Hz), 7.38 (d, IH, J" 7.9 Hz), 5.32 (bs, IH) , 4.46 (bd, 2H, J 5.8 Hz), 1.46 (s, 9H) . Example 98 Preparation of (126)
Figure imgf000182_0001
This is a modification based on a literature procedure (M. G. Palermo, Tetrahedron Lett. 37 (17), 1996, 2885-2886) . To a solution of acetohydroxamic acid
(118, 224.6 mg, 2.99 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (4 mL) , was added t-BuOK (335.5 mg, 2.99 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature under nitrogen for 15 minutes to get a gel-like suspension. To the mixture was added compound 125 (534 mg, 1.99 mmol) . The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature under nitrogen for 15 hours and then at 65°C for 4 hours. After cooling to room temperature, the mixture was poured into water (100 mL) and extracted with EtOAc. The combined extracts were washed with brine five times and dried over Na2S0 . After filtration and evaporation, the crude product was purified on a silica gel column eluting with hexane-EtOAc (from 3:1 to 1:2) to provide the product , compound 126, as an off-white solid (370 mg, 70% yield). TLC Rf 0.20 (hexane :EtOAc 1:1); ^Η-NMR
(400 MHz, CDC13) : δ 7.89 (d, IH, J" 7.9 Hz), 7.25 (d, IH, J 7.9 Hz), 5.56 (bs, IH) , 4.56 (bd, 2H, J 5.5 Hz), 4.42 (bs, 2H) , 1.46 (s, 9H) . Example 99 Preparation of ( 127 )
Figure imgf000183_0001
Compound 126 (340 mg, 1.29 mmol) was dissolved in a 2M HCl methanol/dioxane (1:1) solution (20 mL) . The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours and a voluminous white precipitate was formed. After evaporation of solvent and co-evaporation with dichloromethane, the residue was suspended in methanol (20 mL) . To that mixture was added hydroxide form basic resin (AG 1-X8 Resin from Bio-Rad Laboratories) to make a clear solution and adjust the pH -10. The resin was filtered and washed with methanol thoroughly. The methanol solution was evaporated and the residue was dried under high vacuum to provide the free amine compound 127 as a white solid (204 mg, 99% yield) .
Preparation of Intermediate 134 (Figure 20)
Examples 100 to 105 Example 100 Preparation of (129)
Figure imgf000183_0002
To a solution of 2 -chloro-3 -cyano-6-methylpyridine (compound 128, Aldrich, 10 g, 65.54 mmol) in carbon tetrachloride (250 mL) , were added NBS (Aldrich, 12.83 g, 72.09 mmol) and benzoyl peroxide (Aldrich, 1.59 g, 6.55 mmol) . The reaction mixture was degassed and charged with nitrogen three times, and then refluxed at 85°C for 6 hours-. After cooling to room temperature, the solid by-product was filtered off and washed by CC14. The filtrate was evaporated and purified on a silica gel column eluting with hexane-EtOAc (from 10:1 to 5:1) . The product (Compound 129, 5.28 g, 35% yield) was obtained as a light yellow solid. TLC Rf 0.35 (hexane:EtOAc 5:1), "H-NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) : δ 8.01 (d, IH, J 7.9 Hz), 7.53 (d, IH, J 7.9 Hz), 4.50 (s, 2H) . Example 101 Preparation of (130)
Figure imgf000184_0001
To a solution of α-bromo-2-chloro-3-cyano-6- methylpyridine (compound 129, 5.28 g, 22.83. mmol) in DMF (50 mL) , was added sodium azide (Aldrich, 1.78 g, 27.40 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature under nitrogen for 15 hours, and then poured into water (300 mL) . The product was extracted with ether, the combined extracts were washed with brine three times, and dried over MgS04. After filtration and evaporation, the crude product was purified on a silica gel column eluting with hexane-EtOAc (from 9:1 to 5:1) to provide a light yellow solid product (compound 130, 3.48 g, 79% yield). TLC Rf 0.11 (hexane :EtOAc 9:1), "H-NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) : δ 8.03 (d, IH, J 1 . 9 Hz), 7.47 (d, IH, J 7.9 Hz) , 4.57 (s, 2H) . Example 102 Preparation of (131)
Figure imgf000185_0001
To a solution of α-azido-2-chloro-3-cyano-6- methylpyridine (compound 130, 3.48 g, 17.98 mmol) in THF (84 mL) and water (4 mL) , was added triphenylphosphine (Aldrich, 5.19 g, 19.77 mmol) slowly at 0°C. The mixture was stirred at a temperature of from 0°C to room temperature for 15 hours. During this time, the color of the solution changed from light yellow to green, and then to a deep red color. After evaporation of the solvents, the residue was dissolved in 0.25M HCl (100 mL, 25 mmol) . The aqueous solution was washed by EtOAc to give a colorless solution, and then neutralized to pH 11 with 2M NaOH solution. The free amine was extracted with dichloromethane and the combined extracts were dried over Na2S04. After filtration, evaporation and high vacuum dry, a green crystalline solid product (131) was obtained (1.58 g, 52% yield) . XH-NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) : δ 7.96 (d, IH, J 7.9 Hz), 7.45 (d, IH, J 7.9 Hz), 4.05 (s, 2H) , 1.64 (bs, 2H) . Example 103 Preparation of (132)
Figure imgf000186_0001
To a solution of α-amino-2-chloro-3-cyano-6- methylpyridine (compound 131, 1.58 g, 9.43 mmol) in dichloromethane (40 mL) was added IM (Boc)20 in THF (11.3 mL, 11.3 mmol) . The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15 hours. After evaporation of the solvent, the residue was purified on a silica gel column eluting with hexane-EtOAc (from 5:1 to 3:1) to provide an off-white solid product (1.07 g, 42% yield). TLC Rt
0.73 (hexane:EtOAc 1:1), "H-NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) : δ 7.96
(d, IH, J 7.9 Hz), 7.38 (d, IH,' J 7.9 Hz), 5.32 (bs, 0 IH) , 4.46 (bd, 2H, J 5.8 Hz), 1.46 (s, 9H) .
Example 104
Preparation of (133)
Figure imgf000186_0002
To a solution of compound 132 (535.4 mg, 2.0 mmol) in n-butanol (10 mL) was added hydrazine (0.19 mL, 6.0 Q mmol) . The reaction mixture was refluxed under nitrogen for 4 hours. After evaporation of n-butanol and high vacuum dry, the product was obtained as a light yellow solid (526 mg, 100% yield). TLC Rt 0.15 (5% MeOH in CH2C12) , "H-NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD) : δ 8.07 (d, IH, J 8.2 Hz) , 6.99 (d, IH, J" 8.2 Hz) , 4.37 (s, 2H) , 1.44 (s, 9H) .
Example 105 Preparation of (134)
Figure imgf000187_0001
Compound 133 (520 mg, 1.97 mmol) was dissolved in a 2M HCl methanol/dioxane (1:1) solution (20 mL) . The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours and a voluminous red precipitate formed. The precipitate was filtered off. After evaporation of solvent and co-evaporation with dichloromethane, the residue was suspended in methanol (20 mL) , and to the mixture was added hydroxide form basic resin (AG 1-X8 Resin from Bio-Rad Laboratories) to make a clear solution and adjust the pH = 10. The resin was filtered and washed with methanol thoroughly. The methanol solution was evaporated and the residue was dried under high vacuum to provide the free amine (compound 134) as a light yellow-green solid (303 mg, 94% yield) . ":-NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD) : δ 8.09 (d, IH, J 8.2 Hz), - .d, IH, J 8.2 Hz) , 4.05 (s, 2H) . Preparation of Intermediate 141 (Figure 21) Examples 106 to 111
Example 106 Preparation of (136)
Figure imgf000188_0001
To a solution of 3-cyano-4-fluorotoluene (135) (Aldrich, 20.00 g, 148.0 mmol) in carbon tetrachloride (600 mL) , were added NBS (Aldrich, 28.98 g, 162.8 mmol) and AIBN (Aldrich, 2.43 g, 14.8 mmol). The reaction mixture was degassed and charged with nitrogen three times, and then was refluxed at 85°C for 8 hours. After standing at room temperature overnight, the mixture was filtered to remove solids and the solid by-product was washed by CC14. The filtrate was evaporated and purified on a silica gel column eluting with hexane-EtOAc (20:1) . The product (Compound 136, 18.67 g, 59% yield) was obtained as a light yellow liquid which solidified after standing at room temperature. TLC Jf0.44 (hexane : EtOAc 10:1); "H-NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) : δ 7.66-7.61 (m, 2H) , 7.20 (t, IH, J 8.5 Hz), 4.44 (s, 2H) . Example 107 Preparation of (137)
Figure imgf000188_0002
To the solution of α-bromo-3-cyano-4-fluorotoluene (compound 136, 18.67 g, 87.23 mmol) in DMF (200 mL) was added sodium azide (Adrich, 6.80 g, 104.67 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature under nitrogen for 15 hours, and then poured into water (300 mL) . The product was extracted with ether' and the combined extracts were washed with brine three times and then dried over Na2S04. After filtration, evaporation and high vacuum dry, a light yellow liquid product (compound 137, 15.31 g, 100% yield) was obtained which was used for the next step without further purification. TLC Rf 0.47 (hexane:EtOAc 10:1); αH-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : δ 7.59-7.54 (m, 2H) , 7.24 (t, IH, J- 8.4 Hz), 4.39 (s, 2H) .
Example 108 Preparation of (138)
Figure imgf000189_0001
To the solution of α-azido-3-cyano-4-fluorotoluene (compound 137, 12.82 g, 74.45 mmol) in THF (348 mL) and water (16 mL) was added triphenylphosphine (Aldrich, 21.00 g, 80.05 mmol) slowly at 0°C. The mixture was stirred at a temperature of from 0°C to room temperature for 15 hours, and then the solvents were evaporated. The residue was dissolved in 0.25 M HCl (300 mL, 75 mmol) . The aqueous solution was washed with EtOAc until no UN active compounds were detected, adjusted to pH = 10 with a 2M ΝaOH solution, and then extracted with dichloromethane. The combined extracts were dried over Na2S04. After filtration, evaporation and high vacuum dry, a light yellow liquid product (9.25 g, 85% yield) was obtained which was used for the next step without further purification. ^-N R (400 MHz, CDC13) : δ 7.60 (d, IH, J 6 . 1 Hz), 7.56 (m, IH) , 7.16 (t, IH, J 8.5 Hz), 3.89 (s, 2H) , 1.44 (bs, 2H) . Example 109 Preparation of (139)
Figure imgf000190_0001
To a solution of α-amino-3-cyano-4 -fluorotoluene (compound 138, 9.25 g, 63.27 mmol) in dichloromethane (316 mL) , was added (Boc)20 (Fluka, 15.19 g, 69.60 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. After evaporation of the solvent, the residue was purified on a silica gel column eluting with hexane- EtOAc (5:1 and 4:1) to provide a white crystalline solid product (13.10 g, 83% yield). TLC Re 0.27 (hexane :EtOAc 3:1); "H-NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) : δ 7.54-7.50 (m, 2H) , 7.17 (t, IH, J 8.7 Hz), 4.99 (bs, IH) , 4.29 (bd, 2H, J" 5.8 Hz) , 1.45 (s, 9H) . Example 110 Preparation of (140)
Figure imgf000190_0002
140 This procedure was developed in our laboratory based on a literature reference for making a desired bicyclic benzisoxazole ring (M. G. Palermo, Tetrahedron Lett. 37 (17), 1996, 2885-2886).
To a solution of acetohydroxamic acid (118) (227.5 mg, 3.0 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (4 mL) was added t-BuOK (Aldrich, 336.7 mg, 3.0 mmol) . The mixture was stirred at room temperature under nitrogen for 15 minutes to obtain a gel-like suspension. To that mixture, was added compound 139 (500.6 mg, 2.0 mmol) . The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature under nitrogen for 15 hours. The mixture was poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. The combined extracts were washed with brine five times and dried over Na2S04. After filtration and evaporation, the crude product was purified on a silica gel column eluting with hexane- EtOAc (from 4:1 to 1:1) . Some starting material, acetohydroxamic acid (310 mg, 1.24 mmol, 62%), was recovered. The product (140) was obtained as a white solid (184 mg, 35% yield, 92% yield based on the recovered starting material). TLC Jf 0.09 (hexane :EtOAc 3:1); XH-NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) : δ 7.45 (s, IH) , 7.43 (d, IH, J 8.5 Hz), 7.38 (d, IH, J 8.5 Hz), 4.93 (bs, IH) , 4.39 (bd, 4H, J 5.5 Hz), 1.46 (s, 9H) . Example 111 Preparation of (141)
Figure imgf000191_0001
Compound 140 (178 mg, 0.68 mmol) was dissolved in 2M HCl methanol/dioxane (1:1) (10 mL) . The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 5 hours and a voluminous white precipitate formed. After evaporation of solvent and co-evaporation with dichloromethane, the residue was suspended in methanol (20 mL) . To that mixture was added hydroxide form basic resin (AG 1-X8 Resin from Bio-Rad Laboratories) to make a clear solution and adjust the pH to about 10. The resin was filtered and washed with methanol thoroughly. The methanol solution was evaporated and the residue was dried under high vacuum to provide the free amine compound 141 as a white solid (111 mg, 100% yield) . 1H- NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : δ 7.51 (s, IH) , 7.47 (d, IH, J" 8.8 Hz), 7.39 (d, IH, J 8.5 Hz), 4.34 (bs, 2H) , 3.99 (s, 4H, J 5.5 Hz) .
Preparation of Intermediate 143 (Figure 22) Examples 112 to 113
Example 112 Preparation of (142)
Figure imgf000192_0001
To a solution of compound 139 (10.0 g, 39.96 mmol) in n-butanol (200 mL) was added hydrazine (Aldrich, 2.63 mL, 83.91 mmol). The reaction mixture was refluxed under nitrogen for 22 hours. After evaporation of n- butanol, the residue was purified on a silica gel column eluting with 5% to 10% methanol in dichloromethane to provide a white crystalline solid product (compound 142,
5.47 g, 52% yield) . TLC R 0.26 (5% MeOH in CH2C12) ; *H- NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : δ 8.94 (bs, IH) , 7.46 (s, IH) , 7.30-7.27 (m, 2H) , 4.87 (bs, IH) , 4.38 (bd, 2H, J 5.5 Hz), 4.09 (bs, 2H) , 1.47 (s, 9H) . Example 113 Preparation of (143)
Figure imgf000193_0001
Compound 142 (2.47 g) was dissolved in 2M HCl dioxane solution. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours. After evaporation of solvent, co-evaporation with dichloromethane and high vacuum dry, an off-white solid product (compound 143, 2.27 g, 99% yield) was obtained. "H-NMR (400 MHz, D20) : δ 7.85 (s, IH) , 7.59 (d, IH, J" 8.8 Hz), 7.52 (d, IH, J 8.8 Hz) , 4.25 (s, 2H) .
To a solution of compound 143 (2.00 g, 7.36 mmol) in methanol was added hydroxide form basic resin (AG 1- X8 Resin from Bio-Rad Laboratories) to adjust the pH to about 10. After filtration, the resin was washed by methanol thoroughly. The methanol solution was evaporated and the residue was dried under high vacuum to provide the free amine form of compound 143 as a yellow solid (1.15 g, 96% yield). Synthesis of Intermediate 147 (Figure 23) Examples 114 to 116
Example 114 Preparation of (145)
Figure imgf000194_0001
A solution of 2-amino-5-bromopyrimidine (144) (Aldrich, 50.0 g, 0.287 mol) and copper (I) cyanide (Aldrich, 33.0 g, 0.373 mol) in DMF (155 mL) was heated to reflux at 185°C. After 20 hours the reaction mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature. The residue was partitioned between ethyl acetate and 10% aqueous sodium cyanide solution. The organic layer was washed with 10% aqueous sodium cyanide solution, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and evaporated in vacuo to afford the product (145) (22.8 g, 66 %) as a brown solid. Rf = 0.22 (1:1 of ethyl acetate/ hexane). MS: m/e 121 (M+H)+.
Example 115
Preparation of (146)
Figure imgf000194_0002
A solution of the product of Example 114 (145) (10.0 g, 0.083 mol), Boc20 (54.45 g, 0.250 mol) and DMAP (10.16 g, 0.083 mol) in THF (80 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 2 hours . The solvent was removed under vacuum. The residue was partitioned between ethyl acetate and aqueous 0.25 M HCl solution. The organic layer was washed with 10% aqueous Na2C03 solution, and brine then dried over magnesium sulfate. Removal of organic solvent afforded the product (146) (15.9 g, 60%) as a brown solid. Rf = 0.7 (1:1 of ethyl acetate/ hexane). MS: m/e 321(M+H)+.
Example 116 Preparation of (147)
Figure imgf000195_0001
A suspension of the compound of Example 115 (146) (7.0 g, 21.8 mmol), 10% Pd/C (Aldrich, 2.8 g) , and IM aqueous HCl (21.9 L) in ethanol (80 mL) was shaked in a Parr apparatus under H2 (50 psi) for 16 hours. The solid was removed and the solution was concentrated under vacuum to give the product (147) (4.9 g, 69%). Rf = 0.46 (1:1 of ethyl acetate/ hexane). MS: m/e 325(M+H)+.
Synthesis of Intermediate 152 (Figure 24) Examples 117 to 120
Example 117 Preparation of (149)
Figure imgf000196_0001
To a solution of 2-amino-4 , 6-dimethylpyrimidine (148, Aldrich, 20.0 g, 162.39 mmol) in HoAc (200 mL) was added bromine (Spectrum, 28.55g, 178.62 mmol) drop-wise at 0°C. After half of the portion of bromine was added, the reaction mixture changed color from clear to dark orange. The reaction was monitored by TLC using (1 ethylacetate/1 hexane) . Saturated aqueous NaHC03 was added to neutralize HOAc. The reaction mixture was extracted with ethylacetate (2X) . The organic layer was washed with saturated aqueous NaHC03 and evaporated in vacuo to give compound (149) (21.32 g, 65%) . Rf = 0.29 (1:1 of ethyl acetate/hexane) . MS: m/e 203 (M+H) + .
Example 118 Preparation of (150)
Figure imgf000196_0002
A solution of 2-amino-4 , 6-dimethyl-5- bromopyrimidine (149, 20.0 g, 98.93 mmol) and copper (I) cyanide (Aldrich, 11.52 g, 128.61 mmol) in DMF (200 mL) was heated to reflux at 185°C. After 20 hours, the reaction mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature. The residue was partitioned between ethyl acetate and 10% aqueous sodium cyanide solution. The organic layer was washed with 10% aqueous sodium cyanide solution, dried over magnesium sulfate, and evaporated in vacuo to afford compound (150) as a yellow solid (9.0 g, 61 %) . Rf = 0.17 (1:1 of ethyl acetate/hexane). MS: m/e 149 (M+H)+.
Example 119 Preparation of (151)
Figure imgf000197_0001
A solution of (150) (8.6 g, 58.10 mmol), Boc20 (25.33 g, 116.22 mmol) and DMAP (7.1 g, 58.10 mmol) in THF (150 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 2 hours. The solvent was removed under vacuum. The residue was partitioned between ethyl acetate and aqueous 0.25M HCl solution. The organic layer was washed with 10% aqueous Na2C03 solution and brine, then dried over magnesium sulfate. Removal of organic solvent afforded compound (151) (15.6 g, 77%) as a dark brown solid. Rf = 0.33 (1:2 of ethyl acetate/hexane) MS: m/e 349(M+H) + .
Example 120 Preparation of (152)
Figure imgf000198_0001
A suspension of compound (151) (6.5 g, 18.68 mmol), 10% Pd/C (Aldrich, 1.3 g) , and IM aqueous HCl (375 μL) in ethanol (30 mL) was shaked in a Parr apparatus under H2 (45 psi) for 16 hours. The solid was removed and the solution was concentrated under vacuum to give compound (152) (6.11 g, 93%). MS: m/e 353(M+H)+.
Synthesis of Intermediate 156 (Figure 25) Examples 121 to 123 ' Example 121 Preparation of (154)
Figure imgf000198_0002
A solution of 2-amino-4-methylpyrimidine (153, Aldrich, 10.0 g, 91.63 mmol) and sodium carbonate (Aldrich, 4.8 g, 45.81 mmol) in water (100 mL) was heated to 65°C. Then, bromine (Aldrich, 16.1 g, 100.79 mmol) was added drop-wise to the reaction mixture. After 1.5 hours the reaction mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature; then, saturated aqueous NaHC03 was added. The precipitate was filtered and recrystallized from ethyl alcohol. The residue was dried under vacuum to give compound (154) (11.0 g, 65%) as a yellow solid. MS: m/e 188 (N4+H)+. Example 122 Preparation of (155)
Figure imgf000199_0001
A solution of 2-amino-4-methyl-5-bromopyrimidine (154, 10.0 g, 53.19 mmol) and copper (I) cyanide (Aldrich, 6.19 g, 69.14 mmol) in DMF (80 mL) was heated to reflux at 185°C. After 20 hours, the reaction mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature. The residue was partitioned between ethyl acetate and 10% aqueous sodium cyanide solution. The organic layer was washed with 10% aqueous sodium cyanide solution, dried over magnesium sulfate, and evaporated in vacuo to afford yellow solid (4.27g, 60%). Rf = 0.19 (1:1 of ethyl acetate/hexane). MS: m/e 135 (M+H)+. Example 123 Preparation of (156)
Figure imgf000199_0002
A suspension of compound (155) (1.0 g, 7.46 mmol), 10% Pd/C (Aldrich, 250 mg) , and IM aqueous HCl (14.8 mL) in ethanol (11 mL) and THF (15 mL) was shaken in a Parr apparatus under H2 (20 psi) for 16 hours. The solid was removed and the solution was concentrated under vacuum to give compound (156) (1.0 g, 94%). MS: m/e 216 (M+H+MeOH+Na+H20) + .
Synthesis of Compound 165 (Figure 26) Examples 124 to 128 Example 124 Preparation of (158)
Figure imgf000200_0001
To a mixture of 3- (S) - tert-butyloxycarbonylamino- 4, 5, 6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 4, 10.0 mmol) and NaH (Aldrich, 0.24 g, 10.0 mmol) in DMF (20 mL) , is added propargyl bromide (compound 157, Aldrich, 1.1 mL, 10 mmol) . The reaction mixture is stirred under nitrogen at room temperature for about 15 hours and then poured into water (200 mL) . The aqueous mixture is extracted with ether three times. The combined extracts are washed with brine and dried over Na2S04. After filtration and evaporation, the crude product is purified on a silica gel column eluting with hexane- EtOAc (5:1) . Example 125 Preparation of (161)
Figure imgf000201_0001
To a solution of compound 158 (8.41 mmol) in anhydrous THF (20 mL) , is added a 0.5 M solution of 9- BBN in THF (Aldrich, 16.8 mL, 8.41 mmol) slowly through a syringe at 0°C under nitrogen. After the addition is complete, the reaction mixture is stirred at 0°C under nitrogen for about one hour, and then is stored in a refrigerator (5°C) under nitrogen for about 16 hours to form compound 159. The reaction flask is warmed to room temperature under nitrogen. To the reaction mixture is added 4-cyanobenzylbromide (compound 160, Aldrich, 1.649 g, 8.41 mmol), 3M NaOH (8.4 mL, 25.2 mmol), and the catalyst Pd(PPh3)4 (Aldrich, 288.9 mg, 0.25 mmol). The reaction mixture is degassed and charged with nitrogen; the procedure is repeated for two more times. The reaction mixture is refluxed under nitrogen for about 7 hours, then is cooled to room temperature and is diluted with hexane (50 L) . To the resulting solution is added a 30% solution of H202 in water (6 mL) and the mixture is stirred for about 10 minutes at room temperature. The layers are separated; the aqueous layer is extracted with EtOAc. The combined extracts are washed with brine and dried over Na2S04. After filtration and evaporation, the crude product is purified on a silica gel column eluting with hexane-EtOAc (from 5:1 to 2:1) to provide a product 161. Example 126 Preparation of (162)
Figure imgf000202_0001
A solution of compound 161 (2.93 mmol) in a 2M HCl/dioxane solution (Aldrich, 40 mL) is allowed to stand at 5°C for about 15 hours and then at room temperature for about 4 hours. After evaporation and co-evaporation with toluene, the residue is dissolved in methanol (20 mL) , and * " .- -suiting solution is neutralized to pH ,j. basic OH" resin. After evaporation, t ude mixture is purified on a silica gel ' column e"1. . ug with 1% methanol in dichloromethane and 2% methanol in dichloromethane to provide a free amine product (compound 162) . Example 127 Preparation of (163)
Figure imgf000202_0002
To a solution of compound 162 (0.41 mmol) in anhydrous acetonitrile (2 mL) are added α- toluenesulfonyl chloride (Aldrich, 122.5 mg, 0.49 mmol) and 2,4, 6-collidine (Aldrich, 0.12 mL, 0.90 mmol). The solution is stirred under nitrogen at room temperature for about 15 minutes, diluted with EtOAc, washed with saturated aqueous NH4C1 , saturated aqueous NaHC03 and brine, and dried over Na2S04. After filtration and evaporation, the crude product is purified on a silica gel column eluting with hexane-EtOAc (2:1 and 1:1) to provide product compound 163. Example 128 Preparation of (165)
Figure imgf000203_0001
To a solution of compound 163 (0.19 mmol) in ethanol (2 mL) , is added hydroxylamine hydrochloride (20.2 mg, 0.29 mmol) and triethylamine (0.053 mL, 0.38 mmol) . The reaction mixture is stirred under nitrogen at 80°C for about 4 hours. The solvent is evaporated and the residue is dissolved in dichloromethane. The organic solution is washed by water and dried over Na2S04. After filtration and evaporation, crude product, compound 164 is obtained, which is used for the next step without further purification. To the solution of compound 164 in acetic acid (2 mL) and water (0.5 mL) , is added freshly activated zinc dust. The reduction is monitored by mass spectram for completion. The reaction mixture is diluted with water, is filtered, and is purified by a reversed phase preparatory HPLC. The pure fractions are concentrated and lyophilized to give compound 165.
Synthesis of Compound 173 (Figure 27) Examples 129 to 134 Example 129 Preparation of E-4- (4-cyanophenyl) -2-buten-l-ol (167)
Figure imgf000204_0001
To a solution of propargyl alcohol (166, Aldrich, 1.46 mL, 25 mmol) in anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (10 mL) , was added 0.5M 9-BBN in THF (Aldrich, 100 mL, 50 mmol) through an addition funnel at 0°C under nitrogen over a period of 1 hour. After the addition was complete, the flask was stored in a 5°C refrigerator under nitrogen for 18 hours. The reaction mixture was warmed to room temperature under nitrogen. To the reaction mixture was added 4-bromotolunitrile (compound 160, Aldrich, 5.88 g, 30 mmol), tetrakis (triphenyl-phosphine) palladium (0) (Aldrich, 1.00 g, 0.86 mmol), and 2M sodium hydroxide solution (25 mL, 50 mmol) . The reaction mixture was degassed with nitrogen three times, and then refluxed at 65°C for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature. 30% hydrogen peroxide in water (30 mL) and 2M sodium hydroxide solution (10 mL) was added slowly. Copius amounts of gas released during addition of hydrogen peroxide. The resulting solution was stirred at room temperature for an additional hour. The reaction mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined extracts were washed with brine and then dried over Na2S04. After filtration and evaporation, the crude product was purified on a silica gel column, eluting with hexane-ethyl acetate (4:1 and 3:1). The product 167 was obtained as colorless oil (1.05 g, 24% yield). TLC Rf 0.30 (Hexane: EtOAc 1:1); XH-NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) : δ 7.58 (d, 2H, J" 8.1 Hz), 7.29 (d, 2H, J 8.1 Hz), 5.82 (dt, IH, J 15.6 Hz, J" 6.4 Hz), 5.71 (dt, IH, J 15.6 Hz, J 5.4 Hz), 4.14 (d, 2H, J 5.4 Hz), 3.44 (d, 2H, J" 6.4 Hz), 1.62 (s, IH) . Example 130
Preparation of (4R) -trans-2-Butyl-N,N,N' ,N' - tetramethyl [1,3,2] dioxaborolane-4 , 5-dicarboxamide (168)
Figure imgf000206_0001
This compound was prepared using a modified literature procedure: A. B. Charette, S. Prescott, and C. Brochu, J. Org. Chem. 1995, 60, 1081-1083. To a solution of L-N,N, N ,JV'-tetramethyltartamide (Aldrich, 15.3 g, 74.9 mmol) in anhydrous toluene (50 mL) , was added 1-butaneboronic acid (Aldrich, 9.15 g, 89.9 mmol). The mixture was heated under reflux to remove the water produced in the reaction using a Dean-Stark collector, and 2.3 mL water was collected (compared to 2.7 mL water in theoretical yield) . Toluene was evaporated and the residue was dried under high vacuum. A small amount of dichloromethane was introduced, but no 1-butaneboronic acid precipitate was observed (as described in the reference) . ^-NMR of the crude product showed the presence of 1-butaneboronic acid. The crude product was dissolved in dichloromethane (300 mL) , washed with saturated aqueous NaHC03 and brine, and dried over Na2S04. After filtration, evaporation and high vacuum drying, a viscous, light-yellow product 168 was obtained (15.6 g,
77%) . H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) : δ 5.53 (s, 2H) , 3.20 (s, 6H) , 2.98 (s, 6H) , 1.40-1.29 (m, 4H) , 0.89-0.83 (m, 5H) . Example 131 Preparat ion of ( 169 )
Figure imgf000207_0001
This procedure is based on general references for enantioselective cyclopropanation of olefins: (a) A. G. M. Barrett, W. W. Doubleday, K. Kasdorf , and G. J. Tustin, J". Org. Chem. 1996, 61 , 3280-3288. (b) A. B. Charette, S. Prescott, and C. Brochu, J. Org. Chem . 1995, 60 , 1081-1083.
To a flask containing anhydrous dichloromethane (6 mL) was added a 1.0 M solution of diethylzinc in hexane
(Aldrich, 2.93 mL, 2.93 mmol) under nitrogen at 0°C. To another flask containing anhydrous dichloromethane (6 mL) was added (E) -4- (4 -cyanopheny1) -2-buten-l-ol
(compound 167, 230 mg, 1.33 mmol) and ( 4R- trans) -2- Butyl -N, N, N' , N' -tetramethyl [1,3,2] dioxaborolane-4 , 5- dicarboxamide (compound 168, 395.2 mg, 1.46 mmol) under nitrogen at room temperature. To the diethylzinc- containing solution was added diiodomethane (Aldrich, 0.47 mL, 5.85 mmol) slowly through a syringe, and the reaction mixture was stirred under nitrogen at 0°C for 10 minutes. Gradually a white slurry was observed. To this mixture was added the solution of allyl alcohol derivative (167) and the chiral dioxaborolane (168) in dichloromethane. A clear solution was observed which gradually became cloudy. The reaction mixture was stirred under nitrogen at a temperature of from 0°C to room temperature for 15 hours. The reaction mixture was quenched by slowly adding saturated aqueous NH4C1. The product was extracted with dichloromethane, and the combined extracts were washed with saturated aqueous NaHC03 and brine, and dried over Na2S04. After filtration and evaporation, the crude product was purified on a silica gel column eluting with hexane-ethyl acetate (from 4:1 to 1:1) . The product (120 mg) obtained was contaminated with butylboronic acid. This mixture was dissolved in ether (10 mL) . To the ether solution was added 2N NaOH solution (3 mL) , and the mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The layers were separated, and the organic layer was washed with brine and dried over Na2S04. After filtration, evaporation and high vacuum dry, a clean colorless oily product (169) was obtained (100 mg, 40% yield). TLC Re 0.23 (Hexane: EtOAc 1:1); "H-NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) : δ 7.59 (d, 2H, J 7.8 Hz), 7.37 (d, 2H, J 7.8 Hz), 3.53 ( , IH) , 3.46 (m, IH) , 2.66 (m, 2H) , 1.25 (t, IH, J 5.5 Hz), 1.04 ( , IH) , 0.93 (m, IH) , 0.53 (m, 2H) . Example 132 Preparation of (170]
Figure imgf000209_0001
To a solution of the cyclopropane alcohol from Example 131 (compound 169, 108 mg, 0.58 mmol), compound 4 (1.15 mmol), and triphenylphosphine (Fluka, 301.6 mg, 1.15 mmol) in anhydrous THF (3 mL) , is added diethyl azodicarboxylate (Fluka, 0.18 mL, 1.15 mmol) at 0°C under nitrogen. The solution is stirred at 0°C for about 10 minutes and at room temperature for about 30 hours under nitrogen. The reaction is quenched by adding ethanol. After evaporation of solvents, the residue is purified on a silica gel column eluting with hexane-ethyl acetate (from 5:1 to 2:1) to obtain the product (170) . Example 133 Preparation of (171)
Figure imgf000209_0002
Compound 170 (0.14 mmol) is dissolved in a freshly prepared 4M solution of hydrogen chloride in ethyl acetate (hydrogen chloride was produced from acetyl chloride and ethanol) and the solution is stirred at room temperature for three hours. After removal of solvant, the residue is dissolved in acetonitrile (1.5 mL) and 2 , 4 , 6-collidine (Aldrich, 0.1 mL) is added to 0 adjust the pH = 8. To that solution is added oc- toluenesulfonyl chloride (Aldrich, 39.8 mg, 0.16 mmol) and the mixture is stirred at room temperature under nitrogen for about 4 hours. The mixture is diluted with ethyl acetate, is washed successively with IM KHS04 solution, saturated aqueous NaHC03 and brine, and then is 5 dried over Na2S04. After filtration and evaporation, the crude product is purified on a silica gel column, eluting with hexane-ethyl acetate (from 4:1 to 1:1). Example 134 Preparation of (173)
Figure imgf000210_0001
To a solution of compound 171 (0.013 mmol) in ethanol (1 mL) is added hydroxylamine hydrochloride Q (Aldrich, 1.8 mg, 0.026 mmol) and triethylamine (Fluka, 0.005 L, 0.039 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred under nitrogen at 60°C overnight. The solvent is evaporated and the residue is dissolved in ethyl acetate. The organic solution is washed with water and dried over Na2S04. After filtration and evaporation, crude product compound 172 is obtained which is used for the next step without further purification.
To a solution of compound 172 in acetic acid (1 mL) and water (0.25 mL) is added freshly activated zinc dust. The reduction is monitored using mass spectra to determine completion. The reaction mixture is diluted with ethyl acetate, is washed with water, saturated aqueous NaHC03 and brine, and is dried over Na2S04. After filtration and evaporation, a crude product is obtained which is purified using reversed phase preparatory HPLC eluting with an acetonitrile-0.1% TFA/water system. The pure fractions are concentrated and lyophilized to give compound 173. The enantiomeric excess of compound 171 may be determined by reversed phase chiral HPLC analysis (chiral column: CHIRALCEL OD-R, lot No. 597-007-60416 from Chiral Technologies, Inc.).
Synthesis of Compound 179 (Figure 28) Examples 135 to 139 Example 135 Preparation of (175)
Figure imgf000211_0001
To a solution of 2 -cyanopyridine-5-carboxylic acid (174) (Aldrich, 1.00 g, 6.75 mmol) in ethanol (30 mL) was added hydroxylamine hydrochloride (Aldrich, 514.2 mg, 7.40 mmol) and triethylamine (Aldrich, 1.29 mL, 9.26 mmol) . The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for two days . Solvent was evaporated and the residue was dissolved in anhydrous methanol (20 mL) . To that solution was added acetyl chloride (1 mL) carefully and the mixture was refluxed for 2 hours. After evaporation of the solvents, the residue was washed by dichloromethane, saturated aqueous NaHC03, water, methanol and ether, and dried under high vacuum. A pure product 175 (532 mg, 49% yield) was obtained. *Η NMR (400 MHz, CD30D) : δ 9.10 (s, IH) , 8.28 (dd, IH, J 8.5 Hz, J 1.5 Hz), 7.97 (d, IH, J 8.5 Hz), 3.93 (s, 3H) .
Example 136 Preparation of (176)
Figure imgf000212_0001
To a solution of 3- (S) - (benzylsulfonyl) amino-1- carbohydroxymethyl-4 ,5,6, 7-tetrahydroazepin-2-one (compound 84, 1 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) , are added HOAt (Nova, 149.7 mg, 1.1 mmol), EDC (Nova, 210.9 mg, 1.1 mmol) and compound 175 (195.2 mg, 1 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred under nitrogen at room temperature for about 15 hours. A voluminous white precipitate is formed, which is suspended in EtOAc and dichloromethane. To the reaction mixture is added water (100 mL) , the mixture is filtered and washed with water, saturated aqueous NaHC03, water and ether. After drying under high vacuum, product compound 176 is obtained. Example 137 Preparation of (177)
Figure imgf000213_0001
A mixture of compound 176 (0.90 mmol) in pyridine (10 mL) is refluxed under nitrogen for about 3 hours; then the pyridine solvent is evaporated. The residue is washed with methanol and ether to provide product (177) Example 138 Preparation of (178)
Figure imgf000213_0002
To a suspension of compound 177 (0.75 mmol) in methanol (6 mL) and water (2 mL) , is added lithium hydroxide monohydrate (156.7 mg, 3.73 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for about 10 hours and a clear solution is obtained. The solution is neutralized to pH = 7 with 0.5 M HCl and concentrated. The residue is purified using reversed phase preparatory HPLC eluting with an acetonitrile-0.1% TFA in water system. The pure fractions are concentrated and lyophilized to provide product compound 178.
Example 139 Preparation of (179)
Figure imgf000214_0001
To a solution of compound 178 (0.25 mmol) in DMF (2 mL) , are added HOAt (Nova, 40.8 mg, 0.30 mmol), EDC (Nova, 57.5 mg, 0.30 mmol), ammonium chloride (Aldrich,. 66.8 mg, 1.25 mmol) and triethylamine (Aldrich, 0.21 ml, 1.50 mmol) . The reaction mixture is stirred under nitrogen at room temperature for 15 hours. HPLC is used to determine if product is formed and if substantial compound 178 is still in the reaction mixture. If substantial compound 178 appears to be present, additional ammonium chloride and triethylamine may be added to the reaction flask, and the reaction mixture is stirred for another day. The solution is diluted with water (20 mL) and purified using reversed phase preparatory HPLC eluting with an acetonitrile-0.1% TFA in water system. The pure fractions are concentrated and lyophilized to provide product compound 179.
Synthesis of Compound 190 (Figure 29) Examples 140 to 148 Example 140 Preparation of (181)
Figure imgf000215_0001
To a solution of p-cyano-benzyl bromide (180) (Aldrich Chemical Company, Inc., 5.14 g, 26.2 mmol) dissolved in dimethylformamide (52 mL) , was added cesium acetate (9.99 g, 52.0 mmoles) . After stirring for 16 hours at room temperature, the solution was diluted with diethyl ether (300 mL) and the organic layer was washed with water. The aqueous layer was extracted by diethyl ether again. The organic phases were combined and washed with brine . The organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The solid was filtered away and the organic solution was concentrated under vacuum to give 4.54 g (99% yield) of the above-identified product (181) as a white crystalline solid. Rf = 0.2 (3:1 hexane/ethyl acetate).
Example 141 Preparation of (182)
Figure imgf000216_0001
To a solution of the compound of Example 92 (181) (4.00 g, 22.8 mmol) in 100 mL ethanol, was added 1.90 g (27.4 mmol) hydroxylamine hydrochloride followed by 4.8 mL (34.2 mmol) triethylamine. The reaction mixture was stirred under nitrogen for a week at room temperature. Thin layer chromatography (1:1 hexane/ethyl acetate) revealed that the reaction was complete in two days. The reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The resulting residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate and was washed with water, followed by brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The solution was filtered and was concentrated under vacuum to give 4.75 g ( 99% yield) of the above- identified product (182) as a white solid. Rf = 0.3 ( 1:1 hexane/ethyl acetate) . Example 142 Preparation of ( 184 )
Figure imgf000217_0001
To a solution of the compound of Example 141 (182) (4.75 g, 22.8 mmol) in 50 mL dimethylformamide, was added 12.71 g (39.0 mmol) cesium carbonate and then 4.6 mL (39.0 mmol) benzyl bromide (183). After stirring for 16 hours at room temperature, the reaction mixture was diluted with 200 mL of diethyl ether. The organic layer was washed with water and the aqueous layer was extracted with diethyl ether. The two organic phases were combined, washed with brine, and dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The solid was filtered and the solution was concentrated under vacuum. Flash chromatography (silica, 16 to 25% ethyl acetate in hexane) afforded 5.45 g (80% yield) of the above- identified product (184) as a white crystalline solid. Example 143 Preparation of ( 185 )
Figure imgf000218_0001
A solution of the compound of Example 142 (184) (6.5 g, 21.79 mmol) in 75 mL of methanol was added to a solution of 3.66 g (87.16 mmol) lithium hydroxide monohydrate in 25 mL water. The resulting mixture was stirred for 48 hours at room temperature. The methanol was evaporated under vacuum. The aqueous solution was neutralized with IM HCl and extracted twice with 500 mL ethyl acetate . The organic layers were combined and washed with sodium bicarbonate and t-«->>„ brine. The organic layer was dried over anh * \ --us sodium sulfate. The solid was filtered and - ;!.c solution was concentrated under vacuum. 4.2 α ?:_ yield) of the above- identified product (185) was ootained as a white solid. Rf = 0.4 (1:1 hexane/ethyl acetate). Example 144 Preparation of (186)
Figure imgf000219_0001
To a solution of the compound of Example 143 (185) (3.90 g, 15.2 mmol) in 115 mL of dichloromethane, was added 7.6 g (22.8 mmol) carbon tetrabromide . The reaction mixture was stirred until it became homogeneous. Triphenylphosphine (5.6 g, 21.3 mmol) was added slowly. After the addition was complete, a yellow color appeared, which dissipated after a few minutes. This solution was stirred under nitrogen for 30 minutes at room temperature. The solution was concentrated under vacuum and purified by flash chromatography (silica, 11 to 50% ethyl acetate in hexane) to afford 3.45 g (60% yield) of the above- identified product (186) as a solid. Rf = 0.5 (1:1 hexane/ethyl acetate).
Example 145 Preparation of ( 187 )
Figure imgf000220_0001
To a solution of the compound of Example 144 (186) (3.45 g, 10.8 mmol) in 40 mL acetonitrile, was added 2.53 g (16.2 mmol) tetraethylammonium cyanide. After stirring at room temperature for 72 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuum to remove the solvent. The resulting residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate and washed with brine. The brine layer was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phases were combined and dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The solid was filtered and the solution was concentrated under vacuum. The material was purified by flash chromatography (silica, 20 to 60% ethyl acetate in hexane) to afford 2.5 g (87% yield) of the above- identified product (187) as a solid. Rf = 0.2 (2:1 hexane/ethyl acetate) . Example 146 Preparation of (188)
Figure imgf000221_0001
To a solution of the compound of Example 145 (187) (2.50 g, 9.40 mmol) in 40 mL ethanol, was added 0.7S4 g (11.28 mmol) hydroxylamine hydrochloride, followed by 2.0 mL (14.1 mmol) triethylamine. After stirring at room temperature for 72 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The resulting residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with saturated aqueous ammonium chloride. The ammonium chloride layer was re-extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phases were combined, washed with brine, and dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The sodium sulfate was filtered away and the organic solution was concentrated under vacuum. The material was purified by flash chromatography (silica, 20 to 75% ethyl acetate in hexane) to afford 1.77 g (63% yield) of the above-identified product (130) as a slightly purple solid. XH NMR (CD30D) δ 3.42 (s, 2H) , 5.1 (s, 2H) , 7.35 (m, IH) , 7.40 (m, 4H) , 7.48 (d, J=7 Hz, 2H) , 7.6 (d, J=8 Hz, 2H) . Example 147 Preparation of ( 189 )
Figure imgf000222_0001
The compound of Example 63 (84) (1 mmol) is dissolved in 5 mL anhydrous dimethylformamide under a nitrogen atmosphere at room temperature . To the reaction mixture is added 0.149 g (1.1 mmol) 1-hydroxy- 7-azabenzotriazole and 0.210 g (1.1 mmol) l-ethyl-3- (3 ' - dimethylaminopropyl) carbodiimide hydrochloride. The solution is stirred until homogeneous and then compound of Example 146 (188) (0.284 g, 1 mmol) is added. The reaction mixture is stirred for about 16 hours at room temperature. A portion of the crude reaction mixture is subjected to analytical HPLC using a 4.6 x 250 mm reverse phase column containing a C-18 resin comprised of 5 micron-size gel particles (elution = 1 mL/min, 15 to 60% acetonitrile in water with 0.1% trifluoroacetic acid over 20 minutes) . The reaction mixture is heated to 95°C for about 2 hours. The reaction mixture is then cooled to room temperature and is diluted with 200 mL of ethyl acetate. The organic solution is washed with 100 mL of water, saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate, brine, and is dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The sodium sulfate is filtered away and the organic solution is concentrated under vacuum. Using the above HPLC conditions, cyclized product is isolated. The material is purified by flash chromatography (silica, 16 to 33% ethyl acetate in hexane) to afford the above-identified product (189) .
Example 148 Preparation of (190)
Figure imgf000223_0001
A solution of activated zinc dust is prepared by adding 0.612 g (9.36 mmol) zinc dust to 3 mL 0.5N hydrochloric acid and stirring for about 5 minutes. The solution is decanted and washed with water and methanol . A portion of the activated zinc (300 mg, 4.6 mmol) is added to a solution of the compound Example 147 (189) (0.234" mmol) in 5 mL 80% acetic acid in water. The reaction is quenched after about 5 minutes by adding 15 . mL water. The reaction mixture is filtered and washed with an additional 10 mL of water. The aqueous solution is applied directly to a preparative HPLC (a 22 x 250 mm reverse phase column containing a C-18 resin comprised of 10 micron-size gel particles, elution = 25 mL/min, 0 to 25% acetonitrile in water with 0.1% trifluoroacetic acid over 60 minutes) . The desired fractions are collected, the acetonitrile is removed under vacuum, and the aqueous solution is frozen and lyophilized to afford the above-identified product (190) .
By following the procedure described in the Detailed Description of the Invention, the Figures and the Examples and using the appropriate starting materials, the following compounds are made:
Figure imgf000224_0001
Figure imgf000224_0002
Figure imgf000225_0001
and the compounds depicted in Figures 33A to 33C and 34A to 34C.
Example A
In vitro enzyme Assays for specificity determination
The ability of compounds of the present invention to act as a selective inhibitor of thrombin activity was assessed by determining the concentration of test- compound which inhibited the activity of this enzyme by 50%, (IC50) , and comparing this value to that determined for all or some of the following related serine proteases: recombinant tissue plasminogen activator (rt- PA) , plasmin, activated protein C, chymotrypsin, factor Xa and trypsin.
The buffer used for all assays was HBSA (10 mM HEPES, pH 7.5, 150 mM sodium chloride, 0.1% bovine serum albumin) .
The assay for IC50 determinations was conducted by combining in appropriate wells of a Corning microtiter plate, 50 microliters of HBSA, 50 microliters of the test compound at a specified concentration (covering a broad concentration range) diluted in HBSA (or HBSA alone for V0 (uninhibited velocity) measurement) , and 50 microliters of the enzyme diluted in HBSA. Following a 30 minute incubation at ambient temperature, 50 microliters of the substrate at the concentrations specified below were added to the wells, yielding a final total volume of 200 microliters. The initial velocity of chromogenic substrate hydrolysis was measured by the change in absorbance at 405 nm using a Thermo Max® Kinetic Microplate Reader over a 5 minute period in which less than 5% of the added substrate was utilized. The concentration of added inhibitor which caused a 50% decrease in the initial rate of hydrolysis was defined as the IC50 value. Thrombin (flla) Assay
Enzyme activity was determined using the chromogenic substrate, Pefachrome t-PA (CH3S02-D- hexahydrotyrosine-glycyl-L-Arginine-p-nitroaniline, obtained from Pentapharm Ltd.) . The substrate was reconstituted in deionized water prior to use. Purified human α-thrombin was obtained from Enzyme Research Laboratories, Inc. The buffer used for all assays was HBSA (10 mM HEPES, pH 7.5, 150 mM sodium chloride, 0.1% bovine serum albumin) .
IC50 determinations were conducted where HBSA (50 μL) , α-thrombin (50 μl) (the final enzyme concentration is 0.5 nM) and inhibitor (50 μl) (covering a broad concentration range) , were combined in appropriate wells and incubated for 30 minutes at room temperature prior to the addition of substrate Pefachrome-t-PA (50 μl) (the final substrate concentration is 250 μM, about 5 times Km) . The initial velocity of Pefachrome t-PA hydrolysis was measured by the change in absorbance at 405nm using a Thermo Max® Kinetic Microplate Reader over a 5 minute period in which less than 5% of the added substrate was utilized. The concentration of added inhibitor which caused a 50% decrease in the initial rate of hydrolysis was defined as the IC50 value. Factor Xa
Factor Xa catalytic activity was determined using the chromogenic substrate S-2765 (N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D- arginine-L-glycine-L-arginine-p-nitroaniline ) , obtained from DiaPharma Group (Franklin, OH) . All substrates were reconstituted in deionized water prior to use. The final concentration of S-2765 was 250 μM (about 5- times Km) . Purified human Factor X was obtained from
Enzyme Research Laboratories, Inc. (South Bend, IN) and Factor Xa (FXa) was activated and prepared from it as described [Bock, P.E., Craig, P.A., Olson, S.T., and Singh, P. Arch. Biochem. Biophys . 273:375-388 (1989)]. The enzyme was diluted into HBSA prior to assay in which the final concentration was 0.25 nM.
Recombinant tissue plasminogen activator (rt-PA) Assay rt-PA catalytic activity was determined using the substrate, Pefachrome t-PA (CH3S02-D-hexahydrotyrosine- glycyl-L-arginine-p-nitroaniline, obtained from Pentapharm Ltd. ) . The substrate was made up in deionized water followed by dilution in HBSA prior to the assay in which the final concentration was 500 micromolar (about 3-times Km) . Human rt-PA (Activase®) was obtained from Genentech Inc. The enzyme was reconstituted in deionized water and diluted into HBSA prior to the assay in which the final concentration was 1.0 nM. Plasmin Assay
Plasmin catalytic activity was determined using the chromogenic substrate, S-2366 [L-pyroglutamyl-L-prolyl- L-arginine-p-nitroaniline hydrochloride] , which was obtained from DiaPharma group . The substrate was made up in deionized water followed by dilution in HBSA prior to the assay in which the final concentration was 300 micromolar (about 2.5-times Km) . Purified human plasmin was obtained from Enzyme Research Laboratories , Inc . The enzyme was diluted into HBSA prior to assay in which the final concentration was 1.0 nM.
Activated Protein C (aPC) Assay aPC catalytic activity was determined using the chromogenic substrate, Pefachrome PC (delta- carbobenzloxy-D-lysine-L-prolyl-L-arginine-p- nitroaniline dihydrochloride) , obtained from Pentapharm Ltd.). The substrate was made up in deionized water followed by dilution in HBSA prior to the assay in which the final concentration was 400 micromolar (about 3- times Km) . Purified human aPC was obtained from Hematologic Technologies, Inc. The enzyme was diluted into HBSA prior to assay in which the final concentration was 1.0 nM. Chymotrypsin Assay Chymotrypsin catalytic activity was determined using the chromogenic substrate, S-2586 (methoxy- succinyl-L-arginine-L-prolyl-L-tyrosyl-p-nitroanilide) , which was obtained from DiaPharma Group. The substrate was made up in deionized water followed by dilution in HBSA prior to the assay in which the final concentration was 100 micromolar (about 9-times Km) . Purified (3X- crystallized; CDl) bovine pancreatic alpha-chymotrypsin was obtained from Worthington Biochemical Corp. The enzyme was reconstituted in deionized water and diluted into HBSA prior to assay in which the final concentration was 0.5 nM. Trypsin Assay
Trypsin catalytic activity was determined using the chromogenic substrate, S-2222 (benzoyl-L-isoleucine-L- glutamic acid- [gamma-methyl ester] -L-arginine-p- nitroanilide) , which was obtained from DiaPharma Group. The substrate was made up in deionized water followed by dilution in HBSA prior to the assay in which the final concentration was 250 micromolar (about 4-times Km) . Purified (3X-crystallized; TRL3) bovine pancreatic trypsin was obtained from Worthington Biochemical Corp. The enzyme was reconstituted in deionized water and diluted into HBSA prior to assay in which the final concentration was 0.5 nM. Table I lists the determined IC50 values for certain of the enzymes listed above for compounds of the present invention and demonstrate the high degree of specificity for the inhibition of alpha-thrombin compared to these related serine proteases.
TABLE I
Figure imgf000231_0001
A = < 100 nM B = > 100, < 300 nM C = > 300, < 2500 nM D = > 2500 nM

Claims

1. A compound of the formula
Figure imgf000232_0001
wherein
(A) X is selected from the group consisting of -S(0)2-, -N(R')-S(0)2-, -C(=0)-, -OC(=0)-, -N(R')C(=0)-, and a direct link, wherein R' is selected from hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms and aralkyl of about 6 to about 16 carbon atoms ;
(B) Rx is selected from the group consisting of:
(1) alkyl of 1 to about 12 carbon atoms which is optionally substituted with Y^ and/or Y2,
(2) alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms substituted with cycloalkyl of about 3 to about 8 carbon atoms which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the ring with Yi, Y2 and/or Y3, (3) cycloalkyl of 3 to about 15 carbon atoms, which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the ring with Yi7 Y2 and/or Y3,
(4) heterocycloalkyl of 4 to about 10 ring atoms with the ring atoms selected from carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen, and S(0)ι, wherein i is 0, 1 or 2 , which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the ring with Y1; Y2 and/or Y3,
(5) heterocyclo of 4 to about 10 ring atoms with the ring atoms selected from carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen, and S(0)i, rx rc including — $—^ ? , wherein — - f is a 5 to 7 member heterocycle of 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms, where G is -CH2-, -0-, -S(=0)-, -S(0)2- or -S-, which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the ring carbons with Ylf Y2 and/or Y3, (6) alkenyl of about 2 to about 6 carbon atoms which is optionally substituted with cycloalkyl of about 3 to about 8 carbon atoms, which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the ring carbons with
Figure imgf000233_0001
(7) aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms which is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted with Ya, Y2, and/or Y3,
(8) heteroaryl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms with the ring atoms selected from carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur, and which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted with Yl t Y2, and/or Y3,
(9) aralkyl of about 7 to about 15 carbon atoms which is optionally substituted on the alkyl chain with hydroxy or halogen and mono-, di-, or tri- substituted in the aryl ring with Yi, Y2, and/or Y3,
(10) heteroaralkyl of 5 to 14 ring atoms with the ring atoms selected from carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur, and which is optionally substituted on the alkyl chain with hydroxy or halogen and optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted on the ring with Yi, Y2, and/or Y3,
(11) aralkenyl of about 8 to about 16 carbon atoms which is optionally mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on the aryl ring with Yx, Y2, and/or Y3,
(12) heteroaralkenyl of 5 to 14 ring atoms with the ring atoms selected from carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur, and which is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted on the ring with Yl7 Y2, and/or Y3,
Figure imgf000234_0001
Figure imgf000234_0002
Figure imgf000234_0003
Figure imgf000235_0001
(17) fused carbocyclic alkyl of about 5 to about 15 carbon atoms,
(18) difluoromethyl or perfluoroalkyl of 1 to about 12 carbon atoms,
(19) perfluoroaryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms , (20) perfluoraralkyl of about 7 to about 15 carbon atoms, and
(21) hydrogen when X is a direct link; wherein
(i) each Yx, Y2, and Y3 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, cyano, nitro, tetrazolyl optionally substituted with alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, guanidino, amidino, methylamino, methylguanidino, -CF3, -CF2CF3, -CH(CF3)2/ -C(OH) (CF3)2, -OCF3, -OCF2CF3, -0CF2H, -0C(0)NH2, -0C(0)NHZι, -OC(0)NZιZ2, -NHC(0)Za, -NHC(0)NH2,
-NHC(0)NHZχ, -NHC(0)NZiZ2, -C(0)OH, -C(0)0Zι, -C(0)NH2, -C(0)NZ1Z2, -P(0)3H2, -P(0)3(Zι)2, -S(0)3H, -S(0)pZ1# -Z1; -OZi, -OH, -NH2, -NHZi, -NZ^, N-morpholino, and -S (0)p(CF2)qCF3, wherein p is 0, 1 or 2 , q is an integer from 0 to 5, and Zα and Z2 are independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl of 1 to about 12 carbon atoms, aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms, heteroaryl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms, aralkyl of about 7 to about 15 carbon atoms, and heteroaralkyl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms, or
(ii) Yi and Y2 are selected together to be -O [C(Z3) (Z4) ]rO- or -0[C(Z3) (Z4) ] r+i-/ wherein r is an integer from 1 to 4 and Z3 and Z4 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl or 1 to about 12 carbon atoms, aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms, heteroaryl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms, aralkyl of about 7 to about 15 carbon atoms, and heteroaralkyl of about 5 to about 14 ring atoms;
(C) Lac is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000236_0001
wherein
(1) n is 0, 1, 2, or 3; and
(2) R2 and R3 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl of 3 to about 8 carbon atoms, and aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms or R2 and R3, taken together, are -CH2-;
(D) J is selected from (1)
Figure imgf000237_0001
(2)
Figure imgf000237_0002
(3)
Figure imgf000237_0003
(4)
Figure imgf000237_0004
wherein qq is 0 or 1, R4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms; cycloalkyl of 3 to about 8 carbon atoms and aryl of about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms; R5a and 5b are independently selected from hydrogen, fluoro, chloro and alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms; R6 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms, -C(=0)R7a, or -CH2OR7b; Ra is alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, amino, alkylamino of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms or dialkylamino of 2 to about 12 carbon atoms; R7 is hydrogen, acyl or alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms; and Q7, Q8 and Q9 are independently selected from C (R5a) , N, S and O, provided that (i) Q7, Q8 and Q9 are not all C(Rsa) and (ii) only one of Q7, Q8 and Q9 can be 0 or S ;
(E) alternatively Lac-J is
Figure imgf000238_0001
wherein m is 1, 2 OR 3 and Jx is -C (=0) -NH-CH .α (F) E is selected from
(1) a group having the formul
Figure imgf000238_0002
wherein (a) Qi is C(R8) , C(R9) (R9a) , N, N(R8a) or a direct 1 ink ;
(b) Q2 is C(R8) , C(Rιo) (Rioa) , N, N(R8a) , S, or
0;
(c) Q3 is C(Rβ) , C(Rιι) (Rua) , N, or N(R8a) ;
(d) Q4 is C(R8) , C(Rιa) (Ri2a) / N, N(R8a) , S, or r u*, -
(e) Q5 is C(R13) C(R13) (R13a) or N;
(f) Q6 is C(Ri4) C(Ra4) (Ri4a) or N; (g) R8 is NR15Ris or -OR15;
(h) R8a is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms, NR15a6a or -0RιΞa;
( i) R9 , Rio / R11 R12 / Rι3 and R14 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms optionally substituted with alkoxy of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms; halogen and trifluoromethyl;
(j) R9a, R10a, Rlla RX2a, Rι3a and R14 are independently hydrogen or absent;
(k) R15 and Rι5a are independently hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms, or -C(=0)Rι7; (1) R16 and Rι6a are independently hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms;
(m) alternatively, R15 and Riβ or Rι5a and R16a taken together form a divalent radical of the formula -(CH2)W-, where w is 3, 4 or 5; and (n) R17 is alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms or alkoxy of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms ; with the provisos that: (i) no more than one of Ql t Q2, Q3 and Q4 can be C(R8) or N(R8a);
(ii) at least one of Qi, Q2, Q3 and Q4, but not all, is N or N(R8a) ;
(iii) only one of Q2 and Q4 can be O or S ; and
(iv) Qi, Q2, Q3 and Q4 are not all heteroatoms ;
(2) the group consisting of
(a)
Figure imgf000240_0001
(b)
Figure imgf000240_0002
(O
Figure imgf000241_0001
(d)
Figure imgf000241_0002
[e)
Figure imgf000241_0003
(f)
Figure imgf000241_0004
(g)
Figure imgf000242_0001
wherein R! 8 and R'9 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms substituted with alkoxy of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, and trifluoromethyl; R'ι0 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkoxy of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms, trihydrocarbylsilyl of 3 to about 16 carbon atoms, alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms or -C(=0)R'14a; R':1 is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms; R'ι2 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms or -C(=0)R' 4 ; R'i3 is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms; R'ι2 and R'ι3 taken together form a divalent radical of the formula -(CH2)W- where w is 3, 4 or 5 ; and R' 4a and R'ι4b are independently alkyl of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms or (CF2)jCF3 wherein j is 0, 1, 2 or 3; and
(3) a six membered heterocyclic ring having two ring nitrogen atoms and the remainder of the ring atoms carbon atoms which is substituted with
Figure imgf000242_0002
on a ring carbon and is substituted with R"ι0 and R"n on different ring carbons wherein
(1) R"8 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl of about 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl of 3 to about 7 carbon atoms, -(CF2)kCF3, -OR"12, -C(=0)R"ι2# -C(=0)0R"i2 and -C(=0)NHR"ι2 wherein R"12 is H or alkyl of 1 to about 12 carbon atoms and k is 0, 1, 2 or 3 ;
(2) R"9 is selected from hydrogen and alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms ;
(3) alternatively R"8 and R"9 are taken together to give a divalent radical of the formula -(CH2)W- wherein w is 3, 4 or 5 ; and
(4) R"ιo and R"n are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms substituted with alkoxy of 1 to about 3 carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to about 8 carbon atoms, halogen, trifluoromethyl,
-OC(R"13) (R"ι4) -C(=0) -R"is wherein R"ι3 and R"ι4 are independently selected from hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, R"i5 is hydroxy, alkoxy of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms or -N(R"16) (R"ι7) wherein R"i6 and R"ι are independently hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
2. A compound according to claim 1 wherein E is
Figure imgf000244_0001
3. A compound according to claim 2 wherein Qx is a direct link and (a) Q2 is C(R8) or C(Rιo) (Rioa) / Q3 is N and Q4 is N; (b) Q2 is C(R8) or C(R10) (Rioa)/ Q3 is
C(Rιι) ( na) and Q4 is N; (c) Q2 is O, Q3 is N and Q4 is C(R8); (d) Q2 is N, Q3 is N and Q4 is C(R8); or (e) Q2 is N, Q3 is C(R8) or C(RU) (Rlla) and Q4 is N.
4. A compound according to claim 3 wherein Q6 is C(RX4) or C(R14) (R14a) .
5. A compound according to claim 4 wherein E is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000244_0002
Figure imgf000245_0001
6. A compound according to claim 2 wherein Rτ is benzyl, substituted benzyl, phenyl or substituted phenyl .
7. A compound acording to claim 6 wherein X is -S(02)- or a direct link.
8. A compound according to claim 7 wherein Lac is
Figure imgf000245_0002
9. A compound according to claim 8 wherein n is 2.
10. A compound according to claim 9 wherein J is
Figure imgf000245_0003
11. A compound according to claim 10 wherein R4 and R6 are hydrogen.
12. A compound according to claim 11 wherein R2 and R3 are hydrogen.
13. A compound according to claim 2 wherein Lac is
Figure imgf000246_0001
and n is 2.
14. A compound according to claim 13 wherein E is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000246_0002
Figure imgf000247_0001
15. A compound according to claim 14 wherein J is
Figure imgf000247_0002
16. A compound according to claim 15 wherein R4 and R5 are hydrogen .
17. A compound according to claim 16 wherein E is selected from
Figure imgf000247_0003
18. A compound according to claim 2 wherein Lac is
Figure imgf000248_0001
19. A compound according to claim 18 wherein n is 2
20. A compound according to claim 19 wherein Ri is benzyl, substituted benzyl, phenyl or substituted phenyl .
21. A compound according to claim 20 wherein X is -S(0)2- or a direct link.
22. A compound according to claim 21 wherein E is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000248_0002
Figure imgf000249_0001
23. A compound according to claim 22 wherein J is
Figure imgf000249_0002
wherein R4 and R6 are hydrogen.
24. A compound according to claim 2 wherein Lac is
Figure imgf000249_0003
25. A compound according to claim 24 wherein n is 2 and m is 1.
26. A compound according to claim 25 wherein R is benzyl, substituted benzyl, phenyl or substituted phenyl .
27. A compound according to claim 26 wherein X is -S(0)2- or a direct link.
28. A compound according to claim 27 wherein E is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000250_0001
29. A compound according to claim 28 wherein J is
Figure imgf000250_0002
wherein R4 and R6 are hydrogen.
30. A compound according to claim 2, which is selected from the compounds depicted in Figures 33A and 33B.
31. A compound according to claim 1 wherein E is selected from the group consisting of
(a)
Figure imgf000250_0003
(b)
Figure imgf000251_0001
(c)
Figure imgf000251_0002
(d)
Figure imgf000251_0003
(e)
Figure imgf000251_0004
(f)
Figure imgf000252_0001
(g)
Figure imgf000252_0002
32. A compound according to claim 31 wherein E is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000252_0003
Figure imgf000252_0004
Figure imgf000253_0001
Figure imgf000253_0002
33. A compound according to claim 32 wherein Ri is benzyl, substituted benzyl, phenyl or substituted phenyl .
34. A compound acording to claim 33 wherein X is -S(02)- or a direct link.
35. A compound according to claim 34 wherein Lac is
Figure imgf000254_0001
36. A compound according to claim 35 wherein n is 2
37. A compound according to claim 36 wherein J is
Figure imgf000254_0002
38. A compound according to claim 37 wherein R4 and R6 are hydrogen.
39. A compound according to claim 38 wherein R2 and R3 are hydrogen .
40. A compound according to claim 31 wherein Lac is
Figure imgf000254_0003
and n is 2.
41. A compound according to claim 40 wherein E is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000255_0001
Figure imgf000255_0002
Figure imgf000255_0003
Figure imgf000255_0004
30
42. A compound according to claim 41 wherein J is
Figure imgf000256_0001
43. A compound according to claim 42 wherein R and R6 are hydrogen.
44. A compound according to claim 43 wherein E is selected from
Figure imgf000256_0002
45. A compound according to claim 31 wherein Lac
Figure imgf000256_0003
46. A compound according to claim 45 wherein n is 2.
47. A compound according to claim 46 wherein Rx is benzyl, substituted benzyl, phenyl or substituted phenyl .
48. A compound according to claim 47 wherein X is -S(0)2- or a direct link.
49. A compound according to claim 48 wherein E is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000257_0001
Figure imgf000257_0002
Figure imgf000257_0003
Figure imgf000257_0004
Figure imgf000258_0001
50. A compound according to claim 49 wherein J is
Figure imgf000258_0002
wherein R and R6 are hydrogen.
51. A compound according to claim 31 wherein Lac-Ji is
Figure imgf000258_0003
52. A compound according to claim 51 wherein n is 2 and m is 1.
53. A compound according to claim 52 wherein Ri is benzyl, substituted benzyl, phenyl or substituted phenyl .
54. A compound according to claim 53 wherein X is -S(0)2- or a direct link.
55. A compound according to claim 54 wherein E is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000259_0001
56 A compound according to claim 55 wherein J is
Figure imgf000259_0002
wherein R4 and R6 are hydrogen.
57. A compound according to claim 1, which is selected from the compounds of Examples 24, 35, 36, 38, 39, 46, 48, 55, 61 and 67.
58. A compound according to claim 1 wherein a six membered heterocyclic ring having two ring nitrogen atoms and the remainder of the ring atoms carbon atoms which is substituted with
/ !
R son a ring carbon and is substituted with R"ι0 and R"n on different ring carbons.
59. A compound according to claim 58 wherein E is selected from
Figure imgf000260_0001
60. A compound according to claim 59 wherein Rx is benzyl, substituted benzyl, phenyl or substituted phenyl .
61. A compound acording to claim 60 wherein X is -S(02)- or a direct link.
62. A compound according to claim 61 wherein Lac is
Figure imgf000260_0002
63. A compound according to claim 62 wherein n is 2
64. A compound according to claim 63 wherein J is
Figure imgf000261_0001
65. A compound according to claim 64 wherein R4 and R6 are hydrogen.
66. A compound according to claim 65 wherein R2 and R3 are hydrogen .
67. A compound according to claim 58 wherein Lac is
Figure imgf000261_0002
and n is 2.
68. A compound according to claim 67 wherein E is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000262_0001
69. A compound according to claim 68 wherein J is
Figure imgf000262_0002
70. A compound according to claim 69 wherein R and R6 are hydrogen .
71. A compound according to claim 70 wherein E is selected from
Figure imgf000262_0003
72. A compound according to claim 58 wherein Lac
Figure imgf000263_0001
73. A compound according to claim 72 wherein n is 2.
74. A compound according to claim 73 wherein Rx is benzyl, substituted benzyl, phenyl or substituted phenyl .
75. A compound according to claim 74 wherein X is -S(0)2- or a direct link.
76. A compound according to claim 75 wherein E is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000263_0002
77. A compound according to claim 76 wherein J is
Figure imgf000264_0001
Q wherein R4 and R6 are hydrogen.
78. A compound according to claim 58 wherein Lac-J is
Figure imgf000264_0002
79. A compound according to claim 78 wherein n is 2 and m is 1. 0
80. A compound according to claim 79 wherein Ri is benzyl, substituted benzyl, phenyl or substituted phenyl .
81. A compound according to claim 80 wherein X is -S(0)2- or a direct link. 5 82. A compound according to claim 81 wherein E is selected from the group consisting of
0
Figure imgf000265_0001
83. A compound according to claim 82 wherein J is
Figure imgf000265_0002
wherein R and R6 are hydrogen.
84. A pharmaceutical composition for treating or decreasing the incidence of a condition in a mammal characterized by abnormal thrombosis, comprising a therapeutically acceptable carrier, and a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of any of claims 1, 2, 13, 16, 19, 24, 29, 30, 31, 41, 57, 58, 59, 62, and 69.
85. A method for treating or decreasing the incidence of a condition in a mammal characterized by abnormal thrombosis, comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of any of claims 1, 2, 13, 16, 19, 24, 29, 30, 31, 41, 57, 58, 62 and 69.
PCT/US2001/012337 2000-04-14 2001-04-13 Tetrahydro-azepinone derivatives as thrombin inhibitors WO2001079261A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU2001255408A AU2001255408A1 (en) 2000-04-14 2001-04-13 Tetrahydro-azepinone derivatives as thrombin inhibitors

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US54909100A 2000-04-14 2000-04-14
US55009200A 2000-04-14 2000-04-14
US09/550,257 US6541467B1 (en) 2000-04-14 2000-04-14 Thrombin inhibitors having a lactam at P3
US09/549,091 2000-04-14
US09/550,092 2000-04-14
US09/550,257 2000-04-14

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2001079261A1 true WO2001079261A1 (en) 2001-10-25

Family

ID=27415549

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2001/012337 WO2001079261A1 (en) 2000-04-14 2001-04-13 Tetrahydro-azepinone derivatives as thrombin inhibitors

Country Status (2)

Country Link
AU (1) AU2001255408A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2001079261A1 (en)

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2002012196A2 (en) * 2000-08-07 2002-02-14 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Lactam compounds and their use as inhibitors of serine proteases and method
WO2003043981A1 (en) * 2001-11-16 2003-05-30 Glaxo Group Limited 2-(3-sulfonylamino-2-oxopyrrolidin-1-yl)propanamides as factor xa inhibitors
JP2006510648A (en) * 2002-12-06 2006-03-30 グラクソ グループ リミテッド 2- (5-chlorothien-2-yl) -N-{(3S) -1-[(1S) -1-methyl-2-morpholin-4-yl-2-oxoethyl] -2-oxopyrrolidine-3- Il} ethenesulfonamide crystalline derivatives
US7276608B2 (en) 2003-07-11 2007-10-02 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Tetrahydroquinoline derivatives as cannabinoid receptor modulators
JP2013532713A (en) * 2010-08-04 2013-08-19 ノバルティス アーゲー N-((6-Amino-pyridin-3-yl) methyl) -heteroaryl-carboxamides as plasma kallikrein inhibitors
US9815850B2 (en) 2016-02-05 2017-11-14 Denali Therapeutics Inc. Compounds, compositions and methods
WO2019089667A1 (en) 2017-11-01 2019-05-09 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Bridged bicyclic compounds as farnesoid x receptor modulators
US11072618B2 (en) 2016-12-09 2021-07-27 Denali Therapeutics Inc. Compounds, compositions and methods

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1995035311A1 (en) * 1994-06-17 1995-12-28 Corvas International, Inc. 3-amino-2-oxo-1-piperidineacetic derivatives as enzyme inhibitors
WO1997001338A1 (en) * 1995-06-27 1997-01-16 Merck & Co., Inc. Pyridinone-thrombin inhibitors
WO1999007730A1 (en) * 1997-08-11 1999-02-18 Cor Therapeutics, Inc. SELECTIVE FACTOR Xa INHIBITORS CONTAINING A FUSED AZEPINONE STRUCTURE
WO1999007732A1 (en) * 1997-08-11 1999-02-18 Cor Therapeutics, Inc. SELECTIVE FACTOR Xa INHIBITORS
WO1999007731A1 (en) * 1997-08-11 1999-02-18 Cor Therapeutics, Inc. SELECTIVE FACTOR Xa INHIBITORS
WO2000047563A1 (en) * 1999-02-09 2000-08-17 Bristol-Myers Squibb Co. LACTAM INHIBITORS OF FXa AND METHOD

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1995035311A1 (en) * 1994-06-17 1995-12-28 Corvas International, Inc. 3-amino-2-oxo-1-piperidineacetic derivatives as enzyme inhibitors
WO1997001338A1 (en) * 1995-06-27 1997-01-16 Merck & Co., Inc. Pyridinone-thrombin inhibitors
WO1999007730A1 (en) * 1997-08-11 1999-02-18 Cor Therapeutics, Inc. SELECTIVE FACTOR Xa INHIBITORS CONTAINING A FUSED AZEPINONE STRUCTURE
WO1999007732A1 (en) * 1997-08-11 1999-02-18 Cor Therapeutics, Inc. SELECTIVE FACTOR Xa INHIBITORS
WO1999007731A1 (en) * 1997-08-11 1999-02-18 Cor Therapeutics, Inc. SELECTIVE FACTOR Xa INHIBITORS
WO2000047563A1 (en) * 1999-02-09 2000-08-17 Bristol-Myers Squibb Co. LACTAM INHIBITORS OF FXa AND METHOD

Cited By (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2002012196A3 (en) * 2000-08-07 2003-01-16 Bristol Myers Squibb Co Lactam compounds and their use as inhibitors of serine proteases and method
WO2002012196A2 (en) * 2000-08-07 2002-02-14 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Lactam compounds and their use as inhibitors of serine proteases and method
WO2003043981A1 (en) * 2001-11-16 2003-05-30 Glaxo Group Limited 2-(3-sulfonylamino-2-oxopyrrolidin-1-yl)propanamides as factor xa inhibitors
US7179835B2 (en) 2001-11-16 2007-02-20 Glaxo Group Limited 2-(3-sulfonylamino-2-oxopyrrolidin-1-yl)propanamides as factor xa inhibitors
JP4660197B2 (en) * 2002-12-06 2011-03-30 グラクソ グループ リミテッド 2- (5-chlorothien-2-yl) -N-{(3S) -1-[(1S) -1-methyl-2-morpholin-4-yl-2-oxoethyl] -2-oxopyrrolidine-3- Il} ethenesulfonamide crystalline derivatives
JP2006510648A (en) * 2002-12-06 2006-03-30 グラクソ グループ リミテッド 2- (5-chlorothien-2-yl) -N-{(3S) -1-[(1S) -1-methyl-2-morpholin-4-yl-2-oxoethyl] -2-oxopyrrolidine-3- Il} ethenesulfonamide crystalline derivatives
US8119808B2 (en) 2003-07-11 2012-02-21 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Tetrahydroquinoline derivatives as cannabinoid receptor modulators
US7884113B2 (en) 2003-07-11 2011-02-08 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Tetrahydroquinoline derivatives as cannabinoid receptor modulators
US7276608B2 (en) 2003-07-11 2007-10-02 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Tetrahydroquinoline derivatives as cannabinoid receptor modulators
JP2013532713A (en) * 2010-08-04 2013-08-19 ノバルティス アーゲー N-((6-Amino-pyridin-3-yl) methyl) -heteroaryl-carboxamides as plasma kallikrein inhibitors
US9290485B2 (en) 2010-08-04 2016-03-22 Novartis Ag N-((6-amino-pyridin-3-yl)methyl)-heteroaryl-carboxamides
US9815850B2 (en) 2016-02-05 2017-11-14 Denali Therapeutics Inc. Compounds, compositions and methods
US9896458B2 (en) 2016-02-05 2018-02-20 Denali Therapeutics Inc. Compounds, compositions and methods
US10131676B2 (en) 2016-02-05 2018-11-20 Denali Therapeutics Inc. Compounds, compositions and methods
US10604535B2 (en) 2016-02-05 2020-03-31 Denali Therapeutics Inc. Compounds, compositions and methods
US11072618B2 (en) 2016-12-09 2021-07-27 Denali Therapeutics Inc. Compounds, compositions and methods
WO2019089667A1 (en) 2017-11-01 2019-05-09 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Bridged bicyclic compounds as farnesoid x receptor modulators

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
AU2001255408A1 (en) 2001-10-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US5656645A (en) Aromatic heterocyclic derivatives as enzyme inhibitors
US5658930A (en) Aromatic heterocyclic derivatives as enzyme inhibitors
US6008351A (en) Aromatic hetherocyclic derivatives as enzyme inhibitors
US5637599A (en) Arginine mimic derivatives as enzyme inhibitors
US5932733A (en) 3-amino-2-oxo-1-piperidineacetic derivatives containing an arginine mimic as enzyme inhibitors
US6034215A (en) 3-amino-2-oxo-1-piperidnercetic derivatives as enzyme inhibitors
WO1996018644A9 (en) Aromatic heterocyclic derivatives as enzyme inhibitors
EP1182207A2 (en) Non-covalent inhibitors of urokinase and blood vessel formation
WO1995035311A9 (en) 3-amino-2-oxo-1-piperidineacetic derivatives as enzyme inhibitors
WO1997046207A2 (en) Aromatic heterocyclic derivatives as enzyme inhibitors
WO1995035311A1 (en) 3-amino-2-oxo-1-piperidineacetic derivatives as enzyme inhibitors
US5714499A (en) 3-amino-2-oxo-1-piperidineacetic derivatives containing an arginine mimic as enzyme inhibitors
WO1999026920A1 (en) Substituted 3-amino-2-hydroxyphenylacetamide derivatives as enzyme inhibitors (ii)
CA2387002A1 (en) Non-covalent inhibitors of urokinase and blood vessel formation
WO2001079261A1 (en) Tetrahydro-azepinone derivatives as thrombin inhibitors
US6506754B1 (en) Non-covalent thrombin inhibitors
US5696231A (en) N-substituted glycine derivatives as enzyme inhibitors
US6541467B1 (en) Thrombin inhibitors having a lactam at P3
US6777431B2 (en) Non-convalent thrombin inhibitors
US5955576A (en) Inhibitors of thrombosis
US6506760B1 (en) Substituted hydrazinyl heteroaromatic inhibitors of thrombin
US6342504B1 (en) Aromatic heterocyclic derivatives as enzyme inhibitors
WO2001079195A9 (en) Pyridine and pyrazine derivatives as thrombin inhibitors
US6506761B1 (en) Substituted hydrazinyl heteroaromatic inhibitors of thrombin
WO2001079193A2 (en) Substituted hydrazinyl heteroaromatic inhibitors of thrombin

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP